Hyundai Powertech Final Document (2017.07.10)

Specification & Data Sheet for
Compressed Air Dryer Package
■ JOB NO : 170105-1
■ TYPE : HEAT OF COMPRESSION
■ MODEL : PHCN-7700SP
■ CUSTOMER : HYUNDAI POWERTECH
2017. 07. 10
FINAL DOCUMENT
Office & Factory : 경기도 김포시 월곶면 월하로 165

Telephone : 031-998-9126-7 Fax : 031-998-9128
E-mail : [email protected] www.ptkair.com
Dedication to every client,s success
WORLD LEADERS IN THE COMPRESSED AIR DRYING SYSTEMS

Contents for
1. OPERATING MANUAL
2. SPECIFICATIONS, DATA SHEET & DRAWING
3. PART LIST & CATALOG
4. INSPECTION REPORT

FINAL DOCUMENT
1. OPERATING MANUAL
PTK-DS-001 WORLD LEADERS IN THE COMPRESSED AIR DRYING SYSTEMS

Heat Of Compression Dryer Operation Manual
Recommended Installation,
Operation & Maintenance
Manual for Air Dryer
Compressed Air Dryer

O & M Munual
Office & Factory : WOLHARO 165, WOLGOT-MYUN, GIMPO-CITY, KOREA
Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128

Table of Contents
1. Precaution
2. Installation
3. Characteristics of the equipment
4. Equipment systems
5 D
5. Description
i ti off Contents
C t t
6. Operation of equipment
7. Control Logic
8. Control Panel
9. Adsorbent packed
10. The cause of the fault and the measures
11. Operation Check Sheet
12. Acceptant trial operation of conformance

1. Precaution
This equipment is manufactured in the pneutec korea has been designed with safety as a top priority,
in normal operation, plant safety and whether the test has been shipped.
All the pressure vessel is produced manufactured, produced written for and with the rules,
applicable laws in a hydrostatic test that will work safety by executing the verifie
Safe operation of this facility and to ensure the best performance and consequently for the installation,
operation, maintenance and repair of precautions must be observed.
In air dryer viewed from the state which is being pressed, repair or replacement
parts to disconnect or remove the Do not be alarmed.
Please completely remove the pneumatic Before stating any maintenance or installation
installation.
Install an air dryer under under pressure, or when maintenance can cause fatal accidents.
Check the nameplate attached to the pressure vessel,it should be used under the
design
g pressure
p and design
g temperature
p indicated on the nameplate,
p ,
do not use more than at the maximum use conditions.
Arbitrary welding on pressure vessels, damage or wear naegeona Do not change.

If there is any damage to the pressure vessel aneuni unsafe Please note,
the appearance of pressure vessels
vessels, swelling in the inner tube
tube,corrosion,
corrosion
inspection agency for the pressed or scooped hollow phenomenon, leak or fire hazard,
such as a surface on a regular basis.
Also, check the specifications of the equipment nameplate Please,
please supply the power within the allowable voltage range.
The state does not block the main power supply Do not the electrical work.
Since the power is switched off in the electrical circuit may be left inside the
current work carefully please.

2. Installation
1. Warehousing inspection.
The equipment must be thoroughly inspected for damage that may occur during transport acquired
immediately. If there is damage to the equipment during shipping, please submit shipping
immediately notify the parties to a complaint.
2. Handling
Handling of equipment is using the lifting rings attached to the dryer vessel or More transpor
using a forklift. There must always be used when transporting the equipment load and
give proper consideration to the transport process.
3. Installation
-. Please install corrosive chemicals, explosive gas, where there is no harmful gas.
-. Do not place the pollutants that generate a lot of heat.
If unavoidable
unavoidable, if you must a periodic cleaning
cleaning.
-. The ambient temperature is not changing rapidly and must be installed in a location
that does not exceed the range of 4 ~ 49 ℃, please install where there is severe vibration.
-. More robust and secure installation on a flat basis and the foundation bolts.
-. You must obtain at least more than 1m of free space in order
to facilitate maintenance and inspection of equipment.
-. Please consider the working conditions for the adsorbent heater replacement and
and repair, such as coolers.

4. Piping
All external piping, except as specifically stated will be supplied by the user.
The p
pipe
p must be suitable for the maximum operating
p g conditions specified
p on the name
plate of the equipment, the weight of the piping when installing the piping must be connected so
as not to load equipment.
The size of all the piping must be greater than or equal to the connecting pipe installed
in the equipment.
equipment
Or install plumbing and piping components have a smaller size, reduce the pressure
if installed incorrectly and can reduce the capacity.
You must select the correct size of piping, tubing, etc. Review your selection for future
expansion plans should be designed to accommodate the expansion and capacity to change.
If you are installing the piping of an existing piping system when connected, please
connect to thoroughly prevent foreign matter inside the piping before connecting.
If you are a new plumbing, piping so that the effect on the equipment during construction should
be working after you install a protective device, and construction be working after you install
a protective device, and construction and installation clean the inside of the pipe to prevent
foreign matter from entering inside the equipment, such as occurred during the operation
when connected Please.

Please
When conducting a pressure test of the pipe in a state-dryer is installed can also
cause damage of the adsorbent, so please conduct a possible pneumatic test.
It is not necessary to install a by-pass pipe, if necessary operations such as equipment repair and
p
replacement p
of parts, y
it is recommended that the entire air system can be easilyy installed
without doing the work as possible off.
5. Power Connection
After installation,
installation please be sure to check the power connection when the power specifications
specifications.
If you connect an improper voltage can cause equipment damage and serious injury.
-. Please connect equipment internal wiring is completed before shipment,
so only the state supply.
-.. After connecting the power supply Please measure pilhi voltage and insulation.
-. Please check the wiring and the bonding state of the instrument panel.
6. Configuration of equipment
Water particles or the design specification over the inlet temperature of the dryer to reduce capacity,
the design flow rate than the flow rate used, or when used for a long period of time at
a lower pressure condition than the design pressure drop the performance of the absorbent inside
the can affect the dew point.
In order to maximize the performance of desiccant dryers meet the specifications of the equipment
inlet temperature, pressure, flow rate must meet the design requirements.
If inlet temperature is higher than the design conditions, such as installing
a cooler on the equipment front end to be designed to fit the inlet temperature conditions.
Also not to be brought into the liquid state of water tank at the front end equipment, separators,
you must install the equipment, such as filters.
Desiccant dryers ago, trailing, you must install a filter.
In the pre-filter oil, dirt, can remove contaminants such as moisture muljilreul it should exhibit normal
performance of the dryer, install the rear end of the absorbent particulate filter to move on to the
rear of the dryer inside the facility can be prevented.
B f
Before operating
ti the
th equipment,
i t check
h k whether
h th the
th normall installation
i t ll ti off the
th filter
filt inside
i id
the ELEMENT and parts..
Filter, we recommend installing a differential pressure gauge to check the replacement cycle.
3. Characteristics of the equipment
Dehumidification of the compressed air are the most important problem in all areas using compressed air.
It is because the water in the compressed air is an industrial manufacturing process, and instrumentation
equipment, as well as adversely affect the human life cycle.
In order to obtain this compression of the dry air non-staining, it is possible to use a desiccant air dryer
excellent in safety.
The Heat of Compression Air Dryer Dryer is held by an excellent performance not found in
non-heated and heated Dryer widely used conventionally.
If the Heat of Compression Air Dryer listed general functional characteristics and the advantages
held by below.
1) Operation cost reduction - uses an adsorbent to be reproduced at a low temperature,
by using a two-stage ejection operation regenerate the adsorbent by heat of the Compressor costs
are greater energy saving effect Saving.
2) Dew point to prevent degradation - After playing enough to prevent the regeneration temperature
of the adsorbent was Tower Cooling Down by switching rapidly developing city that lowering
the dew point.
3) By using the hot air coming from the compressor, Cooling coolant is needed to cool off
because when cooling water pipe connection work.
4) Temperature suitable for playback desiccant a heater and control by setting up against
unnecessary power consumption because they admired electric heater automatic safety device
that will halt, overheating were murderedAttached and had induced the safe operation.
5) Heating line and cooling line in regulating flow rate the proportioning valve that was attached,
hot air and cooling air the amount of control.
6) Applicable air turbo and is compressor oil free compressor recommend their intentions.
Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128

4. Equipment system
4.1 Drying Cycle
Compressed air by compressor of the entrance to dryer, 2-way butterfly valve entered
through the first one of the small tower.
The air is passed through desiccant in tower tower head to the top of.
At this time of particulates in the air moisture is removed using dried air to the discharge
to the exit the problems of the drying cycle that it is.
- Standard type PHCN Type Drying Cycle : 4.0hr

4.2 Regeneration Cycle
Air dryer ratio control valve installed at the entrance to the automatic disconnect in about
30 % with boosting heater case that is equipped with heater water rising of the renewable
heat sources through the locals. After oil absorbent to play back to the top of the Tower,
water-cooled passes through the cooler and separator main inlet the piping and joined a
Desiccant Tower After passing through pipes outletThrough production supply will be done
on this process
process, at about line.
line
And it is referred to as Regeneration Regeneration is accomplished by two processes.
1) Heating Cycle
If the Hot Air Compressor is equipped with a Boosting Heater, through the Heater
temperature rises to play, play from top to bottom of the recovery tower, by passing
the lower side of the recovery tower piping temperature is raised.
g ((heating)
This is called Heating g) Electric Heater is automaticallyy byy the T.I.C ((Temp.
p Indicating
g
Controller) on the Control Panel On / Off, and thereby the operation. Hot Air also sometimes
come in below the design value alarm and the alarm can be fitted the design value alarm
and the alarm can be fitted check the temperature of the currently available supply.
Heating and Hot Air sikimyeo come natchu condensation temperature through the
water-cooled Cooler mounted on the Dryer Unit, through the subsequent Moisture
Separator to separate the water sikimyeo the Main Inlet piping and condensation,
remove the water after passing through the Moisture Separator to join the Main Inlet
pipe is supplied to the Drying Tower.

- PHCN Type Heating Cycle : It can be changed according to the conditions in 2
2.5hr
5hr ~ 3.5Hr.
3 5Hr -
2) Cooling Cycle
When the process proceeds to Cooing Cycle, is automatically closed and Valve
When the process proceeds to Cooing Cycle,

Cycle is automatically closed and Valve
mounted on Heating Line, Cooler air that has passed through the bottom of the
compressor into a recovery tower through the Cooling Cycle Control valve lowers the
temperature of the adsorbent. The power supply is automatically cut off by the electric
heater is disconnected time. This is called Cooling .
Flow of air is about 30% air is passed through the cooler by the proportional control valve
mounted to the Inlet Line Cooling and Hot Air come natchu the temperature through
the water-cooled Cooler mounted in a Dryer Unit Said by the condensation, to pass
through the water to remove after Moisture Separator Main Inlet pipe and Joined and
is fed to the Drying Tower.

- PHCN Type Cooling Cycle : It can be changed according to the conditions in 0
0.5hr
5hr ~ 1.5Hr.
1 5Hr
5. Description of Contents
5-1. Drying
y g Tower
PHCN" Heat of Compression Air Dryer is two Tower and Desiccant
is filled in the interior of the Tower to adsorb moisture in the ompressed
air passing through the inside Drying Tower supplies the dry air.
Upper and lower mouth of the outlet Nozzle Tower has been grains of
Desiccant flow from entering the piping has been installed Design
inspection agency of the year in the item, use the T
Tower have passed the performance test.
5-2. Electric Heater

Electric heater by heating the air is to reuse an absorbent material used to play.
Regenerative air exit street will be affected depending how the
reproduction of an absorbent material in accordance with the heating
temperature because they can get to that performance
fell short of a setting in which case the heating temperatureCan not.

Electric heater of the heating temperature is panel front door T.I.C
of awards and controlled by Inside panel Electric heater to prevent overheating of a separate
thermo switch , had been installed.
If, compressor hot air the temperature of the adsorbent, which regeneration temperature even
higher if boosting heater the No, even if installing.
5-3. Water Cooler
Heating & cooling cycling while the north, the renewable air of temperature became
a high temperature.
And the role of the Air Cooling of the hot before joining the
Main process, wherein a large amount of condensed
water generated by the Cool Down saturated regeneration

air through the Separator, Drain Drain then by the automatic
device (Auto Trap).

Temperature of Cooling Water is to be supplied to the initial design temperature or lower,
should not block the supply
5-4. Separator
Water inside the equipment for discharging the condensed water from Cooler consists
of a 5-stage centrifugal separation it removes substantially
100% condensate in the reproduction air.

Drain the water from the Drain Trap attached to the
bottom.
bottom
Drain Trap is always smoothly discharge the watereven if
a double is installed to a malfunction in either one.
5-5. Pneumatic On-off Valve

"PHCN" Dryer with compressed air introduced into the A or B Tower And the one derived by
the Tower to the drying process The Tower is opposite to

automatically control the regeneration process.
Typically uses a High-Performance Butterfly Valve.
5-6. Pneumatic Proportion Control Valve (공압비례제어밸브)
Ai D
Air Dryer off th
the automatic
t ti control
t l tto maintain
i t i a constant
t t air
i volume
l play
l The
Th valve,
l
differential pressure transmitter Positioner & Major components include,
It consists Orifice.
Orifice and sent to the Controller to measure the flow rate
with a pressure difference, The Controller receives a signal
from the valve of the valve It controls the opening
and closing rate.

Control Air off when the valve is in the actuated state Literally, stopping, power is cut off
signal from the Controller If the output is not (Burn Out) valve to the Open status
It is designed to be held in the field without
interruption of the supply of compressed air.
5 7 4-Way
5-7. 4 Way Solenoid Valve
Dryer piping installed on the Cylinder Valve and Actuator Valve, etc.
To drive the Open / Close Valve is by compressed air.

Air In / Outlet Actuator Valve The Double (Double acting)
Sol. V / V isValve for controlling the use and the

Heating / Cooling of the reproduction process
Single (single-acting) Sol. V / V are used.
5-8. Pressure / Temperature Gauge & Transmitter
Press. Gauge and Temp. Gauge the pipe and Dryer in Drying Tower Heating of the particular
reproduction Tower serves to determine the operating state is provided Care should be taken
to drive the process on heating temperature. When the heating temperature is low in the
adsorbent regeneration May be adversely affected had a poor performance.
5-9. Dew Point Meter
A measuring device that can determine the quality of the water content in the drying air
supplied to the internal field
SENSOR can measure th

the dew
d point,
i t which
hi h mustt be
b reliable
li bl and
d is
i calibrated
lib t d att least
l t
once every two years.

6. Operation of equipment
6-1. Ready
y for operation
p
1) Check the spelling of the power supply specifications shall be supplied to the Panel
2) In / Out piping, check the connection status and temperature of the Hot Air & coolant pipe.
3) Open the By-Pass installed across the mouth of the Dryer outlet and A, B Drying Tower
in to the pressure to operate until the pressure equalization.
4) Temperature of Air to be supplied to the Dryer is andoemeuro beyond the top 40 ℃ on Drying
Tower Check the temperature of the thermometer installed.
5) Make sure that all settings are properly input, the Control Panel.
6-2. Start operation
1) By the Control Power On / Off Switch to On to start the operation of the Panel.
2 Pressure,
Pressure temperature,
temperature and confirms once more the settings for each instrument gapdeung
gapdeung.
3) Check the operating temperature of the In / Outlet pipe.
4) Check the operating temperature of the Hot Air pipe.
5) Check the operation temperature of the cooling water In / Outlet connection pipe.
6) Each Valve, works and lighting conditions, such as Lamp and check that there are no more.
7) The value that is on the T.I.C Indicating ensure that increases with time and the input
Electric Heater confirm that by setting the On / Off and Tower of play
Check Check the thermometer.
8) Verify that the process is in progress by the time entered for each Timer.
9) Playing tower heating of / cooling cycle of Temperature change is checked and going.
10) All according to the progress of the Heating / Cooling Cycle of Regen Cooler,
confirms the rear temperature.
11) Check the connection status of the Separator Drain Line the bottom.
12) Check the operation state of the operation of the proportional control valve and the Controller,
D.P Transmitter for controlling the reproduction rate.
13) If the check does not have to start over, and wherein the normal operation.
6-3. Confirmation of Operation Cycle : ( 7. Control Logic Reference)
1) After checking the supply pressure of the Tower Power Switch On Air
2) "A" or "B" T
Tower P
Purge pressure gauge status
t t
Drying Lamp lights up (4 timekeeping) Heating Lamp lights up (3 timekeeping)
3) After 3 hours off Heating Lamp - Cooling Lamp lighting (1 timekeeping)
4) Cooling Lamp off after one hour
5) Tower switching - A or B Tower Purge
Drying Lamp lights up (4 timekeeping) Heating Lamp lights up (2.5 hours kept)
6) Continues to repeat operation.
6-4. Shutdown
In principle, in case a stop driving the dryer cooling shutdown, it is recommended that after the
and heating during the In the case to case that the shutdown time heating We must give them
to a proper operation by adding.
This time, drying tower the dehumidification The stand is getting worse in temporary exit
that they would be more than time you typed into the timer case.
1) Stop for a short time
Off the Power S / W and Dryer mouth. By-Pass V / V, then Close the Valve Open After the exit side..
2) Stop for a long time

Fully pressure of Off Power S / W and after Close of the Valve inlet Dryer Drying Tower
Cl
Close and
d th
then removed
d after
ft ththe Open
O By-Pass
B P V/V
V.
3) Emergency stop by the Low Pressure Alarm
Low Press. Alarm occurs when the Lamp is lit and the control of all the Dryer is stopped.
In this case, the proportional control valve is become Burn Out 100% Open is the rest
of the valve stops in each of the designated states.
Automatic reset to ' the normal driving is dryer if someone deactivates alarm.
7. CONTROL LOGIC
A TOWER DRYING (4HR)

DRYER
RUN
B TOWER HEATING (3HR) B TOWER COOLING (1HR)
HEATER RUN
B TOWER DRYING (4HR)
A TOWER HEATING (3HR) A TOWER COOLING (1HR)
HEATER RUN
ALARM RELEASE
ALARM RELEASE
LOW PRESSURE DRYER STOP LOW PRESSURE CLEAR
CONTROL VAVLE BURN OUT

SETTING VALUE ▲
SETTING VALUE ▼ TIME HOLDING
LOW PRESSURER ALARM OFF
LOW PRESSURE ALARM
HIGH DEW POINT HIGH DEW POINT ALARM HIGH DEW POINT ALARM CLEAR
SETTING VALUE ▲
SETTING VALUE ▼
HIGH DEW POINT ALARM OFF
HEATER OVER TEMP HEATER OFF (TRIP) HEATER OVER TEMP ALARM CLEAR
SETTING VALUE ▼
SETTING VALUE ▲ HEATER OVER TEMP ALARM
HEATER OVER TEMP ALARM OFF
MAIN HEATER TRIP MAIN HEATER OFF (TRIP) MAIN HEATER TRIP ALARM CLEAR
AUX. HEATER TRIP AUX. HEATER OFF (TRIP) AUX. HEATER TRIP ALARM CLEAR
8. Control Panel
8-1. Electrical box configuration

g
No. DESCRIPTION No. DESCRIPTION
1 VOLT METER 7 DRYER STOP PUSH BUTTON
2 AMPARE METER 8 BUZZER STOP PUSH BUTTON
3 TOUCH SCREEN 9 SIGN TOWER
4 HEATING TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 10 A TOWER PRESSURE GAUGE
5 PROPORTION CONTROLLER 11 PURGE AIR FLOW PRESSURE GAUGE
6 DRYER START PUSH BUTTON 12 B TOWER PRESSURE GAUGE

8-2. Inner casket made by configuration
4 5 6 7
1 콘센트
8 9 10
2
11 12 13
°C
RESET
MOISTURE TARGET
SERIES 6
T3S K0~300°C Autonics
14 15 16
1 MAIN MCCB 9 PLC
2 CT 10 THERMOSTAT
3 SCR 11 PLC INPUT LINK
4 CONTROL MCCB 12 PLC OUTPUT LINK 1
5 BKM 13 PLC OUTPUT LINK 2
6 FUSE 14 T/S ( HEATER OVERTEMP. CONTROL)
7 TRANSFORMER 15 CONTROL RELAY
8 NOISE FILTER 16 DEW POINT METER

8-3. TOUCH SCREEN
Air dryer of running order, and control for all touch to implementation on the screen can
be configured. Touch screen the screen of components are largely consisting of..
1. Screen main : Ascertain comprised and keeping them available for the running order,
as a whole of the dryer,
2. Screen process : Internal piping and valve control can be configured to check the conditions of.
3. Screen setting : The setting value of the settings, and stalls, temperature, pressure,
such as the internal control input.
4. Screen alarm : In the event of an alarm, the type of alarm time, actions as members, including.
5. Screen trend : Dew point temperature, pressure, such as screen, which is graphically
illustrated in real time.
The details touch manual Please check in.

9. Desiccant filling Law
9.1 Desiccant replacement

p time
Ordinary life of thedesiccant is two to three years, or by contamination of the
compressed air, so cant also significantly shortened its lifespan and be careful
If the condition below to be exchanged desiccant.
1) there is no need to maintain the outlet dew point.
2) If the exit status is the dew point rises suddenly.
3) Dryer of cases that occur more than differential pressure of the entrances and exits early.
4) For a bleached brown or black to rich in internal absorbent tower. (However, minor discoloration
Install an air dryer under pressure, or when maintenance can cause fatal accidents.
9.2 Before replacing the desiccant
1) To once again examine the need for precise replacement of the desiccant.
2) If replacement is necessary adsorbent prepared in advance for the equipment needed
to replace the desiccant.
( Purchase desiccant to be replaced, gaskets, bolts and basic tools needed for replacement)
3) Check the equipment shutdown timing of when the replacement schedule is established.
- air dryer be heated to high temperature upon is to reuse of heated sorbent cool completely
suspended in time of Replace the power shall be absorbent or burned in the desiccant
in other high temperature can prevent accidents.

4) After the device stops the equipment before, if you block the valve and the rear end, BY-PASS
By pass Valve is installed To open, so that the internal pressure of the device is completely removed.
By-pass
5) Once again, check the pressure gauge to verify that pressure is removed.
Keep dust mask and gloves and eye protection equipment before it deals with desiccant.
The desiccantt dust can irritate the eyes and skin.
Avoid drinks containing dust or the contact of the skin and for long periods of time.
time
9.3 Desiccant replacement
1) Dryer Vessel open top of the first inlet to the desiccant and the desiccant rock fall well prepared
prepared.
2) Open the desiccant to remove the phrase Dryer Vessel bottom of the inside slowly take out the
desiccant.
3) Internal desiccant, completely removed, desiccant tower the inside of the cleaned clean as possible.
4) manhole is installed, if that's the manhole byy opening

p g up
p the internal absorbent solids and remove
oil and clean.
5) After the desiccant to remove one side of the gasket and close the desiccant replace it with
a new removal tool.
6) It is filled through the top of the new absorbent sorbent injection.
7) The whole filled in the desiccant towers filled with chilled when filling.
8) Once the filling is completed, the gasket of the sorbent injection exchanged with a new one,
close the filling entrance.

9) When the desiccant replacement is complete after cleaning the area clean and check the
status of the equipment as a whole.
9.4 Re-operation of the equipment
1) After replacement check is completed and the equipment, etc. Make sure there are no more than
the Alarm Control Panel.
2) After completing inspection equipment before and open the valve to the rear and presses the
pressure to use the pressure equipment.
3) If the operating pressure is normally the pressure by turning the Dryer On Switch on the Panel.
4) After the ridge tops to re-check whether the normal operation schedule time overall.
5) Even if replacing the adsorbent with a new booth will hold at least one day after the last time
It can be a normal recovery.

10. The cause of the fault and the measures
Fault Failure cause Measures
Check the Hot Air inlet temperature

Lower the temperature of the regeneration air.
Check the state of the electric heater heating
Check the discharge pressure of the Compressor.

The inlet pressure is low.
Dryer Check the Leak or shear equipment differential pressure.
Check the discharge pressure of the Compressor.
The inlet temperature is high. Check the Dryer shear equipment (especially After Cooler)
Check the cooling water supply, cooling water temperature
Check the mouth, exit temperature of renewable of the cooler.

The high
g outlet temperature.
p
The mouth of the cooling water, the temperature of the outlet check.
1. Dew point rise
Leak occurs, the Outlet Valve. Leak check the equipment of the upper portion of the valve.
Check the front of the Strainer clogged with debris.

Separator Drain Trap malfunction
Check the operating status of the Trap precise and replace if broken
broken.
Check the calibration time of the dewpoint.

Dew Point Meter malfunction
Check whether the normal supply of dry air line dewpoint.
The p
process then checks to cause contamination of the desiccant.
Desiccant have been contaminated. When replacing the contaminated adsorbent is not playing
after checking whether playable
It was the replacement life of the desiccant. Replace the adsorbent with a new one.
# The above table is one that describes the general information details please contact our technical sales and customer management.
Address: 165 wolharo,wolgotmyeon,gimpo-city,korea Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 FAX : 82-31-998-9128
Fault Failure cause Measures
It is not controlled within the Control Panel. PLC, Fuse, Relay, Switch, etc. Check the inside of the panel
2. Not become a Check the normal control the output coming ffrom the Panel.
replacement tower. Malfunctions of the valve Valve Control Sol. Check the V / V operating condition.
Body Check Valve Actuator and degradation.
Check the Hot Air inlet temperature

Lower the temperature of the regeneration air.
Setting Temperature on T.I.C is low, if good, the adjustment.
Confirm the setting value of the flow of playing.

playing
Check the heating time Heating Timer.

The temperature does not go up to a recovery tower
3. Regeneration during the heating process. Check the Hot Air inlet temperature
is unstable.
Check the replacement time and contamination
of the desiccant.
If the set temperature is too high and adjust the T.I.C material.
Wh
When th
the ttemperature
t off th
the cooling
li ttower
Check the value of the reproduction rate.
process does not cool well.
Check the time of the Cooling Timer.
The occurrence of foreclosure Filter Element Filter Check and replace the Element.
Leak occurred on Valve & Piping The Leak repair the part.
4. There are many
Desiccnat, which is polluted. Check the pollution cause of an absorbent material after processing.
pressure losses.
It was the replacement life of the Ddesiccant. Replace the desiccant with a new one.
Desiccant screen is blocked. Screen and check the disassembly and cleaning.
# The above table is one that describes the general information details please contact our technical sales and customer management.
Assorption Dryer Regular Checklist
○ Check ★ Exchange
Maintenance period
Parts to be checked Items to be checked REMARK
Any time Monthly 6months Yearly 3 Yearly
2-WAY PNEUMATIC VALVE
CHECK
- ACTUATOR ○ OPEN-CLOSE CHECK
OPERATION STATUS
CHECK Replace it when
- DISC & SEAT ○
OPERATION STATUS out of order
4-WAY & 2-WAY SOLENOID VALVE
Replace it when
- COIL Short CHECK ○
out of order
Disassembly Replace it when
- BODY ○
g
& cleaning out of order
DESICCANT
Replace it when
- DESICCANT COLOR CHECK ○ ★
out of order
Replace it when
DEW POINT CHECK ○
out of order
HEATER HEATER
Disassembly
- ELEMENT ○
& cleaning
Replace it when
- ELEMENT 열선 Short CHECK ○
out of order
GENERATION CHECK ○ Setting Adjustment
REGEN COOLER & SEPARATOR
Cooling water
- Cooling efficiency In/out Air temp. check ○ temperature check
Disassembly
- Scale removal
& cleaning ○
AUTO DRAIN TRAP

- TRAP
OPERATION STATUS ○ out of order
- STRAINER Check if it is blocked ○ Disassembly, cleaning
17 page
Assorption Dryer Regular Checklist
○ Check ★ Exchange
Maintenance period
Parts to be checked Items to be checked REMARK
Any time Monthly 6months Yearly 3 Yearly
Safety Valve

- Lever Test ○
DEW POINT METER
- SENSOR Calibration ○ calibration
GAUGE

- GAUGE ○
CONTROL PANEL

- PANEL ○
MCCB,RELAY, TIMER,LAMP …..,
PURGE MUFFLER
Disassembly Replace it when

- BODY ○ ★
& cleaning out of order
Replace it when
Purge & Noise Status ○
out of order
18 page )
PNEUTEC KOREA
www.ptkair.com
Global marketing for mutual benefit

PHCN-7700SP TOUCH MANUAL
Office & Factory : WOLHARO 165, WOLGOT-MYUN. GIMPO-CITY, KOREA

Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128
www.ptkair.com
PNEUTEC KOREA
CONTENTS
Checking list
Screen composition
Setting of operation mode
Setting of operation time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop operation of equipment
Stop and check alarm
www.ptkair.com
MANUAL
CHECKING LIST
Checking List
1. Check the equipment's rated power and supply power

Screen Composition
2. Check the mounting status of each part inside the panel
Setting of
operating mode
3. Confirmation of connection cable abnormality and lug tightness status
4. Check voltage and insulation after connecting power

Setting of
Operating time 5. Verify Switch Operation
Setting of alarm 6. Check whether each instrument is working
Start and stop 7. Check whether the automatic valve works

of operating
8. Check whether the manual valve is open or not
Stop and check
alarm
www.ptkair.com 2
MANUAL
Screen Composition (HOME)
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop

of operating
Stop and check

alarm
www.ptkair.com 3
MANUAL
Screen Composition (MAIN)
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop

of operating
Stop and check

alarm
www.ptkair.com 4
MANUAL
Screen Composition (PROCESS)
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop

of operating
Stop and check

alarm
www.ptkair.com 5
MANUAL
Screen Composition (SETTING)
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop

of operating
Stop and check

alarm
www.ptkair.com 6
MANUAL
Screen Composition (TREND)
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop

of operating
Stop and check

alarm
www.ptkair.com 7
MANUAL
Screen Composition (TREND)
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop

of operating
Stop and check

alarm
www.ptkair.com 8
MANUAL
Screen Composition (ALARM)
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop

of operating
Stop and check

alarm
www.ptkair.com 9
MANUAL
Setting of Operatin Mode
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop It is configured to set and change operation mode.

of operating When selected, it is selected according to the constant load ratio of
compressor.
Stop and check
alarm ※ Refer to AIR DRYER MANUAL for details of operation selection and time setting.
www.ptkair.com 10
MANUAL
Setting of Operatin Time
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Drying Timer : Basic drying time setting of Air Dryer (Nor. 4hr)
Start and stop Heating Timer : Setting the heating time of regen. tower (Nor. 2.5 or 3hr)
of operating Demand Delay Timer : Setting the Demand Delay time (Nor. 4hr)
Stop and check ※ Refer to AIR DRYER MANUAL for details of operation selection and time setting.
alarm ※ If you change the time, you may cause malfunction of the equipment.
www.ptkair.com 11
MANUAL
Setting of Operatin Time
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm Pressurizing Timer : (Nor. 5min)

Depress Timer : 1st depressurizing purge time setting (Nor. 5min)
Start and stop Valve Alarm Delay Timer : (Nor. 10sec)
of operating
Stop and check ※ Refer to AIR DRYER MANUAL for details of operation selection and time setting.
alarm ※ If you change the time, you may cause malfunction of the equipment.
www.ptkair.com 12
MANUAL
Setting of Alarm
Checking List
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop Dew Point (Demand) : Dew point operation delay temperature setting
of operating
Dew Point (High) : Dew point warning temperature setting
Heater Over Temperature : Electric heater internal overheat warning
Stop and check
temperature setting
alarm
www.ptkair.com 13
MANUAL
Start and Stop operation of equipment
Checking List Dryer's On / off switch is attached to the outside of the panel, not the touch screen.
When the dryer is on, touch on the operating status at the top of touch main screen.
When it is Off, it is displayed as Stop, and operation status can be checked.
Screen Composition
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop

of operating
Stop and check

alarm
www.ptkair.com 14
MANUAL
Stop and Check Alarm
Checking List When the alarm of dryer occurs, the alarm is notified through the warning lamp and
buzzer outside the panel.
Alarm occurrence history is displayed on the touch screen.
Screen Composition The warning light and buzzer can be released by pressing buzzer Stop on the outside
of the panel.
Setting of
operating mode
Setting of
Operating time
Setting of alarm
Start and stop

of operating
Stop and check

alarm
www.ptkair.com 15
Recommended Installation,
Operation & Maintenance
Manual for Air Dryer

O & M Munual
Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128

목 차
1. 주 의 사 항
2. 설 치
3. 장비의 특성
4. 장비 계통
5. 구성품의 설명
5
6. 장비의 운전
7. Control Logic
8. Control Panel
9. 흡착제 충진
10. 고장의 원인과 대책
11. 운전점검표
12. 시운전완료 확인서

1. 주의사항
뉴텍코리아에서 제작된 본 설비는 안전을 최우선으로 고려하여 설계되었으며,

공장에서 안전성 및 정상운전 여부가 검사되어 출고 되었습니다.
모든 압력용기는 제작시 해당 법규에 맞게 설계 및 제작되었으며, 제작 후
해당법규에 맞는 수압시험을 실시하여 안전성을 검증하였습니다.
본 설비의 안전한 작동과 최상의 성능을 확보하기 위해서 설치, 운전, 유지 및
보수를 위해 하기의 주의 사항을 준수해야 합니다.
압력을 받고 있는 상태에서 본 에어드라이어에 있는 부품을 교체, 수리 또는
분리나 제거를 하지 마십시요.
정비 또는 설치를 시작하기 전에 완벽하게 공압을 제거 하십시요.
압력하에서 에어드라이어를 설치하거나, 정비를 할 경우 치명적인 인명사고가

발생할 수 있습니다.
압력용기 상에 부착된 명판을 확인하시고,

확인하시고 명판에 표기된 설계압력 및 설계 온도
조건 하에서 사용하여야 하며, 최대 사용조건 이상에서 사용하지 마십시요.
압력용기에 임의적인 용접, 손상, 갈아내거나 마모 시키지 마십시요.
압력용기에 어떠한 손상이 있을 경우 안전하지 않으니 주의하시고, 압력용기의
외,내관에 팽창, 부식, 표면의
면의 눌림이나 파임현상, 누기 또는
는 화재위험성 등을
규칙적으로 점검하시요.
또한, 장비의 제원명판을 확인하시어 허용 전압범위 내의 전원을 공급하십시요.
주전원을 차단하지 않은 상태에서는 전기작업을 하지 마십시요. 전원스위치가
꺼진 상태에서도 전기회로 내부에 전류가 남아 있을 수 있으므로 주의하여
작업하시기 바랍니다.
2. 설치
1. 입고 검사
장비를 인수한 즉시 운송중에 일어날 수 있는 손상에 대해 반드시 철저하게
검사 되어져야 합니다. 배송 중 장비에 손상이 있을 경우 배송자에게 즉시
통보하고 항의서를 제출하십시요.
2 취급
2.
장비의 운반은 드라이어 용기에 부착된 리프팅 러그를 이요하거나, 지게차를
사용하여 운반하십시요. 운반시에는 항상 적정한 하중을 고려한 장비를 사용
하고 운반과정을 주시하여야 합니다.
3. 설치
-. 부식성 화학물, 폭발성 가스, 유해 가스 등이 없는 곳에 설치하십시요.
-. 오염물질들이 발생되는 곳에 설치하지 마십시

염물질들이 많이 발생되 마십시요. 불가피한 경우라면
주기적인 청소를 하여야 합니다.
-. 주위 온도가 급격히 변화하지 않고 4 ~ 49℃의 범위를 초과하지 않는 장소에
설치해야 하며, 심한 진동이 없는 곳에 설치하십시요.
--. 튼튼하고 편평한 기초위에 설치하고 기초 볼트를 고정하십시요

고정하십시요.
-. 장비의 보수 및 점검을 용이하게 하기 위해 최소한 1m 이상의 여유공간을
확보해야 합니다.
-. 흡착제 교체 및 히터, 쿨러등의 수리를 위한 작업여건을 고려하십시요.

4. 배관
특별히 정해진 것을 제외한 모든 외부배관은 사용자에 의해 공급 되어져야 합니다.
배관은 장비의 명판에 명시된 최대사용조건에 적합해야 하며, 배관 설치시
배관의 무게가 장비에 하중을 주지 않도록 연결해야 합니다.
모든 배관의 크기는 장비에 설치된 연결배관보다 같거나 커야 합니다.
설치 배관이나 배관 구성품들이 더 작은 규격이거나, 잘못 설치되었을 경우
압력을 저하시키고 처리용량을 감소시킬 수 있습니다

있습니다.
올바른 배관크기를 선정해야 하며, 배관 선정시 향후 증설계획등을 검토하여
증설 및 용량 변경에 대응할 수 있도록 설계 되어야 합니다.
배관의 연결시 기존 배관 시스템에 설치할 경우, 연결하기 전에 배관 내부에
이물질이 없도록 깨끗이 하여 연결하여 주십시요.
신설 배관을 하는 경우, 배관 시공시 장비에 영향이 없도록 보호장치를 설치한
후 작업을 진행해야 하며, 시공 후 연결시에 작업 중 발생된 이물질등이 장비
내부에 들어가지 않도록 설치 배관의 내부를 깨끗이 하여 연결하여 주십시요.
드라이어가 설치된 상태로 배관의 수압 테스트를 실시할 경우 흡착제의
손상이 발생될 수도 있으니 가급적 공압 테스트를 실시하십시요.
바이패스 배관을 반드시 설치할 필요는 없지만, 장비의 수리 및 부품 교체등의
작업이 필
필요할
할 경우
경우, 전체 에어시
에어시스템의
템의 차단없이 용이하게 작업을 할 수 있어
가능한 설치하시는 것을 권장합니다.

5. 전원연결
전원연결시 전원사양을 반드시 확인 후 설치하시기 바랍니다.
부적절한 전압을 연결할 경우 장비의 손상 및 심각한 부상을 초래할 수 있습니다.
-.. 장비내부 배선은 출고 전 완료된 상태이므로 공급전원만 연결하여 주십시요.

-. 전원은 접속한 후에는 필히 전압 및 절연 상태를 측정하여 주십시요.
-. 판넬 계기의 결선 및 접합 상태를 점검하여 주십시요.
6. 장비의 구성
수분입자 또는 설계사양 이상의 입구온도는 드라이어 처리용량을 감소시키고

감소시키고,
설계유량 이상의 유량을 사용하거나, 설계압력보다 낮은 압력 조건에서 장시간
사용할 경우 내부 흡착제의 성능이 저하하여 노점에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다.
흡착식 드라이어의 성능을 최대한 발휘하기 위해서는 장비의 제원에 맞는 입구

온도, 압력, 유량이 설계 조건에 맞아야 합니다.
입구 온도가 설계 조건보다 높을 경우 장비 전단에 쿨러 등을 설치하여 입구
온도가 설계 조건에 맞도록 해야 합니다. 또한 액체상태의 수분이 장비에 반입
되지 않도록 전단에 탱크, 세퍼레이터, 필터등의 장비를 설치해야 합니다.
흡착식 드라이어 전, 후단에는 반드시 필터를 설치해야 합니다.
전단필터에서 오일, 먼지, 수분등의 오염물질를 제거해야 드라이어의 정상적인
성능을 발휘할 수 있으며, 후단필터를 설치하여 드라이어 내부의 흡착제 분진이
후단 설비로 넘어가는 것을 방지할 수 있습니다.
장비를 가동하기 전에, 필터 내부의 ELEMENT 등 부품의 정상설치 여부를 확인
하시기 바랍니다.
필터에는 교체주기를 확인하기 위한 차압계 설치를 권장합니다.

3. 장비의 특성
압축 공기에서의 제습은 압축 공기를 이용하는 모든 분야에서 가장 중요한 문제이다.
압축 공기의 수분은 공업적 제조 공정과 계장설비 뿐만 아니라 인간 생활에도 나쁜
영향을 주기 때문이다.
이러한 압축 상태의 건조 공기를 얻기 위해서는 비오염성, 안전성에서 우수한
흡착식 Air Dryer를 사용 할 수 있다.
이H
Heatt off C
Compression
i Air
Ai DDryer 는 종래 넓게 사용된 비가열식 및 가열식 D
Dryer에서는
에서는
볼 수없는 우수한 성능을 보유한 Dryer이다.
이 Heat of Compression Air Dryer가 보유한 일반적인 기능상 특성 및 장점을 열거하면
다음과 같다.
1) 운전 경비 절감 - 저온에서 재생되는 흡착제를 사용하며

사용하며, Compressor의 2단 토출열을
이용하여 흡착제를 재생 함으로 운전 경비가 절감되어 에너지 Saving 효과가 큼.
2) 노점 저하 방지 - 흡착제의 재생온도까지 충분히 재생후 Cooling Down 시킴으로써
Tower 절환시 급격히 노점이 저하되는 현상을 방지하였다.
3)) Compressor의
p 의 Hot Air를
를 사용 함 써 Cooling시
함으로써, g시 냉각수 g 시키
냉각수로 Cooling 시키므로
냉각수 배관 연결 작업이 필요하다.
4) 전기 히터(Electric Heater) - Desiccant 재생에 적합한 온도를 설정하여 히터를
Control 하므로 불필요한 전력비 소모를 막았으며 Electric Heater 과열시
자동 Off되는 안전 장치가 부착되어 보다 안전한 운전을 유도 하였다.
5) Heating Line과 Cooling Line에 유량을 조절하는 Propotion Valve 부착하여,
Hot Air와 Cooling Air의 양을 조절 한다.
6) 적용 가능한 Air Compressor는 Turbo 및 Oil free Compressor를 추천함.
Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128

4. 장비 계통
4.1 Drying (건조) Cycle
Compressor에 의해 압축된 공기는 Dryer 입구의 2-Way Butterfly V/V를 통하여 최초 한 쪽
Tower로 들어간다.
이 공기는 Tower내 Desiccant(흡착제)를 통과하여 Tower의 상층부로 향하게 된다.
이 때 공기중에 있는 미립자의 수분이 제거되어 건조 공기로 출구쪽으로 토출되는데
이를 Drying(건조) Cycle이라 한다.
- 표준형 PHCN Type Drying Cycle : 4.0hr

4.2 Regeneration (재생) Cycle
Air Dryer 입구에 설치된 비례제어 밸브에서 약 30%정도 자동 분리하여 Boosting Heater가
장착되어 있는 경우 Heater를 통과하여 재생 열원을 상승시켜 재생 타워의 상부로 들어가
흡착제를 재생을 한후, 수냉식 쿨러 및 Separator를 통과하여 Main Inlet 배관과 합류하여
제습타워를 통과 한후 Outlet 배관으로 통하여 생산Line에 공급되는 과정으로 이루어 진다.
이를 Regeneration이라 하며 Regeneration은 두 가지 공정에 의해 이루어 진다.
1) Heating (가열) Cycle
Compressor의 Hot Air는 Boosting Heater가 장착되어 있는 경우, Heater를 통과하여
재생 온도가 상승하여, 재생타워의 상부에서 하부로 재생하며, 하부 쪽 배관으로 통과
하면 재생 타워의 온도가 상승 된다.
이를 Heating(가열) 이라고 하며 Electric Heater는 Control Panel 상의 T.I.C (Temp. Indicating
Controller)에 의해 자동적으로 On/Off 되며 운전을 하게 된다.
또한 Hot Air가 설계치 이하로 들어올 경우 경보 및 알람을 장착할 수 있어서 현재
공급되는 온도를 확인 가능함.
Heating후 Hot Air는 Dryer Unit에 장착된 수냉식 Cooler를 통과하여 온도를 낯추어서
응축을 시키며, 이후 Moisture Separator를 통과하여 수분을 분리하여 Main Inlet 배관과
합류하여, Drying Tower로 공급 된다.
- PHCN Type Heating Cycle : 2.5hr ~ 3.5Hr로 조건에 따라 변경이 가능.
2) Cooling (냉각) Cycle
Cooing Cycle로 진행되면, Heating Line에 장착된 Valve가 자동적을 닫히고, 콤프레사의
Cooler를 통과한 공기가 Cooling Cycle Control 밸브를 통과하여 재생 타워 하부로
들어가 흡착제의 온도를 낮추어 준다.
Electric Heater는 Timer에 의하여 자동적으로 전원이 차단되어 끊기게 된다.
이를 Cooling(냉각)이라 한다.
Air의 흐름은 Inlet Line에 장착된 비례제어 밸브에 의하여 약30% 에어가 쿨러를 통과하여
Cooling후 Hot Air는 Dryer Unit에 장착된 수냉식 Cooler를 통과하여 온도를 낯추어서
응축을 시켜며, 이후 Moisture Separator를 통과하여 수분을 분리하여 Main Inlet 배관과
합류하여, Drying Tower로 공급 된다.
- PHCN Type Cooling Cycle : 0.5hr ~ 1.5Hr로 조건에 따라 변경이 가능.

5. 구성품의 설명
5-1. Drying
y g Tower (건조탑)
"PHCN" Heat of Compression Air Dryer는 2 개의 Tower가 있고 Tower의
내부에 Desiccant(흡착제)가 충진 되어 Drying Tower 내부를 지나는 압축
공기의 수분을 흡착시켜 건조 공기를 공급한다.
Tower의 상하부 입.출구 Nozzle에는 Desiccant의 알갱이가 배관 Line으로
흘러 들어가지 못하도록 Stainless Screen이 설치되어 있으며 Desiccant의
충진 및 배출을 위해 각 각의 Nozzle이 취부되어 있다.
해당 품목에 한 해 검사기관의 설계,성능 검사를 합격 한 Tower를 사용한다.
5-2. Electric Heater (전기히터)
Electric Heater는 재생 Air를 가열하여 흡착제를 재생하는데 사용된다.
재생 Air는 가열 온도에 의한 흡착제의 재생 정도에 따라 출구 노점이
영향을 받게되므로 가열 온도가 설정치에 미달하는 경우는 그 성능을 발휘할 수 없다.
Electric Heater의 발열 온도는 Panel Front Door 의 T.I.C상에서 조절되고 Panel 내부에는
Electric Heater의 과열 방지를 위한 별도의 Thermo Switch가 설치되어있다.
만약, Compressor Hot Air의 온도가 흡착제 재생 온도 보다 높을 경우 Boosting Heater는
설치하지 아니하여도 된다.
5-3. Water Cooler (수냉식쿨러)
Heating & Cooling Cycling이 진행 되는 동안 재생 Air의 온도는 고온이 된다.
고온의 Air를 Main process와 합류 시키기전에 Cooling 시키는 역할을 하며, 이때 포화된
재생 Air의 Cool Down에 의해 발생된 다량의 수분을 응축 시켜 Separator를 통하여, 자동
Drain장치 ( Auto Trap) 에 의하여 Drain 시킨다.
Cooling Water 의 온도는 초기 설계온도 이하로 공급되어야 하며, 공급의 차단이 있어서는
안된다.
5-4. Separator (유수분리기)
Water Cooler에서 응축된 수분을 배출하는 설비로 내부는
5단계식 원심분리 방식으로 구성되어 있어 재생공기
내의 응축수를 거의 100% 제거함.

하부에 부착된 Drain Trap을 통해 수분을 배출한다.
Drain Trap은 Dual로 설치되어 어느 한쪽에서 오동작을
할 경우라도 항상 원활히 수분을 배출한다

배출한다.
5-5. Pneumatic On-off Valve (공압자동밸브)
"PHCN" Dryer로 유입되는 압축공기를 A or B Tower쪽으로
유도를 하여 한쪽 Tower가 건조공정을 하도록하고
반대쪽 Tower는 재생공정을 하도록 자동으로 제어한다.
통상적으로 High-Performance Butterfly Valve를 사용하고 있다.
5-6. Pneumatic Proportion Control Valve (공압비례제어밸브)
Air Dryer의 재생 공기량을 일정하게 유지하도록 자동제어되는
밸브이며, 주요 구성품으로는 Positioner & 차압 트랜스미터,
Orifice 로 구성되어 있다.
Orifice는 차압으로 유량을 측정하여 Controller로 송부하며,
Controller에서는 밸브로 부터 시그널을 전송받아 밸브의
개폐률을 조절한다
조절한다.
상기 밸브는 Control Air 차단시에는 작동 되는 상태에서
그대로 멈추며, 전원이 차단되어 Controller에서 시그널이
출력이 되지 않는 경우(Burn Out) 밸브는 Open 상태로
유지하여 압축공기의 차단없이 현장에 공급되도록 설계되어 있다.

5-7. 4-Way Solenoid Valve
Dryer 배관상에 설치된 Actuator Valve 및 Cylinder Valve등
압축 공기에 의해 Open/Close되는 Valve들을 구동 시킨다.
Air In/Outlet Actuator Valve에는 Double(복동) Sol. V/V가
사용되며 재생공정의 Heating/Cooling을 제어하는 Valve는
Single(단동) Sol. V/V가 사용된다.
5-8. Pressure / Temperature Gauge & Transmitter
Press. Gauge 및 Temp. Gauge는 Dryer의 배관 및 Drying Tower(건조탑)에
설치되어 운전상태를 확인하기 위한 것으로서 특히 재생 Tower의 Heating
공정시 가열 온도에 주의해서 운전하여야 한다. 가열 온도가 낮아지면 흡착제 재생에
악영향을 미쳐 성능이 저하될 수 있다.
5-9. Dew Point Meter (노점계)
현장에 공급되는 건조공기 내부의 수분량에 대한 품질을 확인할 수 있는 측정장비로
SENSOR는 2년에 1회 이상 CALIBRATION(교정)하여야만 신뢰성 있는 노점을 측정 할 수 있다.

6. 장비의 운전
6-1. 운전 준비
1) Panel에 공급되는 전원 사양이 정확한지 확인 한다.
2) In/Out 배관, Hot Air & 냉각수 배관의 연결 상태 및 온도를 확인한다.
3) Dryer의 입.출구 쪽에 설치되어 있는 By-Pass를 Open 시키고 A,B Drying Tower의
압력이 운전 압력까지 균압이 되도록 한다.
4) Dryer로 공급되는 Air의 온도는 최고 40℃를 넘어서는 안되므로 Drying Tower에
설치된 온도계의 온도를 확인 한다.
5) Control Panel의 모든 설정 값이 제대로 입력되어 있는지 확인한다.
6-2. 운전 시작
1) Panel의 Control Power On/Off Switch를 On으로하여 운전을 시작한다.
2) 사용 압력
압력, 온도,
온도 각 계기의 설정 값등을 다시 한 번 확인한다
확인한다.
3) In/Outlet 배관의 운전 온도를 확인한다.
4) Hot Air 배관의 운전 온도를 확인한다.
5) 냉각수 In/Outlet 연결배관의 운전 온도를 확인한다.
6) 각 Valve, Lamp 등의 작동 및 점등 상태가 이상이 없는지 확인 한다.
7) T.I.C 상에 Indicating 되는 값이 시간이 지남에 따라 상승되는지 확인하며 입력된
설정 값에 의해 Electric Heater가 On/Off 되는지 확인하고 재생 Tower의
온도계를 확인 점검 한다.
8) 각 Timer에 입력된 시간에 의해 공정이 진행 되는지 확인한다.
9) 재생 Tower의 Heating/Cooling Cycle 의 진행에 따른 온도 변화를 확인한다.
10) Regen Cooler의 Heating/Cooling Cycle 의 진행에 따른 전, 후단 온도 변화를 확인한다.
11) Separator 하부의 Drain Line 연결 상태를 확인 한다.
12) 재생유량을 제어하는 비례제어밸브의 동작 및 Controller, D.P Transmitter의 동작 상태를
확인한다.
13) 상기 항을 확인하고 이상이 없을 경우는 정상 가동을 시작한다.

6-3. 운전 Cycle의 확인 : ( 7. Control Logic 참조)
1) Tower에 Air의 공급 압력을 확인한후에 Power Switch On
2) A or B Tower Purge 압력계 상태 확인
Drying Lamp 점등(4.0 시간 유지) Heating Lamp 점등(3.0 시간 유지)
3) 3.0 시간 후 Heating Lamp 소등 - Cooling Lamp 점등(1 시간 유지)
4) 1시간 분 후 Cooling Lamp 소등
5) 타워 절환 - A or B Tower Purge
Drying Lamp 점등(4.0 시간 유지) Heating Lamp 점등(2.5 시간 유지)
6) 계속 반복 운전 됨.
6-4. 운전 정지
Dryer를 운전 중 정지하는 경우에는 원칙적으로 Cooling 완료 후에 정지하는 것이
바람직하며 가열중에 정지하고 재운전하는 경우에는 Heating 시간을 적당히 추가하여
운전을 하여야 한다.
이 때 Drying Tower는 Timer에 입력된 시간 이상 제습하게 되므로 일시 출구의 노점이
나빠지는 경우가 있다.
1) 단시간의 정지
전원 S/W 를 Off하고 Dryer 입.출구 측의 Valve를 Close한 뒤 By-Pass V/V를 Open 시킨다.
2) 장시간의 정지
전원 S/W 를 Off하고 Dryer 입구 측의 Valve를 Close한 뒤 Drying Tower의 압력을 완전히
제거한 후 Close
Cl 시키고 By-Pass
B P V/V를 Open
O 시킨다
시킨다.
3) Low Pressure Alarm에 의한 비상 정지
Low Press. Alarm 이 발생되면 Lamp가 점등이 되며 Dryer 의 모든 제어는 멈추게 된다.
이때, 비례제어밸브는 Burn Out이 되어 100% Open이 되고 나머지 밸브는 각각의 지정된
상태로 정지하게 된다.
Alarm이 해제되면 Dryer는 자동 복귀하여 정상 운전을 하게 된다.

7. CONTROL LOGIC
A TOWER DRYING (4HR)

DRYER
RUN
B TOWER HEATING (3HR) B TOWER COOLING (1HR)
HEATER RUN
B TOWER DRYING (4HR)
A TOWER HEATING (3HR) A TOWER COOLING (1HR)
HEATER RUN
ALARM RELEASE
ALARM RELEASE
LOW PRESSURE DRYER STOP LOW PRESSURE CLEAR
CONTROL VAVLE BURN OUT

SETTING VALUE ▲
SETTING VALUE ▼ TIME HOLDING
LOW PRESSURER ALARM OFF
LOW PRESSURE ALARM
HIGH DEW POINT HIGH DEW POINT ALARM HIGH DEW POINT ALARM CLEAR
SETTING VALUE ▲
SETTING VALUE ▼
HIGH DEW POINT ALARM OFF
HEATER OVER TEMP HEATER OFF (TRIP) HEATER OVER TEMP ALARM CLEAR
SETTING VALUE ▼
SETTING VALUE ▲ HEATER OVER TEMP ALARM
HEATER OVER TEMP ALARM OFF
MAIN HEATER TRIP MAIN HEATER OFF (TRIP) MAIN HEATER TRIP ALARM CLEAR
AUX. HEATER TRIP AUX. HEATER OFF (TRIP) AUX. HEATER TRIP ALARM CLEAR
8. Control Panel
8-1. 외함 구성
1 VOLT METER 7 DRYER STOP PUSH BUTTON
2 AMPARE METER 8 BUZZER STOP PUSH BUTTON
3 TOUCH SCREEN 9 SIGN TOWER
4 HEATING TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 10 A TOWER PRESSURE GAUGE
5 PROPORTION CONTROLLER 11 PURGE AIR FLOW PRESSURE GAUGE
6 DRYER START PUSH BUTTON 12 B TOWER PRESSURE GAUGE

8-2. 내함 구성
4 5 6 7
1 콘센트
8 9 10
2
11 12 13
°C
RESET
MOISTURE TARGET
SERIES 6
T3S K0~300°C Autonics
14 15 16
1 MAIN MCCB 9 PLC
2 CT 10 THERMOSTAT
3 SCR 11 PLC INPUT LINK
4 CONTROL MCCB 12 PLC OUTPUT LINK 1
5 BKM 13 PLC OUTPUT LINK 2
6 FUSE 14 T/S ( HEATER OVERTEMP. CONTROL)
7 TRANSFORMER 15 CONTROL RELAY
8 NOISE FILTER 16 DEW POINT METER

8-3. TOUCH SCREEN
Air Dryer 의 가동 상태 및 제어를 모두 TOUCH 화면에서 구현할 수 있도록 구성되어 있음.
TOUCH SCREEN 화면의 구성은 크게 아래와 같이 구성되어 있음.
1. MAIN 화면 : DRYER의 가동 상태를 전체적으로 확인가능토록 구성됨.
2. PROCESS 화면 : 내부 배관 및 밸브등의 제어 상태를 확인할 수 있도록 구성됨.
3. SETTING 화면 : 내부제어 시간 설정 및 노점, 온도, 압력 등의 설정값을 입력.
4. ALARM 화면 : 알람의 발생시 알람의 종류, 시간, 조치사항 등으로 구성.
5. TREND 화면 : 노점, 온도, 압력 등이 실시간으로 그래프로 표시되는 화면
자세한 것은 TOUCH MANUAL에서 확인 바랍니다.

9. 흡착제 충진법
9.1 흡착제 교체 시점
흡착제의 통상적인 수명은 2~3년 정도이나 압축 공기의 오염 정도에의해 그 수명이
현저히 짧아 질수도 있으므로 주의하여야 하며 아래의 상태일 경우 흡착제를
교환하여야 한다.
1) 필요로 하는 출구 노점을 유지할 수 없는 경우.
2) 출구 노점 상태가 갑자기 상승 되는 경우.
3) Dryer의 입구와 출구의 차압이 초기보다 많이 발생하는 경우.
4) Tower 내부 흡착제가 짙은 갈색 또는 흑색으로 탈색된 경우. (단, 사소한 변색은 무시)
압력하에서 에어드라이어를 설치하거나, 정비를 할 경우 치명적인 인명사고가 발생할 수 있습니다.

9.2 흡착제 교체전 준비
1) 흡착제 교체의 필요성에 대해 다시 한번 정밀 검토를 한다.
2) 흡착제 교체가 필요한 경우 흡착제 교체에 필요한 장비를 사전 준비한다.
( 교체에 흡착제 구매, 가스켓, 볼트 및 교체에 필요한 기본 공구)
3) 교체 일정이 수립되면 장비의 정지시점을 점검한다.
- Air Dryer는 재생시 고열로 가열이 되므로 가열된 흡착제가 완전히 식은 시점에 정지를
하여야 흡착제 교체시 고열의 흡착제에 화상을 입거나 기타 사고를 방지할 수 있다

있다.
4) 장비 정지 후 장비 전, 후단의 밸브를 차단하고, BY-PASS가 설치된 경우 By-pass Valve를
열고, 장비의 내부 압력이 완전히 제거 되도록 한다.
5) 다시 한번 압력계기를 확인하여 압력이 제거 되었는지 확인한다.
흡착제를 취급하기 전 방진 마스크 및 눈 보호장구와 장갑을 착용하십시요.

흡착제 먼지가 눈과 피부에 자극을 줄 수 있습니다.
먼지를 들어 마시거나 피부와 장시간의 접촉은 피하십시요.
9.3 흡착제 교체
1) Dryer Vessel 상부의 흡착제 주입구를 먼저 개방하여 흡착제가 잘 빠지록 준비한다.
2) Dryer Vessel 하부의 흡착제 제거구를 열어 내부의 흡착제를 천천히 꺼낸다.
3) 내부의 흡착제가 완전 제거되면 흡착탑 내부를 가능한 깨끗하게 청소한다.
4) Manhole이 설치된 경우라면, Manhole을 개방하여 내부의 흡착제 고형물 및 기름, 때
등을 깨끗이 제거하십시요.
5) 흡착제 제거구의 가스켓을 새것으로 교환한 후 흡착제 제거구를 닫습니다.
6) 상부의 흡착제 주입구를 통해 새 흡착제를 충진한다.
7) 충진시 충진탑 전체적으로 가득 찰 수 있도록 충진한다.
8) 충진이 완료되면 흡착제 주입구의 가스켓을 새것으로 교환한 후 충진구를 닫습니다.
9) 흡착제 교체가 완료되면 주변을 깨끗이 청소한 후 장비의 상태를 전체적으로 점검한다.
9.4 장비의 재 가동
1) 교체 및 장비 점검이 완료된 후 Control Panel 상의 Alarm 등 이상이 없는지 확인한다.
2) 점검 완료 후 장비 전, 후단 밸브를 개방하여 장비에 사용압력까지 압력을 가압한다.
3) 압력이 정상적으로 가압이 되면 Panel에 있는 Dryer On Switch를 켜서 가동을 한다.
4) 정상가동이 된 후 일정시간 정상가동 유무를 전체적으로 재 점검한다.
5) 흡착제를 신품으로 교체하더라도 노점은 길게는 하루이상의 시간이 지난 후에
정상 회복 될 수 있습니다
있습니다.
10. 고장의 원인과 대책
고장내용 고장원인 대책
Hot Air 인입 온도를 확인
재생공기의 온도가 낮다.
전기 히터의 발열상태를 확인
Compressor의 토출 압력을 점검한다.
입구 압력이 낮다.
Dryer 전단 설비의 Leak 또는 차압을 확인한다.
Compressor의 토출 온도를 점검한다.
입구 온도가 높다. Dryer 전단 설비를 점검한다.(특히 After Cooler)
냉각수가 공급되면 냉각수 온도를 점검한다.
재생 쿨러의 입,출구 온도를 점검한다.
출구 온도가 높다.
점 상승
1. 노점 냉각 의 입
냉각수의 출 의 온도를
입,출구의 를 점검한다
점검한다.
Outlet Valve의 Leak가 발생. 장비 상부의 밸브의 Leak를 점검한다.
전단의 Strainer가 이물질로 막혔는지 점검한다.
Separator Drain Trap 의 작동 불량
Trap의 작동 상태를 정밀 점검하고 고장시 교체한다
교체한다.
노점계의 검교정 시기를 확인한다.
Dew Point Meter의 오동작
노점계의 공급되는 건조공기 라인의 정상여부를 점검한다.
흡착제의 오염
염 원인을 점검한 후 처리한다
처리한다.
흡착제가 오염되었다
오염되었다.
오염흡착제는 재생 가능여부를 확인 후 재생불가시 교체
흡착제의 교체 수명이 되었다. 흡착제를 신품으로 교체한다.
주) 상기 표는 일반적인 사항에 대해 기술한 것으로 자세한 사항은 당사 기술영업팀 및 고객관리팀으로 연락바랍니다.

Office & Factory : 경기도 김포시 월곶면 월하로 165 Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128
고장내용 고장원인 대책
Control Panel 내의 제어가 안된다. PLC, Fuse, Relay, Switch 등 판넬 내부를 점검한다.
Panel에서 정상 제어 출력이 오는지 점검한다.
2. Tower 교체가 안된다
안된다.
Valve의
l 의 오동작
동작 Valve Sol.
l 제어용 S l V/V 작동 상태를 점검한다
점검한다.
Valve Actuator 및 Body 분해 점검한다.
Hot Air 인입 온도를 확인
재생공기의 온도가 낮다.
T.I.C 상의 설정온도가 너무 낮을 경우 재 조정한다.
재생 유량의 설정값을 확인한다.
Heating Timer의 가열시간을 확인한다

확인한다.
가열 공정시 재생타워이 온도가 올라가지 않는다.
3. 재생이 불안정하다. Hot Air 인입 온도를 확인
흡착제의 교체 시점 및 오염 여부를 점검한다

점검한다.
T.I.C 상의 설정온도가 너무 높을 경우 재 조정한다.
냉각공정시 타워의 온도가 잘 식지 않는다. 재생 유량의 설정값을 확인한다.
C li
Cooling Timer의
Ti 의 시간을 확인한다
확인한다.
Filter Element 의 차압발생 Filter 를 점검하고 Element 를 교체한다.
Valve & 배관 상의 Leak 발생 Leak 된 부분을 보수한다.

4 압력손실이 많다
4. 많다. 흡착제가 오염 되었다
되었다. 흡착제의 오염 원인을 점검한 후 처리한다
처리한다.
흡착제의 교체 수명이 되었다. 흡착제를 신품으로 교체한다.

Desiccant Screen이 막혔다 Screen을 점검하고 분해, 청소한다.
주) 상기 표는 일반적인 사항에 대해 기술한 것으로 자세한 사항은 당사 기술영업팀 및 고객관리팀으로 연락바랍니다.
Office & Factory : 경기도 김포시 월곶면 월하로 165 Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128
흡착식드라이어 정기 점검 기준표
○ 점검 ★교환
정비기준
점검부품 점검항목 비고
수시 매월 개월
6개월 년
1년 년
2년 년
3년
2-WAY PNEUMATIC VALVE
- ACTUATOR 작동 상태 점검 ○ OPEN-CLOSE 확인
- DISC & SEAT 작동 상태 점검 ○ 이상 있을때 교환
4-WAY & 2-WAY SOLENOID VALVE
- COIL or 다이아프램 단락 점검 ○ 이상 있을때 교환
- BODY 분해점검 첨소 ○ 이상 있을때 교환
DESICCANT (흡착제)
- DESICCANT 색상 확인 ○ ★ 이상 있을때 교환
노점 확인 ○ 이상 있을때 교환
HEATER HEATER (전기 히터)
- ELEMENT 분해점검 첨소 ○ 이상 있을때 교환
- ELEMENT 열선 단락 점검 ○ 이 있을때
이상 있 교환
발열 상태 점검 ○ 설정값 조정
REGEN COOLER & SEPARATOR
- 냉각 효율 입,출구 에어 온도 ○ 냉각수 온도 확인
- 스케일 제거 분해 세정 ○
AUTO DRAIN TRAP
- TRAP 동작상태 확인 ○ 이상 있을때 교환
- STRAINER 막힘 여부 확인 ○ 분해, 청소
흡착식드라이어 정기 점검 기준표
○ 점검 ★교환
정비기준
점검부품 점검항목 비고
수시 2개월
개월 개월
4개월 년
1년 년
2년 년
3년
Safety Valve
- Lever Test 작동 상태 점검 ○ 이상 있을때 교환
DEW POINT METER (노점계)
- SENSOR 교정 ○ 필수항목
GAUGE 류 ( 온도계, 압력계 )
- GAUGE 작동 확인 ○ 이상 있을때 교환
CONTROL PANEL
- PANEL 작동 확인 ○ 이상 있을때 교환
MCCB,RELAY, TIMER,LAMP …..,
PURGE SILENCER
- SILENCER 작동 확인 ○ ★ 이상 있을때 교환
PNEUTEC KOREA
www.ptkair.com

PHCN-7700SP TOUCH MANUAL
경기도 김포시 월곶면 월하로 165

TEL : 031-998-9126-7
FAX : 031-998-9128
E-mail : [email protected]
www.ptkair.com
www.ptkair.com
PNEUTEC KOREA
목차
점검 사항
화면의 구성
운전모드의 설정
운전시간의 설정
알람의 설정
장비 운전의 시작 및 정지
알람 정지 및 확인
www.ptkair.com
MANUAL
점검 사항
점검 사항
1. Dryer의 정격 전원과 공급 전원의 확인
화면의 구성
2. Panel 내부의 각 부품의 장착 상태 확인
운전모드의 설정 3. 연결 Cable의 이상 유무 및 lug의 조임 상태 확인
4. 전원 연결 후 전압 및 절연 상태 확인
5. Local S/W 작동 여부 확인
알람의 설정
6. 각 계측기의 작동 여부 확인
장비운전의
7. Auto V/V 의 작동 여부 확인
시작 및 정지
8. 수동 밸브의 개,폐의 정상 여부 확인
www.ptkair.com 2
MANUAL
화면의 구성 (HOME)
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작 및 정지
www.ptkair.com 3
MANUAL
화면의 구성 (MAIN)
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작 및 정지
www.ptkair.com 4
MANUAL
화면의 구성 (PROCESS)
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작 및 정지
www.ptkair.com 5
MANUAL
화면의 구성 (SETTING)
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작 및 정지
www.ptkair.com 6
MANUAL
화면의 구성 (TREND)
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작 및 정지
www.ptkair.com 7
MANUAL
화면의 구성 (TREND)
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작 및 정지
www.ptkair.com 8
MANUAL
화면의 구성 (ALARM)
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작 및 정지
www.ptkair.com 9
MANUAL
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작및 설정 Dryer의 운전모드를 설정 및 변경할 수 있도록 구성됨.
선택시 compressor의 상시부하율에 따라 선택하여 사용.
※ 운전 선택 및 시간 설정에 대한 자세한 설명은 AIR DRYER MANUAL을 참조 바랍니다.
www.ptkair.com 10
MANUAL
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
Drying Timer : Air Dryer의 기본 건조운전시간 설정 (표준 4hr)

장비운전의
시작 및 정지 Heating Timer : 재생되는 tower의 가열 시간 설정 ( 표준 2hr 30min)
Demand Delay Timer : Dryer의 노점운전연장시간 설정 (표준 4hr)
알람 정지 및 확인 ※ 운전 선택 및 시간 설정에 대한 자세한 설명은 AIR DRYER MANUAL을 참조 바랍니다.

※ 시간 변경을 임의로 조작할 경우 장비의 오동작을 발생시킬 수 있으니 주의 바랍니다.
www.ptkair.com 11
MANUAL
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
Pressurizing Timer : 타워 전환시 증압시간 설정 (표준 5min)
Depress Timer : 1차 purgy 시간 설정 ( 표준 5min)
장비운전의 Valve Alarm Delay Timer : 밸브 오동작 감지 지연 시간 설정 ( 표준 10sec)
시작 및 정지 Demand Delay Timer : 노점운전 연장시간 설정 ( 표준 4hr)
Comp. Unload holding Timer : 콤프레셔의 무부하운전 지연시간 설정
※ 운전 선택 및 시간 설정에 대한 자세한 설명은 AIR DRYER MANUAL을 참조 바랍니다.
※ 시간 변경을 임의로 조작할 경우 장비의 오동작을 발생시킬 수 있으니 주의 바랍니다.
www.ptkair.com 12
MANUAL
알람의 설정
점검 사항
화면의 구성
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작 및 정지
Dew Point Demand : 노점운전 지연온도 설정
Dew Point High Alarm : 노점 온도 경고 설정
Outlet Pressure Low Alarm: 출구 압력 경고 설정
Heater Over Temperature : 전기히터 내부 과열 경고 설정
www.ptkair.com 13
MANUAL
장비 운전의 시작 및 설정
Dryer 의 On/off switch는 touch screen 이 아닌 panel 외부에 부착되어 있으며

점검 사항
Dryer On 상태가 되면 touch Main 화면의 상단의 Operating Status상에 Run 으로
화면의 구성 표시되고, Off시에는 Stop으로 표시되어 운전상태를 확인 할 수 있음.
알람의 설정
장비 운전의
시작 및 정지
www.ptkair.com 14
MANUAL
Dryer 의 Alarm 발생시 panel 외부의 경광등 및 buzzer 를 통해 경보를 알리게 되며

점검 사항
Alarm 발생 내역은 touch touch Alarm 화면에 시간 및 발생 내역이 표시됨.
화면의 구성 경광등 및 buzzer 는 panel 외부의 buzzer Stop 을 눌러 해제 할 수 있음.
알람의 설정
장비운전의
시작 및 정지
www.ptkair.com 15
Commissioning Report for
■ PROJECT NAME : Air Dryer Package
■ CUSTOMER : HYUNDAI POWERTECH
■ DATE :
Commissioning Report

Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128

COMMISSIONING CHECK LIST
MODEL NO. DATE. 20 년 월 일
PROJECT NAME CUSTOMER
번호 점 검 항 목 판 정
☞ 시 운전 전 상태 확인
1 외관 상태 손상 유무 (도장 및 외관 상태 등) □양호 □보통 □불량
배관 계통 (연결 및 조임 상태 , DRAIN 배관 연결 상태등) □양호 □보통 □불량
각 VALVE의 확인 (설치 위치 및 연결 배관 , 외관 상태) □양호 □보통 □불량

2
각 계기류의 확인 (설치 위치 및 연결 배관 , 외관 상태) □양호 □보통 □불량
□양호 □보통 □불량
동력선 연결 및 배선 상태 확인
- 주 전원 연결 및 상태 확인 □양호 □보통 □불량
- 조작 전원 연결 및 상태 확인 □양호 □보통 □불량
3 - 각 계기류 와의 연결 및 상태 확인 □양호 □보통 □불량
- 제어배선 확인 (압착 단자 및 릴레이 등) □양호 □보통 □불량
- DEW POINT METER 의 연결 상태 확인 □양호 □보통 □불량
□양호 □보통 □불량
밸브류의 OPEN-CLOSE 작동 상태 확인
4
- 4-WAY SOLENOID V/V 조작 □양호 □보통 □불량
5 수동 BY-PASS VALVE의 OPEN-CLOSE 상태 확인 □양호 □보통 □불량
각 TIMER의 설정 운전 시간 확인 □양호 □보통 □불량
- DRYING TIME(건조 시간) 분
- HEATING TIME(가열 시간) 분
6 - 분
- 분
- 분
- 분
번호 점 검 항 목 판 정
T.I.C 의 설정 값 확인
7 - HEATER OVER TEMP. ( 히터 과열 방지 온도 - ℃) ℃
- HEATER LINE TEMP. ( 히터 CONTROL 온도 - ℃) ℃
운전 시작 전 압력계 및 온도계 확인
- TOWER 압력계 ( barg ) barg
8 - 상.하부 온도계 ( ℃ ) ℃
- HOT AIR 배관 연결 상태 및 냉각수 배관 연결 상태 ( 차단밸브 설치 유,무 등) □양호 □보통 □불량
- HOT AIR 입구 온도 확인( ℃ ) ℃
☞ 공기 건조기 운전
9 밸브 OPEN/CLOSE 상태에 따른 LED LAMP 의 점등 상태 확인 □양호 □불량
각 TOWER 별 운전 상태 확인
MAIN VALVE 작동 상태 확인 □양호 □불량

10
REGENERATION VALVE 작동 상태 확인 □양호 □불량
HEATING, COOLING VALVE 작동 상태 확인 □양호 □불량
재생 유량 조절 밸브 확인
11 FLOW INDICATING CONTROLLER 설정 값 확인 □양호 □불량
PROPORTION VALVE 작동 상태 확인 □양호 □불량
각 TOWER 전환 운전 및 S/W 상태 확인
- DRYER ON/OFF SWITCH 작동 상태 □양호 □불량
- DEW POINT ON/OFF SWITCH 작동 상태 □양호 □불량

12
- 경광등 작동 상태 □양호 □불량
- BUZZER STOP BUTTON 및 BUZZER 작동 상태 □양호 □불량
- LAMP TEST PUSH BUTTON 작동 상테 □양호 □불량
ELECTRIC HEATER의 작동 상태 확인
- HEATER TEMP. (T.I.C 의 온도를 지시 값보다 낮게 설정) □양호 □불량

13
- HEATER LINE TEMP. (T.I.C 의 온도를 지시 값보다 낮게 설정) □양호 □불량
- SCR UNIT의 부하 변동에 따른 전력량 지시 상태 □양호 □불량
14 배관 및 연결 부위 AIR LEAK 상태 확인 □양호 □불량
15 재생 COOLER의 냉각 기능 상태 확인 □양호 □불량
16 재생 TOWER의 온도 확인 (시간이 지남에 따라 변동) □양호 □불량
17 노점 온도 확인 (시간이 지남에 따라 다소 변동) □양호 □불량
18 PRE FILTER DRAIN 작동 상태 확인 □양호 □불량

19 재생 SEPARATOR DRAIN 작동 상태 확인 □양호 □불량
20 하부 배관 DRAIN 작동 상태 확인 □양호 □불량
☞ 공기 건조기 운전 정지 상태 확인
21 DRYER OFF 시 운전 TOWER의 밸브 상태 유지(OPEN or CLOSE) □양호 □불량
22 COOLING 밸브 (CV-01,02) CLOSE 상태로 절환 또는 유지 □양호 □불량
23 DRYER OFF 시 운전 TOWER TIMER 및 LAMP 점등 상태 □양호 □불량
24 DRYER ON 시 운전 시간 연결 운전 상태(정전 보상 기능) □양호 □불량
☞ 기타 현장 확인 상태
25 □양호 □불량
☞ 공기 건조기 운전 교육 실시
기동 및 정지 방법 □실시 □미실시
TOWER 절환 운전 방법 □실시 □미실시
공기건조기 정지 시 주의 사항 □실시 □미실시

31
각 계기류 설정 방법 및 요령 □실시 □미실시
유지 보수시 요령 및 교환 방법 □실시 □미실시
□실시 □미실시
비고
ADSORPTION AIR DRYER COMMISSIONING REPORT
DESIGN CONDITION
Compressor System pressure barg Header Pressure barg
Operating pressure barg Regen. Air Pressure barg
O
Operating
ti T Temperature
t ℃ Ai C
Air Capacity
it Nm3/hr
/
Electric Main Power Supply V- P- Hz Control Power V- P- Hz
Dew Point Temperature ℃ Heater Capacity kw
CHECKING TIME
운전 점검 항목 점검 기준 사항
A탑 압력계 barg
재생 압력계 barg
압력
(barg)
B탑 압력계 barg
DRYING TOWER A or B
A탑 온도계(상/하) ℃/℃
B탑 온도계(상/하) ℃/℃
Dryer Outlet 배관 ℃
온도
Heater Outlet 배관 ℃
(℃)
Cooler In/Out(Air) ℃/℃
Cooler In/Out(Water) ℃
Hot Air Temp. ℃
운전 시간 제습(Drying) 시간 시간 분
가열(Heating) 시간 시간 분
설정 확인
냉각(Cooling) 시간 시간 분
출구노점온도 ℃ 이하
공급전원 V-Meter V ±10%
전력 Control Power V
Heater A-Meter A
Regen Air Flow N㎥/hr
Propotion V/V Open
SV
운전 모드
설정 확인 PV 사용상태기준
OPEN (%) %
p Valve 작동 상태 작동 확인
AMP 점등 상태 점등 확인
확인점검자서명
운전 MODE 설정 방법 특이사항
COOLER 온도 체크
SEPARATOR 하부 DRAIN TRAP 작동 상태

COMMISSIONING COMPLETION CONFIRMATION
( 시운전 완료 확인서 )
1. Air Dryer Specification
Dryer Type
Dryer Model
Operating Pressure Barg
Operating Temp. ℃
Capacity Nm3/hr
2. Commissioning Roport
- Refer to Attachments Report
3. Commissioning Check
- 상기와 같이 시운전 완료를 확인 합니다.
확인자 소속 : 직책 :
확인자 성명 :
확 인 : 20 년 월 일 Sign

FINAL DOCUMENT
2. SPECIFICATIONS, DATA
SHEET & DRAWING

Contents for
1) SPECIFICATIONS
2) DATA SHEET
3) UTILITY CONSUMPTION LIST
4) DRAWING

FINAL DOCUMENT
1) SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL PHCN-7700SP ISSUE DATE 2017. 07. 10. REV. 0
1. GENERAL
1) Customer : HYUNDAI POWERTECH
2) Project Name : Heat of Compression type Air Dryer
3) Location : MAXICO
4) Q,ty : Compressed Air Dryer (PHCN-7700SP) - 1 Set
: Pre Filter (PSF-320 150A) - 1 Set
: After Filter (PSF-310 150A) - 1 Set
: Hot Air Separator (PMS-40ST) -1 Set
2. SCOPE of SUPPLY
■ Pressure vessel (Twin towers)

□ Pre cooler (1,st)
□ Pre cooler (2,nd)
■ Regeneration cooler
■ Electric heater
□ Steam heater
■ Dewpoint analyzer
■ Local control panel
■ Moisture separator with auto darin trap
□ Purge muffler
□ Main filter with auto drain trap
■ Pre filter with auto drain trap
□ Line filter with manual valve
■ After filter with manual valve
□ Membrane filter with manual valve
□ Wet Receiver tank with auto drain trap
□ Drying air Storage tank with manual valve
■ Flow switching valves with air cylinder
■ All piping materials and support with in the battery limit.
■ Interconnecting piping and support with in the battery limit.
■ Common base plate including the air dryer
■ Lifting lugs and Earth lugs.
■ Name plates.
■ Insulation for Interconnecting hot air piping
■ All flanges together with bolts, nuts and gaskets, fittings within battery limit.
■ Painting material for rust prevention and final coat.

SPECIFICATIONS
3. SCOPE of WORK
■ Design, engineering and documentation

■ Manutacturing & assembling
■ Erection work including leveling, chipping and grouting
■ Instrument tubing & within battery limit with material
■ Painting for rust prevention and coat at shop (primer and finish)
■ Insulation works (Hot line and cooling water line)
■ Inspection and control test at shop
■ Performance test at site
■ Wooden packing
■ Wrap packing
□ Transportation to the site
■ Transportation to FOB
■ Commissioning and test operation
□ Installation on site
□ Piping on site
4. BUYER SUPPLIED SERVICES
■ Excluded from supplier

supplier'ss scope of supply air engineering
■ Site preparation including foundation design and civil works
■ Connections to utilities and consumers, the material required to this work.
■ Labor, materials and utilities for start-up
■ List of recommended sapre parts
■ Plant lighting, fire protection and other safety measures.
■ Utility supply for erection and test operation
□ Anchoring for erection work.
5. WARRANTY
The warranty is granted under the assumption that the erection work
will be performed according to instructions of PNEUTEC KOREA.
The commissioning, start-up and test run will be performed
under the suppervision of PNEUTEC KOREA.
5-1. Material warranty

12 months after commissioning or 18 months after advice of the goods ready
for dispatch which ever come first material which has to be replaced due to
norminal wear and tear or maloperation by the personnel is excluded from
this warranty.

SPECIFICATIONS
5-2. Process warranty

Immediately after the commissioning a start-up will take place.
During the start-up the warranted figures will be measured and noted
down in report. When the measured figures fulfill the warranted values,
the dryer is considered as accepted.
PNEUTEC KOREA, will warranty the performances of the dryer
under design conditions written in data sheet.
The measuring tolerances are according to the applied measuring instruments.
6. DIMENSIONS and WEIGHTS FOR ERECTION

Dimension(L×W×H) : 4,200×2,900×3,200mm
Weight : Approx. 10,000 Kgs
7. APPLICABLE CODES and STANDARDS
The dryer systems covered by this specification shall he designed, inspected and
ttasted
t d in
i accordance
d with,
ith but
b t nott limited
li it d to,
t the
th following
f ll i listed
li t d codes,
d
standards of latest edition in effect at time of placement purchase order, unless
otherwise stated in this specification.
■ Korea industrial Standards (KS)

■ Japan Industrial Standards (JIS)
□ American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
□ American Society of Mechanical Engineering (ASME)
■ Tubular heat Exchanger Manufacturers Association (TEMA)
■ International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
■ National Electrotechnical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
□ American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
□ China Safety Quality License (C.S.Q.L)
7-1. Pressure vessels and heat exchanger

For static duty the adsorbers will be designed according to KS B 6750-3 & KOSHA
TEMA Class"C".
The hydrostatic test will be done in pressure of Messrs, Client
7-2. Materials
The used materials will be according to KS specifications.

SPECIFICATIONS
7-3. Piping and Valves

piping and valves corresponding to KS standards
All valves with a nominal diameter bigger than 2 inches will be supplied
with flanged connections.
7-4. Welding
WQR-Welders qualification records, PQR-Procedure Qualification records,
WPS-Welding procedure spec., ets.
7-5. Safety
Under consideration of the Korea standars (Industrial Safety Heath Law)
7-6. Instruments
According to mamufacturer's standards.
7-7. Electrical equipment

In according with the NEMA-cords.
Explosion protection is not considered as not required
The codes and standards set forth the minimum requirements, which may
be exceeded by vendor if, in his judgement and with owner's acceptance,
superior designs or materials are required for successful and continuous of
vendor's equipment as required by the specification.
In the event of any coflict among standards, codes and this specification,
Vendor shall submit the conflict to owner for written resolution.
Owner shall have the option to incorporate requirement resulting from
changes in codes, standards and regulations between the date of the
purchase order and the date on which vendor initiates fabrication.
Resulting effect of Owner's advice effect is vendor's responsibility.
8. LANGUAGE and UNITS
8-1. Language
All documents and drawing to be submitted shall be written in english.
If required purcharser, be able to in Korean.
8-2. Units
Unless otherwise specified, metric, Celsius and kilogram units shall be
applied as the measurement system for drawing and documents to be submitted.
However, nominal sizes of piping and tubing components shall be in
accordance with inch system.

SPECIFICATIONS
9. PNEUTEC KOREA SUPPLIED DOCUMENTATION
Document will be submitted in accordance with PNEUTEC KOREA

format and requirement.
The following specifications, data sheets and other documentation in english
will be supplied in tree-folds at various stage during the execution of the project.
9-1. Process
▷ Process description with the dryer
▷ Detailed process and instrumentation diagram 1-weeks from order
9-2. Mechanical
▷ Heat exchanger data sheets and calculation 2-weeks from order
▷ General arrangement and foundation layout drawing 2-weeks from order
▷ Piping assembly drawing including all elevations and cross sections for
easy equipment assembly 2-weeks from order
▷ Construction book with the dryer
Material and test certificates with the plant
Subsupplier list 2-weeks from order
▷ Detailed parts list 2-weeks from order
▷ Woking schedule 1-week from order
▷ Inspection and test procedure 4-weeks from order
▷ Performance curves
▷ Certificate of guarantee with the plant
9-3. Instrumentation
▷ Wiring diagram 2-weeks from order
▷ Dryer operating and maintenance instructions manual, complete with
equipment documentation with the plant

SPECIFICATIONS
10. DESIGN CONDITIONS
1) Inlet condition
▷ Fluid : Compressed air
▷ Flow capacity : Nor. 7,700 Nm3/hr
▷ Operating pressure : Nor. 7.0 bar
▷ Temperature : Max. 40℃
▷ Humidity : R.H 100%
Referred to inlet condition (40℃, 7.0barG)
2) Outlet condition
▷ Outlet pressure : 6.8 barG
▷ Pressure drop : max. 0.2 barG
▷ Dewpoint : -40℃ at atm
11. UTILITES
▷ Instrument air : Drying air appr. 1∽2 Nm3/hr

: Pressure 5.0 barG
▷ Steam : N/A
▷ Water : appr. 34 M3/hr
for Regeneration cooler at 3.0 barG, 32℃
▷ Main power : 480VAC, 60Hz, 3PH
▷ Control power : 120VAC, 60Hz, 1PH
12. DESIGN BASIS
The material and equipment according to KS standards

▷ Model : PHCN-7700SP
▷ Design pressure : 9.7 bar
▷ Design temperature : 250℃
▷ Design code : KS B 6750-3 with KOSHA stamp
▷ Hydraulic test pressure : 12.6 barG

SPECIFICATIONS
13. COMPONENTS and SERVICES
1) Drying towers
▷ Type : dual & vertical
▷ Volume : appr. 2.37 m3
▷ Corrosion allowance : 1.0 mm
▷ Size(mm) : I.D 1,300×1,350H(T.L)
▷ Material shell & head : SS400
desiccant screen : STS304
▷ Accessories pressure gauge
temperature gauge
safety valve (DN50)
desiccant filling and removal port (DN100)
2) Regeneration cooler
▷ Type : shell & tube
▷ Design code : KS B 6750-3
▷ Heat duty : 133,800 kcal/hr
▷ Operating temp. shell side : 150 / 40℃
tube side : 32 / 37℃
▷ Size shell : DN250×2,100L
tube dia.×wall th.k : ∮12.7×1.0t
overall length : appr. 2,500mm
▷ Material shell & channel : SPP
head : SPP
tube : C1220T-H
tube sheet : SS400
flange : SS400

SPECIFICATIONS
3) Moisure separator
▷ Type : 5-steps centrifugal
▷ Design code : KS B 6750-3
▷ Material shell : STS304
head : STS304
cyclone : STS304
▷ Accessories auto drain trap
4) Electric heater
▷ Type : immersion, shell & tube
▷ Capacity : 54 Kw
▷ Power : 480VAC, 60Hz, 3PH
▷ Material
M t i l shell
h ll : carbon
b steel
t l
head : carbon steel
tube : STS304
tube sheet : SS400
▷ Accessories thermo-couple ("K-type)
5) Pre filter
▷ Type : cartridge
▷ Filteration : 5.0 micron
▷ Flow capacity : 221 Nm3/min
▷ Element model : PP-50
material : P.E (sintering resin)
q.ty : 8 sets
maker : PNEUTEC KOREA
▷ Size (mm) : I.D 333.4×1000H(T.L)
▷ Accessories auto drain trap

SPECIFICATIONS
6) After filter
▷ Type : cartridge
▷ Filteration : 1.0 micron
▷ Flow capacity : 176 Nm3/min
▷ Element model : LP-50
material : glass fiber, micro media + c.s punching plate
q.ty : 8 sets
maker : PNEUTEC KOREA
▷ Size (mm) : I.D 333.4×1000H(T.L)
▷ Accessories : auto drain trap
*Pre & after filter will be designed ISO 8573-1 quality class 4
7) Flow switching valve

▷ Type : Hi-performance pneumatic butterfly
▷ Size & rating : DN150 KS10K, wafer
▷ Q,ty
Qt : 4 sets
t
▷ Material body : Carbon Steel
disc : S.S304
seat : RTFE
▷ Maker body : daejung valve
acuator : shine contec
▷ Solenoid : double acting
▷ Accessories : limit switch
8) Regeneration valve
▷ Q,ty : 8 sets
disc : S.S304
seat : RTFE
▷ Accessories : limit switch

SPECIFICATIONS
9) Flow control valve
▷ Q,ty : 1 set
disc : S.S304
seat : RTFE
▷ Accessories : air cylinder, EP-Positioner, air regulator
10) D.P Transmitter & Orifice

▷ Type : smart HART
▷ Size & rating : DN100 KS10K
▷ Q,ty : 1 set
▷ Material : maker standard
▷ Diff. press : 0∽3000 mmAq
▷ Range : 0∽ 3,080Nm3/hr
▷ Maker
M k : YOKOGAYA & SAMIL
11) Dewpoint meter

▷ Type : Dewpoint hygrometer (Thin-fi lm aluminum oxide)
▷ Model : MTS-6
▷ Q,ty : 1 set
▷ Range : -110℃ to +20℃
▷ Operating temp. : -20℃ to +60℃
▷ Operating pressure : 0.01 to 34 barG
▷ Enclosure : IP65 / NEMA4
▷ Power : AC 220V, 50/60Hz
▷ Display : 128 x 64 matrix LCD
▷ Incoming signal : 4-20mA with 2-wire transmitter
▷ Sensor maker : GE Panametric (U.S.A)

SPECIFICATIONS
12) Adsorbent (desiccant)
▷ Model : NS-10 + F200 (10%)
▷ Common form : ball
▷ Nominal size : 2-5 mm
▷ Material : Alumina Silica + Activated alumina (10%)
▷ Bulk density : 750 kg/m3
▷ Q,ty : 1,750kg/tower×2-towers = 3,500kgs
▷ Maker : Kukdong chemical / BASF
13) Local control panel

Local control panel made of carbon steel, including temp. Controller and
main switch, fuses, transformer, etc.
▷ Type : Indoor / Dust proof
▷ Case material : Carbon steel
▷ Color : D30871 (2.4Y 8.8/2.7)
▷ the following alarms are joined to a summary alarm
☞ dewpoint high alarm
☞ heater over temp. alarm
☞ heater trip alarm
☞ pressure llow alarm
l
☞ valve error alarm
14) Painting
▷ Surface treatment : SSPC-SP3 (power tools cleaning)
▷ Coating Primer : ployamide cured epoxy, 1ply×25microns
final coat. : ployamide cured epoxy, 2ply×25microns
▷ Color : munsel no. 2.4Y 8.8/2.7 (D30871)
15) Insulation
▷ Scope : the insulation will be done to heat conservation for
regeneration temperature, (above 80℃)
▷ Material : the insulation materials will be designed sccording to
JIS A 9505.
for equipment : glass wool (12w/m3k), 50mm th.k
for piping : glass wool pipe cover N03, 50mm th.k
Jacketing : for equipment -- SS400 steel plate, 3.2mm th,k
: for piping ------- color flat sheet 0.4t

FINAL DOCUMENT
2) DATA SHEET

□for information □for quotation
□for approval ■for final
DATA SHEET for DESICCANT AIR DRYER

CUSTOMER HYUNDAI POWERTECH DATE 2017. 07. 10
LOCATION MAXICO PAR.D Y.J.KIM CHK.D D.A.KANG
PROJECT NO. APP.D J.H.LEE
SERVICE INSTRUMENT AIR DRYER REV. DATE LINE NO. BY
SUPPLIER 1
NO. REQ.D WORKING : 1 STAND-BY : 0 TOTAL : 1 2
PROCESS DESIGN DATA
MODEL PHCN-7700SP TYPE HEAT OF COMPRESSION
FLUID COMPRESSED AIR Max.ALLOWABLE P/DROP 0.2 barG
INLET CONDITION OUTLET CONDITION
FLOW RATE (Nor/Max) Nor. 7,700 Nm3/hr FLOW RATE (Min) 7,700 Nm3/hr
PRESSURE (Nor/Max) Nor. 7.0 barG PRESSURE 6.8 barG
TEMPERATURE (Nor/Max) Max. 40 ℃ TEMPERATURE Max. 45 ℃
RELATIVE HUMIDITY 100% at 40 ℃ REGEN. AIR CONSUMPT.N 2,310 Nm3/hr
DEWPOINT -40 ℃ at atm
UTILITY AVAILABLE INSTALLATION ■ INDOOR □ OUTDOOR
COOLING WATER 2.0 - 3.0 barG AREA CLASS ■ NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
CHILLED WATER None □ HAZARDOUS AREA
STEAM None NOISE LEVEL (Max.) 85 Db(A) 1m distance
ELECTRIC POWER CONNECTION SIZE AIR : DN150 KS10K
MAIN POWER 3 Ph 60 Hz 480 Volts WATER : DN80 KS10K
CONTROL POWER 1 Ph 60 Hz 120 Volts HOT AIR : DN100 KS10K
OPERATION ■ AUTOMATIC □ MANUAL
MACHANICAL DESIGN DATA
DESIGN PRESSURE 9.7 barG MATERIAL
DESIGN TEMPERATURE 250 ℃ SHELL / HEAD SS400 / SS400
CORROSION ALLOWANCE 1.0 mm DESICCANT SCREEN STS304
CODE and STANDARD FLANGE / PIPE SS400 / SPP
PRESSURE VESSEL KS B 6750-3 & KOSHA HEX. BOLT/NUT SS400
PIPING KS or JIS ST.D GASKET METAL
MATERIAL KS or JIS ST.D HEATER (CASE/ELEMENT) STPG370E / STS304
COOLER (CASE/TUBE) SS400 / COPPER
SPECIFICATIONS
DESICCANT ACCESSORIES
TYPE & SIZE NS-10 / 2-5mm ■ DEWPOINT METER
MATERIAL SILICA + ALUMINA ■ REGENERATION FLOW CONTROLLER
WEIGHT (TOTAL) 3,500 Kgs/2-towers ■ SAFETY VALVE
UTILITY CAPACITY ■ PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE GAUGE
■ HOT AIR min. 100 ℃ ■ LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
■ ELECTRIC HEATER 54 Kw ■ AUTO DRAIN TRAP
□ STEAM HEATER ■ COOLER & SEPARATOR
■ COOLING WATER 34 m3/hr ■ PRE & AFTER FILTER
□ CHILLED WATER m3/hr ■ ONE SKID & BY-PASS PIPING
□ BLOWER HP □ with HEATER PURGE CONTROL
OPERATION CONDITION PAINTING SPEC.
CYCLE TIME 8.0 Hrs SURFACE TREATMENT SSPC-SP3
OPERATION TIME DRYING 4.0 hrs, HEATING 3.0 hrs INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MAKER STD.
DIMENSION (mm) L×W×H 4,200×2,900×3,200 METHOD PRIMER 2 COAT.
WEIGHT (Kgs) 10,000 COLOR NO. 2.4Y 8.8/2.7 (D30871)
1. Each vessel of dryer will be furnished with pressure/temperature gauge
NOTE
2. The external surface of dryer could be painted in accord with Maker's standard & color with insulat

DATA SHEET for PRE FILTER

SERVICE PRE FILTER REV. DATE LINE NO. BY
SUPPLIER 1
PROCESS DESIGN DATA
MODEL PSF-320 150A
TYPE CARTRIDGE FILTER
FLUID COMPRESSED AIR
FLOW CAPACITY 221 Nm3/min
PRESSURE CONDITION
INLET PRESSURE 7.0 barG
DESIGN PRESSURE 9.7 barG
HYDRO. TEST PRESSURE 12.6 barG
PRESSURE DROP Max. 0.1 barG (initial)
TEMPERATURE CONDITION
INLET TEMPERATURE Max. 60℃
DESIGN TEMPERATURE 100 ℃
DESIGN CONDITION
CODE and STANDARD KS B 6750-3 & KOSHA
REQUIRED CODE STAMP KOSHA STAMP
CORROSION ALLOWANCE 1.0 mm
RADIOGRAPH EXAMINATION ■ N/A □ SPOT □ FULL
POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT ■ NO □ YES
MATERIAL PAINTING SPEC.
SHELL / HEAD STPG370E/SS400 SURFACE TREATMENT SSPC-SP3
FLANGE SS400 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MAKER STD.
BOLT / NUT / S.W SS400 METHOD PRIMER 2 COAT.
GASKET NON ASBESTOS COLOR NO. 2.4Y 8.8/2.7 (D30871)
NOZZLE NECK STPG370E
CARTRIDGE SPEC.
FILTERATION 5.0 micron
MATERIAL P.E (Sintering resin), COVER : Engineering plastic
EFFICIENCY 99.9% at 7.0barG
CARTRIDGE MODEL PP-50
QUANTITY 8-Sets
EXCHANGE TIME 6,000 Hrs operating or Diff. pressure drop 0.3 barG
NOZZLE SCHEDULE ACCESSORIES
Nozzle Size Material Rating Connec. Type Service ■ DRAIN V/V with AUTO DRAIN TRAP
N-1 DN150 SS400 KS10K SO.FF FLG. INLET ■ DIFF. PRESSURE INDICATOR
N-2 DN150 SS400 KS10K SO.FF FLG. OUTLET □ PRESSURE GAUGE
N-3 DN15 SS400 KS10K PT SCR.D D.P.I □ DIVIT
N-4 DN15 SS400 KS10K PT SCR.D DRAIN □ SAFETY VALVE
DIMENSION (mm) I.D 333.4 × 1000H (T.L) WEIGHT (kg) 220
NOTE

DATA SHEET for AFTER FILTER

SERVICE AFTER FILTER REV. DATE LINE NO. BY
SUPPLIER 1
PROCESS DESIGN DATA
MODEL PSF-310 150A
TYPE CARTRIDGE FILTER
FLUID COMPRESSED AIR
FLOW CAPACITY 176 Nm3/min
PRESSURE CONDITION
INLET PRESSURE 7.0 barG
DESIGN PRESSURE 9.7 barG
HYDRO. TEST PRESSURE 12.6 barG
PRESSURE DROP Max. 0.1 barG (initial)
TEMPERATURE CONDITION
INLET TEMPERATURE Max. 60℃
DESIGN TEMPERATURE 100 ℃
DESIGN CONDITION
CODE and STANDARD KS B 6750-3 & KOSHA
REQUIRED CODE STAMP KOSHA STAMP
CORROSION ALLOWANCE 1.0 mm
RADIOGRAPH EXAMINATION ■ N/A □ SPOT □ FULL
POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT ■ NO □ YES
MATERIAL PAINTING SPEC.
SHELL / HEAD STPG370E/SS400 SURFACE TREATMENT SSPC-SP3
FLANGE SS400 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MAKER STD.
BOLT / NUT / S.W SS400 METHOD PRIMER 2 COAT.
GASKET NON ASBESTOS COLOR NO. 2.4Y 8.8/2.7 (D30871)
NOZZLE NECK STPG370E
CARTRIDGE SPEC.
FILTERATION 1.0 micron
MATERIAL Glass fiber / Micro media, COVER : Engineering plastic
EFFICIENCY 99.9% at 7.0barG
CARTRIDGE MODEL LP-50
QUANTITY 8-Sets
EXCHANGE TIME 4,000 Hrs operating or Diff. pressure drop 0.3 barG
NOZZLE SCHEDULE ACCESSORIES
Nozzle Size Material Rating Connec. Type Service □ DRAIN V/V with AUTO DRAIN TRAP
N-1 DN150 SS400 KS10K SO.FF FLG. INLET ■ DIFF. PRESSURE INDICATOR
N-2 DN150 SS400 KS10K SO.FF FLG. OUTLET □ PRESSURE GAUGE
N-3 DN15 SS400 KS10K PT SCR.D D.P.I □ DIVIT
N-4 DN15 SS400 KS10K PT SCR.D DRAIN □ SAFETY VALVE
DIMENSION (mm) I.D 333.4 × 1000H (T.L) WEIGHT (kg) 220
NOTE

FINAL DOCUMENT
3) UTILITY CONSUMPTION LIST

UTILITY CONSUMPTION LIST

SERVICE INSTRUMENT AIR DRYER REV. DATE LINE NO. BY
SUPPLIER 1
MODEL PHCN-7700SP TYPE HEAT OF COMPRESSION
DESCRIPTION Q.ty Q,ty of UTILITY
NO. TOTAL
(EQUIPMENT and PART) USE WORKING CONSUMPTION
POWER
1 1 1 0.2 kw 0.2 kw
(CONTROL PANEL)
POWER
2 1 1 54 kw 54 kw
(ELECTRIC HEATER)
COOLING WATER
3 1 1 34 m3/hr 34 m3/hr
(REGENERATION COOLER)
NOTE
1. RATED POWER : 480VAC, 60Hz, 3PH.
2. CONTROL POWER : 220VAC, 60Hz, 1PH.
3. COOLING WATER : 32℃이하, 2-3barG기준

FINAL DOCUMENT
4) DRAWING

FINAL DOCUMENT
3. PART LIST

Equipment & instrument list for air dryer (per 1 set)
MODEL : PHCN-7700SP
부품번호 부품명칭 제작사 형식/모델 주요사양 수량 비고

(Equip.No) (Description) (Maker) (Type/Model) (Specifications) (Q.ty) (Remark)
I.D 1300×1350mm(T.L) 2.36m3
PV-A/B Drying tower PNEUTEC KOREA Vertical / PDV-2370 2 sets D/P : 9.7barG
Material : Carbon steel
EH Electric heater DAEHAN HEATER Shell&Tube / PEHH-1418 Immersion, 54Kw 1 set 480V3Ph60Hz
PF Pre filter PNEUTEC KOREA Cartidge / PSF-320 150A 5.0 micron / DN150 1 set Carbon steel
AF After filter PNEUTEC KOREA Cartidge / PSF-310 150A 1.0 micron / DN150 1 set Carbon steel
RC Regenetion cooler PNEUTEC KOREA Shell&Tube / HV2106CP DN250×2,100L(Shell) , C.S+Cooper 1 set Carbon steel
MS Moisture separator PNEUTEC KOREA 5-Steps centrifugal DN300×740L(T.L), DN100 1 set Stainless steel
ADT-1 Auto drain trap WOORI Float type, WRDT-1000 Automatic drain control 2 sets for separator
ADT-2 Auto drain trap WOORI Float type,

y WRDT-1000 Automatic drain 1 set for filters
DD-1 Desiccant KUKDONG Neosun NS-10 Alumina Silica, 2-5mm 3,500kg
DD-2 Desiccant POROCEL DRYOCEL D848 Activated Alumina , 4-6mm 400kg
MCV Main control valve DAEJUNG VALVE butterfly / 3-SE A630 DN150, High performance w/actuator 4 sets FC / SCS13 / RTFE
RCV Regenetion control valve DAEJUNG VALVE butterfly / 3-SE A630 DN100, High performance w/actuator 9 sets FC / SCS13 / RTFE
DN125, High performance w/actuator
FCV Flow control valve DAEJUNG VALVE butterfly / 3-SE A630 1 set FC / SCS13 / RTFE
w/ E.P positioner (TY-1000R)
PSV Safety valve KUMSUNG IND. Full bore / GSSF-7A DN50xDN65, S/P : 9.7 barG 2 sets
SV-D Solenoid valve PARKER 5-port / PSH 530D Double coil, 3/8" 4 set
SV-D Solenoid valve PARKER 5-port / PSH 530S Single coil, 3/8" 4 set
FRL Air Unit PARKER Relief / Filter+Regulator, 3/8" 1 set

Equipment & instrument list for air dryer (per 1 set)
MODEL : PHCN-7700SP
부품번호 부품명칭 제작사 형식/모델 주요사양 수량 비고

(Equip.No) (Description) (Maker) (Type/Model) (Specifications) (Q.ty) (Remark)
PG Pressure gauge WISE Bourdon tube / P-110 0-15 barG, Φ100, J type, PT1/2" 3 sets
TG Temperature gauge WISE Bimetal / T-110 0-350℃ Well 450L, Φ100, PT1/2" 4 sets
TG Temperature gauge WISE Bimetal / T-110 0-350℃ Well 100L, Φ100, PT1/2" 2 sets
TC Thermo couple WISE Single element / R-111 K-type, PT 1/2", Well 50L 3 setS
TS Pressure Transmitter WISE P-118 0-15 barG, PT1/2" 1 set
CP Control panel PNEUTEC KOREA Relay control 1000X350X1350H, C.S , D30871 1 set 480V×3Ph×60Hz
DP Dewpoint meter GE Panametrics MTS-6 Panel mounted +20 to -110℃ 1 set
DPT Diff. pressure transmitter YOKOGAWA Smart / EJA-110A 0 ~ 3000mmH2O, 4-20mA 1 set
OR Orifice Assembly SAMIL Plate / SOP-SOF DN100, 0 ~ 3000mmH2O 1 set A105 / S.S316
DS Desiccant screen PNEUTEC KOREA Screen / PCS08 DN200, ∮1.2×3P×1.5t 4 sets S.S304
PS 1st Depress. purge silencer ALWITCO B-15 Air Exhaust Muffler 1 set
PM Purge muffler PNEUTEC KOREA PMF-100 DN250x1,360, 100A 1 set Carbon steel
PO Purge orifice PNEUTEC KOREA PO-50 5t, STS304 1 set

압축공기 및 가스용 제습설비 전문 메이커
Compressed Gas &

Air Drying Systems
www.ptkair.com
Profile of Company
최고의 기술력과 사후관리로

고객만족을 실현하는 기업
산업의 다양화와 전문화에 따라 제조산업에서의 청정 압축공기는 기업의 경쟁력을 좌우할 수 있는 매우 귀중한 동력원이므
로 세심한 공급관리가 요구됩니다. 압축공기를 비롯하여 각종 가스용 제습설비 제조, 유지관리 분야에서 경험한 20여년의
풍부한 기술력과 로하우를 바탕으로 보다 완벽하고 효율적이며 경제적 측면에서 최고의 제품을 공급하기 위해 새롭게 탄생
한 “뉴텍코리아”는 최고의 기술력과 끊임없는 연구개발로 고객만족을 위해 항상 노력과 정열을 다하고 있습니다. 초건조 제
습설비를 다루는 저희 “뉴텍코리아 임직원” 모두는 무엇보다 품질과 사후관리에 대한 고객과의 탄탄한 신뢰로 고객관리의
차별화를 위해 항상 노력하겠습니다
경영방침 Management Policy
상호협력
동반자
PNEUTEC KOREA CUSTOMER
제조 및 영업품목 Production & Business guide

▶
▶▶
흡착식 에어드라이어 (Desiccant air dryers) ▶
▶▶
기타 유량계, 퍼지머플러, 각종 밸브류
▶
▶▶
냉동식 에어드라이어 (Refrigerated air dryers) ▶
▶▶
에너지 진단 및 컨설팅
▶
▶▶
질소발생기 (Nitrogen generator) (Energy saving fault diagnose & Consulting)
▶
▶▶
에어필터 및 엘레멘트 (Air filters & Elements) ▶
▶▶
에어드라이어 개조공사
▶
▶▶
공기저장탱크 (Receiver tank) (Air dryer Remodeling plant)
▶
▶▶
에프터 쿨러 (Air & Water cooler) ▶
▶▶
흡착제 교체공사 (Adsorbent replace)
▶
▶▶
응축수 자동배출장치 (Auto drain trap) ▶
▶▶
압축공기 배관공사 (Air line piping)
압축공기 제습설비의 필요성 및 기본구성 3 고압용 에어필터 (High pressure air filters) HF-Series 12
냉동식 에어드라이어 PD-Series 4 응축수 자동트랩류 (Automatic drain traps) 13
비가열식 흡착식 에어드라이어 (Heatless type) PSD-Series 5 흡착제 / 유량계 / 노점계 (Adsorbent / Air flowmeter / Dewpoint analyzer) 14
유분제거용 비가열 흡착식 에어드라이어 (Oilless master) PMD-Series 6 질소발생기 (Nitrogen generator) PSN/PM-Series 15
히터외장형 흡착식 에어드라이어 (Heater external purge type) PHD-Series 7 수냉식 쿨러 (Water cooled after cooler) PWC-Series 16
히터부로와형 흡착식 에어드라이어 (Heater external blower type) PHB-Series 8 공냉식 쿨러 (Air cooled after cooler) PAC-Series 17
압축기 폐열이용방식 넌퍼지 드라이어 (Heat of compression type) PHCN-Series 9 공기저장탱크 (Receiver tank) PT-Series 18
압축공기용 에어필터 (Compressed & Gas air filters) PSF-Series 10 노점선정 및 포화수증량표 19
2
Table of Contents
고청정 압축공기는 생산성과 품질력 향상을 통한
기업경쟁력 강화는 물론 보다 효율적인
공압설비 유지관리로 원가절감의 혜택을 누릴 수 있습니다.
각종 불순물이 함유된 대기중의 공기를 흡입,압축할 때 압축기 내부와 유입측 공기조건에 따라
다량의 유,수분과 파티클이 생성되며 이러한 유해물질들은 공압설비에 막대한 지장을 초래하여
생산성 악화와 품질력 저하 등 악영향을 주는 바 제조공정과 사용용도에 적합한 제습설비를
반드시 설치하여야 한다.
불순물과 산성슬 배관내 부식 및 공압설비 문제점 유형분석

러지에 의해 부식
된 필터
1. 사용용도에 부적합한 제습설비 적용
불순물과 유분에 의 2. 공기압축기측 다량의 유분 유출에 의한 제습능력 저하
해 손상된 흡착제
3. 정기적 소모품(흡착제,필터류) 교체주기 경과
흡착제 신품 4. 주기적인 점검과 사전유지 관리 미흡
5. 압축공기 수요증가에 따른 압력저하로 인한 제습능력 저하
6. 공기압축기 토출량 대비 제습능력의 부족현상
7. 관리자의 안이한 대처
압축공기 제습설비 용도에 따른 기본구성

의약산업, 산소/질소발생장치, 반도체공정, 초정밀산업, 분체이송, 분체도장, 오존, 화학, 나노, 바이오
계측장비, 정전도장, 정밀라인, 부품건조, 섬유.일반전자산업, 식품공정 등
일반 공압라인, 에어공구, 일반도장, 계장용
MAIN PRE LINE ADSORBER LINE

FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER
COALESCER
FILTER
AIR COMPRESSOR RECEIVER TANK AFTER COOLER REFRIGERATED DESICCANT
AIR DRYER AIR DRYER
PT-Series PAC-Series PD-Series PSF130-Series PSD-Series

PWC-Series PMD-Series
PHD-Series
PSF370-Series PSF320-Series PSF310-Series PSF150-Series PHB-Series
PHCN-Series
3
DESICCANT AIR DRYERS
PSD-Series (Heatless)
구조 및 특징 Structure & Features

+ 충분한 흡착으로 빠른 노점보증
+ 디지털 운전방식으로 전자동 무인운전
+ 신뢰성이 확보된 구동밸브 적용
+ Low pressure drop 방지장치
+ 콤팩트한 구조로 유지보수 용이
+ 노점운전방식(DPOS) 적용시 퍼지에어 절감
Option
+ 순간 압력저하시 일시 정지기능
Design Specifications
▷ Design pressure : 0.97 Mpa
▷ Operating pressure : 0.69 Mpa
▷ Inlet air temperature : 40℃ 기준
▷ Dewpoint : -40℃ at atm (Std.)
-70℃ at atm (Option)
▷ Operating cycle : 10min/cycle
기본사양 Standard specifications
CAPACITY DESICCANT CONNEC DIMENSION (mm) WEIGHT

MODEL
(Nm3/Hr) (2-TOWERS) TION L W H (KGS)
PSD-10 66 22 20A 610 550 1,660 93

PSD-20 132 44 20A 705 550 1,960 145
PSD-30 216 70 25A 830 700 2,050 234
PSD-50 342 110 40A 960 750 2,100 405
PSD-75 690 210 50A 1,200 860 2,300 635
PSD-100 876 280 50A 1,300 860 2,250 785
PSD-150 1,410 440 80A 1,400 1,100 2,300 1,200
PSD-200 1,680 530 80A 1,440 1,100 2,200 1,300
PSD-250 1,920 600 80A 1,490 1,250 2,400 1,500
PSD-300 2,340 720 80A 1,490 1,400 2,440 1,600
PSD-400 3,120 1,000 100A 1,700 1,500 2,600 2,000
PSD-500 4,200 1,300 100A 1,700 1,600 2,700 2,500
PSD-600 5,100 1,600 150A 2,300 1,900 2,700 3,000
PSD-800 6,480 2,000 150A 2,500 1,500 2,850 4,000
NOTE 1) 상기 제품은 당사 개발에 의하여 변경될 수 있습니다.
2) 설계압력 0.97Mpa 이상 제품은 주문에 의해 제작합니다.
5
PMD-Series (3-TOWER OILLESS MASTER)

+ 고청정 압축건조공기 제공
+ 완벽한 유분제거
+ 디지털 운전방식으로 전자동 무인운전
+ 신뢰성이 확보된 구동밸브 적용
+ Low pressure drop 방지장치
+ 콤팩트한 구조로 유지보수 용이
+ 노점운전방식(DPOS) 적용시 퍼지에어 절감
Option
▷ Operating cycle : 10min/cycle
FLOW CAPACITY DESICCANT CONNEC- DIMENSION (mm) WEIGHT

MODEL
(Nm3/Hr) A.A SOMA TION L W H (KGS)
PMD-10 66 22 10 20A 900 550 1,660 130

PMD-20 132 44 20 20A 1,000 550 1,960 203
PMD-30 216 70 30 25A 1,200 700 2,050 330
PMD-50 342 110 43 40A 1,300 750 2,100 560
PMD-75 690 210 70 50A 1,700 860 2,300 880
PMD-100 876 280 90 50A 1,800 860 2,250 1,050
PMD-150 1,410 440 120 80A 2,200 1,100 2,300 1,600
PMD-200 1,680 530 160 80A 2,300 1,100 2,300 1,800
PMD-250 1,920 600 200 80A 2,400 1,250 2,400 2,000
PMD-300 2,340 720 250 80A 2,400 1,400 2,440 2,200
PMD-400 3,120 1,000 320 100A 2,500 1,500 2,600 2,600
PMD-500 4,200 1,300 390 100A 2,500 1,600 2,700 3,200
PMD-600 5,100 1,600 460 150A 3,100 1,900 2,700 3,900
PMD-800 6,480 2,000 600 150A 3,300 1,500 2,850 5,200
6 최고의 기술력과 사후관리로 고객만족을 실한하는 기업 뉴텍코리아(주)

PHD-Series (HEATER EXTERNAL PURGE)

+ 빠르고 안정적인 노점제공
+ 최신 기술의 터치방식 운전모드 적용(Option)
+ 내구성과 안정성 등 신뢰가 확보된 밸브류 적용
+ 전,후단 낮은 차압구조
+ 중앙 집중식 압력게이지 부착
▷ Operating cycle : 8Hrs/cycle (Std.)
FLOW CAPA. DESICCANT E.H CONNEC DIMENSION (mm) WEIGHT

MODEL
(Nm3/Hr) (2-T/KGS) (KW) TION L W H (KGS)
PHD-220 216 84 3.0 25A 1,400 800 1,780 320

PHD-350 354 130 3.0 40A 1,500 900 1,900 450
PHD-600 600 220 5.0 50A 1,550 1,000 2,180 700
PHD-700 700 300 6.0 50A 1,600 1,000 2,200 800
PHD-870 864 330 7.5 50A 1,600 1,030 2,170 900
PHD-1300 1,302 460 10.5 65A 1,900 1,100 2,450 1,200
PHD-1600 1,590 562 11.5 80A 2,100 1,200 2,400 1,400
PHD-1900 1,900 680 13.5 80A 2,200 1,200 2,500 1,600
PHD-2300 2,280 800 15.0 80A 2,200 1,300 2,550 1,850
PHD-2700 2,730 960 22.0 100A 2,300 1,400 2,700 2,200
PHD-3100 3,120 1,100 25.0 100A 2,500 1,600 2,650 2,400
PHD-3700 3,660 1,300 28.0 100A 2,500 1,600 2,700 2,650
PHD-4400 4,440 1,600 35.0 125A 2,600 1,700 2,700 3,050
PHD-5400 5,400 1,900 40.0 150A 3,200 1,800 2,700 5,000
PHD-6000 6,000 2,120 45.0 150A 3,300 1,800 2,700 5,300
PHD-6800 6,800 2,400 50.0 150A 3,500 2,000 2,800 5,600
PHD-7700 7,680 2,700 60.0 150A 3,600 2,000 2,800 6,100
PHD-8400 8,400 3,000 66.0 150A 3,700 2,000 2,850 6,500
PHD-9000 9,000 3,200 70.0 150A 3,800 2,100 2,900 7,400
PHD-10000 10,200 3,600 80.0 200A 4,000 2,200 3,000 8,000
PHD-12000 12,000 4,200 90.0 200A 4,200 2,400 3,300 9,000
PHD-15000 15,000 5,300 110.0 250A 4,600 2,700 3,550 12,600

7
PHB-Series (HEATER EXTERNAL BLOWER)

+ 히팅재생시 외기공기 사용으로 퍼지에어 절감
+ 최신 기술의 터치방식 운전모드 적용(Option)
+ 재생공기 소모량 최소화 설계
(Option) + 노점운전방식(DPOS)
+ 출구측 압력,온도 트랜드
+ 출구측 노점온도 트랜드
CAPACITY DESICCANT E.H BLO.R CONNEC DIMENSION (mm) WEIGHT

MODEL
(Nm3/Hr) (KGS) (KW) (Hp) TION L W H (KGS)
PHB-300 300 140 5 2 40A 1,800 1,200 2,200 500

PHB-400 400 190 6 2 50A 2,000 1,250 2,150 650
PHB-600 600 280 9 3 50A 2,200 1,300 2,400 850
PHB-900 900 420 15 3 50A 2,700 1,400 2,250 1,100
PHB-1000 1,000 480 15 5 65A 2,700 1,400 2,400 1,350
PHB-1300 1,300 610 20 5 65A 3,000 1,450 2,450 1,550
PHB-1600 1,600 740 24 7.5 80A 3,300 1,500 2,500 1,800
PHB-1900 1,900 900 30 7.5 80A 3,500 1,600 2,330 2,100
PHB-2300 2,300 1,100 38 7.5 80A 3,550 1,700 2,330 2,500
PHB-3100 3,100 1,440 46 10 100A 3,750 1,900 2,530 3,300
PHB-3600 3,600 1,700 54 10 100A 3,850 2,000 2,530 3,800
PHB-4500 4,500 2,100 66 15 125A 3,900 2,200 2,980 4,500
PHB-6000 6,000 2,800 90 15 150A 4,200 2,300 3,000 5,500
PHB-8000 8,000 3,720 120 20 200A 4,500 2,500 3,100 7,000
PHB-9000 9,000 4,200 130 20 200A 4,500 2,500 3,100 7,500
P HB-10000 10,000 4,600 150 30 200A 6,000 2,500 3,050 11,000
PHB-12000 12,000 5,600 180 30 200A 6,000 2,500 3,050 12,000
PHB-15000 15,000 7,000 220 40 250A 6,000 3,200 3,600 14,000

PHCN-Series (HEAT OF COMPRESSION)

ENERGY
SAVING
+ 터보 및 무급유식 압축열을 재생원으로 사용 80%
+ 저온재생용 흡착제 충진
+ CLOSE LOOP TYPE 운전사이클
+ 최신 터치스크린 판넬 적용(Option)
(Option) + 노점운전방식(DPOS)
+ 출구측 압력,온도 트랜드
+ 출구측 노점온도 트랜드
▷ Inlet wet air temperature : 40℃ 기준
▷ Inlet hot air temperature : 100℃ 기준
FLOW CAPACITY DESICCANT DIMENSION (mm) WEIGHT

MODEL CONNECTION
(Nm3/Hr) (KGS) L W H (KGS)
PHCN-2000 2,000 980 80A 2,500 1,800 2,500 2,600

PHCN-3000 3,000 1,460 100A 2,800 2,000 2,800 3,200
PHCN-4000 4,000 1,940 125A 3,300 2,400 2,900 4,300
PHCN-5000 5,000 2,420 125A 3,600 2,700 2,900 5,300
PHCN-6000 6,000 2,900 150A 4,100 3,000 3,000 6,400
PHCN-7000 7,000 3,400 150A 4,200 3,000 3,100 7,900
PHCN-8000 8,000 3,880 200A 4,700 3,400 3,200 8,900
PHCN-9000 9,000 4,360 200A 4,900 3,500 3,300 10,600
PHCN-10000 10,000 4,840 200A 5,200 3,600 3,500 12,000
PHCN-11000 11,000 5,320 200A 5,200 3,700 3,500 13,200
PHCN-12000 12,000 5,800 200A 5,300 3,800 3,500 14,500
PHCN-13000 13,000 6,300 250A 5,600 3,900 3,500 15,300
PHCN-14000 14,000 6,800 250A 5,800 4,050 3,600 16,900
PHCN-15000 15,000 7,300 250A 6,000 4,200 3,600 18,000
PHCN-16000 16,000 7,800 250A 6,200 4,300 3,600 19,200
PHCN-17000 17,000 8,300 300A 6,400 4,400 3,650 20,600
PHCN-18000 18,000 8,800 300A 6,600 4,500 3,650 22,000

9
COMPRESSED AIR FILTERS
PSF-Series
에어필터의 필요성 Necessity

대기중의 일반공기를 공기압축기를 통해 압축되는 과정에서 다량의 이물질이 생성되는데 그
중 파티클과 유,수분은 제습설비의 효율저하는 물론 내구성을 악화시키며 배관내 차압을 발
생시켜 손실을 초래하고 원가상승의 원인이 됩니다.
PSF-Series 에어필터는 다양한 불순물과 유,수분 제거에 가장 효율적으로 적용하도록 설

계되어 있으며 유지보수가 용이하고 내구성이 강한 재질로 구성되어 있다.
AIR FILTER를 잘 유지관리함에 따라

+ 냉동식 AIR DRYER의 열교환기 보호와 제습효율 도모
+ 흡착식 AIR DRYER의 흡착제 흡착기공 보호와 수명연장
+ 배관내 부식 및 차압발생 억제
+ 보다 깨끗한 청정에어 제공
+ 생산성 및 품질력 향상에 기초적인 역할을 하게 됩니다.
엘레멘트 종류별 구조 및 특성
구조 및 형상 여과도 적용위치 재질 교환주기
MODEL
(Structure) (Filteration) (Application) (Material) (Life time)
+After cooler전단측
MAIN FILTER P.E
40micron +공장배관의 Main line측
(PSF-370) Sintering
+수분이 다량 함유된 배관측
△ P : 0.3bar
이상 또는
+냉동식 Air dryer 전단측 6,000Hr
PRE FILTER +미립필터(PSF-310/130/150) P.E
5 micron 전단측 설치하여 수명연장
(PSF-320) Sintering
및 효율증대
+흡착식 Air dryer 전단측
+흡착식 Air dryer 전,후단측

LINE FILTER (흡착제 분말 포집) Hepa media
1 micron
(PSF-310) +미립필터(PSF-130/150)전단측 Polyester
설치하여 수명연장과 효율증대
+불순물과 수분이 제거된 Line에

설치하여 초미립 불순물 제거 Micro media
COALESCER FILTER △P : 0.3bar
0.01 micron +미량의 유분제거용 Polyester 이상 또는
(PSF-130)
+흡착식 Air dryer 후단측에 Urethane Form 4,000Hr
설치하여 흡착제 분말 포집
Micro media
ADSORBER FILTER +호흡용 압축공기 라인측 Carbon media
0.01 ppm +냄새 제거용
(PSF-150) Polyester
+미립 유분제거용
Urethane Form

외형도 Outside DWG
MODEL 15A 20A.25A.40A 50A 65A.80A.100A 125A-300A

MATERIAL ZN AL AL/C.S C.S C.S
Outside DWG.
모델별 제품사양 Standard specifications

Design pressure & temp. : 9.7 Mpa, 60℃ / ( )안의 숫자는 엘레멘트 조립수량임.
FLOW CAPACITY (Nm3/min)
MAIN FILTER PRE FILTER LINE FILTER COALESCER FILTER ADSORBER FILTER
SIZE
40 ELEMENT 5 ELEMENT 1 ELEMENT 0.01 ELEMENT 0.01 ELEMENT
micron MODEL micron MODEL micron MODEL micron MODEL ppm MODEL
15A 2.2 MP-15 1.8 PP-15 1.2 LP-15 1.0 CP-15 1.0 AP-15
20A 5.7 MP-20 3.5 PP-20 2.8 LP-20 1.9 CP-20 1.9 AP-20
25A 8.0 MP-25 5.7 PP-25 5.6 LP-25 3.4 CP-25 3.4 AP-25
40A 14.0 MP-40 12.0 PP-40 11.0 LP-40 10.0 CP-40 10.0 AP-40
50A 26.0 MP-50 24.0 PP-50 22.0 LP-50 14.0 CP-50 14.0 AP-50
65A 58.0 MP-50(2) 49.0 PP-50(2) 48.0 LP-50(2) 28.0 CP-50(2) 28.0 AP-50(2)
80A 88.0 MP-50(3) 73.0 PP-50(3) 72.0 LP-50(3) 42.0 CP-50(3) 42.0 AP-50(3)
100A 139.0 MP-50(5) 120.0 PP-50(5) 110.0 LP-50(5) 70.0 CP-50(5) 70.0 AP-50(5)
125A 162.0 MP-50(6) 145.0 PP-50(6) 132.0 LP-50(6) 84.0 CP-50(6) 84.0 AP-50(6)
150A 282.0 MP-50(8) 221.0 PP-50(8) 176.0 LP-50(8) 112.0 CP-50(8) 112.0 AP-50(8)
200A 447.0 MP-50(11) 331.0 PP-50(11) 308.0 LP-50(14) 196.0 CP-50(14) 196.0 AP-50(14)
250A 733.0 MP-50(19) 555.0 PP-50(19) 528.0 LP-50(24) 330.0 CP-50(24) 330.0 AP-50(24)
300A 1,103 MP-50(30) 850.0 PP-50(30) 792.0 LP-50(36) 504.0 CP-50(36) 504.0 AP-50(36)
외형치수 Dimension
D SIZE DIMENSION (D×H) WEIGHT (KGS) SIZE DIMENSION (D×H) WEIGHT (KGS)
15A 85×275 2.0 100A 600×1,200 140
20A 100×400 4.0 125A 600×1,200 160
25A 100×550 6.0 150A 650×1,850 200
H
40A 170×780 14 200A 1,000×2,350 420
50A 175×1,130 25 250A 1,000×2,550 480
65A 500×1,000 70 300A 1,100×2,750 600
80A 500×1,000 74 *보다 Detail한 사양은 도면 참조하시기 바랍니다
11
CORPORATION FOR ENERGY SAVING
POWER DRAIN TRAP
MODEL
WRDT-1000
WRDT-2000
1. POWER DRIAN SOLVES PROBLEMS
2. PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY HOW IT WORKS
3. DRAIN TRAP INSTALLATION
4. DIMENSION & SPECIFICATION
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
WOORI TECHNOLOGY
GONGGUSANGGA 18-106-306, JUNGWANG DONG
SHIHUNG CITY KUNGKI-DO KOREA
TEL : 82-31-430-2917
FAX : 82-31-430-2918
E-mail : [email protected]
Homepage : Www.iwooritech.co.kr
POWER DRIAN SOLVES PROBLEMS
■ CLOGGED DRAINS
Other drain devices with small orifices and poppet style valves are prone to clog
when solid debris is present. Each Power drain has a large, smooth liquid flow
path and discharge port as well as a heavy duty shear action ball valve disigned
to alleviate this problem.
■ ELECTRICITY
Timer valves require electricity and the cost of installing and maintaining these
electric system as well as the cost of electricity for their ongoing operation year
after year. Power drain requires no electricity to operate since it is totally pneumatic
and can be easily installed at any point along the compressed air system providing
low cost installation and ongoing operation.
■ RELIABILITY
Power drain's cycling is controlled by a patented magnetic interaction with a totally
pneumatic control circuit. While other pneumatic drains have a complex lever action
"toilet bowl" type internal float with many parts, there are few moving parts in the
Power drain. Since the Power is totally pneumatic, it is not affected by power
outages or the other vulnerabilities of electrical devices such as timer solenoid
valves, motorized ball valves or electrically operated float traps.
■ BYPASSED DRAINS
Smaller drains become plugged so often that cleaning them out becomes a very
labor intensive operation. To avoid constant cleaning, there is a temptation to
bypass the inadequate drain and crack open a manual bypass valve causing it to
drain constantly thus causing a constant flow of wasted compressed air.
Power drain anti-clog design eliminates the temptation to bypass the drain.
■ SYSTEM BLOW DOWN
Manually operated drains, timers solenoid valves, motorized ball valves or electri-
cally operated float traps blow away large quantities of expensive compressed air.
Manually operated drains waste considerable compressed air because most opera-
tors feel it is necessary to have the drain open an extended period of time in order
to get all the water out. Timer valves are almost always set to be open longer than
necessary in order to get all of the liquid out and this too passes large quantities
of compressed air down the drain. Power drain avoids this waste of compressed
air and the resulting pressure drop in the compressed air system by maintaining a
liquid seal in the bottom of the Power drain's reservoir between each cycle.
■ OVER-DRAINING
Manual drain valve operation and timer valves are usually set for overkill in frequ-
ency and duration of drainage times in order to be certain that no liquid accumul-
ates in the system. This results in waste of expensive compressed air.
Power drain is demand activated and drains only when the liquid reaches the pre-
determined trigger point. The Power drain does not over-drain or blow down the
system.
■ UNDER-DRIANING
Timer drains must be preset to establish the frequency and duration of drainage.
The settings are vastly different in periods of high humidity from what they would
be in periods of low humidity. It is common for this adjustment to be over-looked
in the transition from winter to summer. Therefore, the settings are inadequate to
handle the high summer quantities of liquid which results in excess liquid accumu-
lation in the compressed air system. This liquid often backs up and can cause
expensive damage to dryers, compressors and hand tools. The Power drain is
designed to cycle as needed when liquid accumulates and requires no adjustments
from season to season.
■ LIQUID REMOVAL
The air pressure in the system being drained forces the liquid out of the Power
drain reservoir. Because the power of the air system is behind it, the discharge
can be directed upward, to a containment vessel, oil-water separator or overhead
discharge piping system.
PRODUCT TECHNOLOGY HOW IT WORKS
The float(1) with integral magnet(2) is sitting on the base and is at the lowest level. The intgral float
magnetic force repelling the inner magnet(3) upward, holding it seated against on orifice in the lower
end of the valve stem(4). This retains the control air doming in through the control air filter(5) in the
center tube(6). The control air circuit including the inner magnet and valve stem air isolated from the
liquid held in the reservoir(7). The air cylinder(8) is in the home position and the discharge ball valve
(9) is closed.
There is always a residual amount of liquid left in the bottom of the reservoir after each discharge
cycle. The Power drain stops discharging before all accumulated liquid is removed providing a liquid
seal that conserves expensive compressed air. Liquid flows through the inlet port and into the reser-
voir to start the fill cycle. Liquid continues to fill the reservoir until the float has displaced enough
liquid to become buoyant and the float pops upward to the upper position shown in Figure2.
The liquid flows in and raises the float to it's highest position as shown. The integral float magnet is
raised up past the inner magnet and repels the inner magnet dowmward opening the orifice in the
valve stem. This allows the control air held in the center tube to flow through the control air circuit
to the actuating cylinder. The actuating cylinder extends and opens the ball valve starting the dis-
charge of accumulated liquid.
When the correct amount of liquid has been discharged, leaving a liquid seal in the reservoir, the
float has been lowered to a point where the integral float magnet is below the inner magnet. In this
position, the integral float magnet repels the inner magnet back upward against the valve stem orifice
which seals off the control air flow to the actuating cylinder. The cylinder has a spring which then
returns the cylinder to it's home position, closing the discharge ball valve.
The discharge is stopped as shown in Figure1 and the fill cycle repeats.
The balance line port is a hole through the head of the Power drain that goes into the reservoir.
This port allows the air trapped in the top of the reservoir to move out of the reservoir to allow liquid
to enter the reservoir through the inlet port. If there were no balance line port, as liquid entered the
reservoir under pressure, the air trapped in the top of the reservoir would be compressed until it was
the same pressure as the liquid coming in and the unit would stop filling.
There are three methods of connecting to the balance line port. The most effective is to connect it
back to the vessel being drained as shown in the illustrations above. In this configuration, the rese-
rvoir is at the same pressure as the vessel being drained and the liquid is filling by gravity.
In this case, the top of the Power drain must be lower than the bottom of the vessel being drained.
The balance line can also be attached to a header pipe leaving the vessel being drained or vented
to atmosphere using a needle valve. Venting to atmosphere uses very little air if the needle valve is
adjusted properly.
DRAIN TRAP INSTALLATION
1. Close control air line and balance line needle

WRDT-SERIES INSTALLATION valves as well as inlet isolation shut off valve
2. Bring up system pressure (clean air)
3. Fully open control air needle valve. Push manual
test botton on top of the power drain to verift
air cylinderstrokes properly opening the discharge
ball valve.
4. Application where the balance line is connected
back to vessel being drained.--> Full open.
5. Applications where the balance line needle valve
is vented to atmosphere or connected to a
header pipeleaving the vessel being drained
->Open the balance line needle valve only enough
to ensure a small amount of air can flow through it.
WRDT-1000 DEMENSION WRDT-1000 SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
MAX .TEMP 75 ℃
MIN. TEMP 2 ℃
MAX PRESSURE 9.9 kgf/㎠
MIN PRESSURE 2.5 kgf/㎠
CAPACITY/cycle 0.15 Liter
MAX CAPACITY 180 Liter/hr
WRDT-2000 SPECIFICATION
WRDT-2000 DEMNSION
SPECIFICATIONS
MAX .TEMP 75 ℃
MIN. TEMP 2 ℃
MAX PRESSURE 9.9 kgf/㎠
MIN PRESSURE 2.8 kgf/㎠
CAPACITY/cycle 0.8 Liter
MAX. CAPACITY 660 Liter/hr
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fault condition and cause Solution
1. Water does not enter drain trap.
1) Balance line isolation shutoff valve is closed. Adjust balance line needle v/v per installaion instrucions.
2) Liquid inlet valve is closed. Fully open liquid inlet shut off valve.
3) Drain piping line is plugged. Clear obstrucion.
4) Location of balance line connection causes
Refer to installaion instrucions for suitable balance line
higher balance line pressure than liquid inlet
installaion.
pressure.
2. Drain trap fills and will not drain.
1) Control air line valve is closed. Open control air valve to full open.
Provide more than the minimum required pressure to

2) Control air pressure is lower.
control air line connection per the product specification.
3) Filter emement clogged or dirty. Replace part.

4) Hole in valve stem clogged. Clear obstrucion. Do not alter hole diameter.
5) Drain trap outlet valve is frozen. Confirm operating temperature.

6) Discharge valve and cylinder hitch were
Remount keeping horizontality.
wrenched.
3. Discharge ball valve stays open.
1) Inner magnet installed upside down, I.e., Reinstall inner magnet rotating it 180 degree, end for
north and south poles reversed. ene.
2) Bleed for air cylinder clogged. Clear obstrucion. Do not alter hole diameter.
Clean center tube and inner magnet and reassemble.
3) Inner magnet stuck or not properly sealing
Also if possible, connent the control air line to a clean
against valve stem.
dry air.
Clean center tube and inner magnet and reassemble.
4) Water was flowed in control air line. Also if possible, connent the control air line to a clean
dry air.
4. Excessive bubbling action in drain trap.
1) Air leak in balance line and/or fittings. Repair finding leaked part.
Refer to installaion instrucions for suitable balance line
2) Balance line needle valve opened too far.
installaion.
◆ I will find solution immediately about problem of other some contents.


 
π
PD01 - 01
GENERAL SERVICE PRESSURE GAUGE
MODEL : P110 SERIES
SERVICE INTENDED
P110 Series, General Service Pressure gauge,
Feature low Cost and high quality and is suitable for non-corrosive fluid
Air, Oil, Gas or Water service are the most common applications.
NOMINAL DIAMETER
40, 50, 60, 75, 100, 150, and 200mm
ACCURACY
40mm : ±3.0% of Full Scale
50, 60, 75, 100, 150, and 200mm : ±1.5% of Full Scale
SCALE RANGE
40mm : 0~2 to 0~35kgf/cm2
50mm : 0~2 to 0~100kgf/cm2
65, 75mm : -76cmHg ~ 0 to 0 ~ 250kgf/cm2
100mm(New) : -76cmHg ~ 0 to 0 ~ 350kgf/cm2
100mm, 150mm : -76cmHg ~ 0 to 0 ~ 1000kgf/cm2
200mm : -76cmHg ~ 0 to 0 ~ 350kgf/cm2
WORKING TEMPERATURE
Ambient : -20 ~ 65˚C
Fluid : -5 ~ 40˚C
Standard Features
PRESSURE CONNECTION MOVEMENT
Brass Brass
ELEMENT COVER
40, 50mm : Brass Black Finished Steel
60, 75, 100mm(New) : ≤100kgf/cm2 : Brass
>100kgf/cm2 : 316SS
100, 150, 200mm : ≤35kgf/cm2 : Brass
>35kgf/cm2 : 316SS
DIAL
C Type Bourdon Tube or Helical Tube White Aluminium with
Black Graduations
CASE POINTER
Black Finished Steel Aluminium alloy, Black painted
Black Finished Aluminium(Diameter 200mm)
PROCESS CONNECTION
WINDOW 40mm : 1/8” PT, NPT &PF
50mm : 1/4”, 1/8” PT, NPT &PF
Glass
60mm : 1/4” PT, NPT &PF
75, 100mm(New) : 3/8” PT, NPT &PF
100, 150 and 200mm : 1/2”, 3/8” PT, NPT & PF
PD01 - 01
ORDERING INFORMATION
BASE MODEL
P110 : GENERAL SERVICE PRESSURE GAUGE
NOMINAL DIAMETER
0 : 40mm
1 : 50mm
2 : 60mm
3 : 75mm
4 : 100mm
6 : 150mm
7 : 200mm
MOUNTING TYPE (Refer to Mounting type & Dimension)

A: Bottom Connection, Direct, Not available with Diameter 200mm
B: Bottom Connection, Surface, Case Mounting Plate, Not available with Diameter 40mm
F: Centre Back Connection, Direct, Not available with Diameter 100mm and 150mm and 200mm
G: Lower Back Connection, Direct, Only available with Diameter 100mm and 150mm
J : Centre Back Connection, Flush, Cover Mounting Plate, Not available with Diameter 40mm, 100mm, 150mm
and 200mm
N : Lower Back Connection, Cover Mounting Plate, Only available with Diameter 100mm and 150mm
ACCURACY
4 : ±1.5% of Full Scale. Not available with diameter 40mm
6 : ±3.0% of Full Scale
PROCESS CONNECTION
B: 1/8”, Only available with diameter 40,50mm
C: 1/4”, Only available with diameter 50,60mm
D: 3/8”, Not available with diameter 40,50,60mm
E: 1/2”, Only available with diameter 100,150,200mm
CONNECTION TYPE
B: PF
C: PT
D: NPT
Z: Other (See Note 1)
UNIT
B : kgf/cm2(Pressure) or cmHg + kgf/cm2(Compound)
C : cmHg, Only available with vacuum gauge
Z : Other
RANGE
Refer to Pressure Range Table
DIAL COLOR
1 : 2 Colors
5 : 3 Colors, Available with
Compound & Vacuum Gauges
OPTIONS
0 : None
1 : Accessories
P110 0 A 6 B C B 041 1 0 SAMPLE MODEL NUMMBER

Note 1, Special connection type is available such as BSP & BSPT
PD01 - 01
P110 : TYPE OF MOUNTING
PD01 - 01
PRESSURE RANGE TABLE

100mm ORDER
SCALE (kgf/cm2) 40mm 50mm 60mm 75mm 100mm 150mm 200mm
(NEW) CODE
VACUUM × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 026
-76cmHg~0
GAUGE
0~0.5 × × × × ○ ○ ○ × 040
0~1 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 041
0~2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 042
0~3 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 043
0~4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 044
0~6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 045
0~10 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 047
0~15 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 050
0~20 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 051
PRESSURE 0~25 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 052
GAUGE 0~35 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 054
0~50 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 055
0~70 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 057
0~100 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 058
0~150 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 059
0~250 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 062
0~350 × × × × ○ ○ ○ ○ 064
0~500 × × × × × ○ ○ × 066
0~700 × × × × × ○ ○ × 068
0~1000 × × × × × ○ ○ × 070
-76cmHg~1 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × 027
-76cmHg~2 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × 028
-76cmHg~3 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × 029
COMPOUN -76cmHg~4 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × 030
D -76cmHg~6 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × 031
-76cmHg~10 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × 032
-76cmHg~15 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × 033
-76cmHg~20 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × 034
○ : AVAILABLE × : NOT AVAILABLE

METALLIC PROTECTION TUBE THERMOCOUPLE
R111 : SINGLE ELEMENT
R112 : DOUBLE ELEMENT
ORDERING INFORMATION
BASE MODEL - 1st thru 4th characters
R111 : SINGLE ELEMENT
R112 : DOUBLE ELEMENT
5th Character 10th Character
CODE HEAD TYPE CODE CONDUIT CONNECTION

A General
1 1/2”PF(Only available for single element)
F Explosion Proof
2 1/2”PT(Only available for single element)
L DIN(43729B) 3 1/2”NPT(Only available for single element)
*4 3/4”PF(Only available for double element)
6th Character
*5 3/4”PT(Only available for double element)
CODE ELEMENT TYPE *6
RD01 - 01
3/4”NPT(Only available for double element)
K K
J J * DIN(43729B) Head Type is not
T T available for 3/4”Connection
E E
Z Other
11th Character
7th Character
CODE PROTECTION TUBE MATERIAL CODE MOUNTING TYPE

X Refer to Mounting Type Table
0 304SS
1 316SS
2 INCONEL 600
3 310SS
4 446SS 12th Character
5 347SS CODE CONNECTION TYPE
6 321SS
XX Refer to Connection Type Table
9 Other
8th and 9th Characters
CODE PROTECTION TUBE & 14th Character

ELEMENT OUTDIA METER
F0 6.4 & 0.65mm CODE INSERT LENGTH
F1 6.4 & 1.0mm X Refer to Insert Length Table
G1 8.0 & 1.0mm
J1 10.0 & 1.0mm
J2 10.0 & 1.6mm
K1 12.0 & 1.0mm
K2 12.0 & 1.6mm 15th Character
M1 15.0 & 1.0mm
M2 15.0 & 1.6mm CODE OPTIONS
M3 15.0 & 2.3mm 0 None
P2 17.3 & 1.6mm 1 Accessories
P3 17.3 & 2.3mm
P4 17.3 & 3.2mm
Q3 21.7 & 2.3mm R111FK0G12REBE0
Q4 21.7 & 3.2mm SAMPLE ORDERING NUMBER
Model：P115, P116, P117, P118, P119
General Purpose Pressure Transmitter
Advantages General
General
General
General
General
General
General Description
Description
Description
Description
Description
Description
GeneralDescription
General Description
Description
General
General Description
Description
General purpose transmitter for industrial
applications
Extremely corrosion resistant
Measuring ranges from 0.5 to
500kgf/cm2
Rugged piezoresistive ceramic
measuring cell
Shock and vibration resistant
Zero and span adjustments
Compact design
Optimal accuracy
Applications
The transmitters can be used for a wide
range of applications in process control,
automatic machinery and hydraulic or
pneumatic system design.
Standard hydraulic and pneumatic
equipments
Process control
Machine tools and automatic machinery
Monitoring systems
Servo valves and drives
Chemical and petrochemical industry
Air and gas compressors
Loading and brake systems
P110 series pressure transmitter has been designed as

an advanced device for measuring pressure of gases
and liquids in industrial applications. It is extremely
versatile and suitable for measuring static pressure. The
built-in ceramic measuring cell is highly corrosion
resistant, stable and has an excellent price / performance
ratio. Thanks to their high natural frequency and the
rugged construction, the P110 transmitter withstands
high shock and vibration. The transmitters are available
as absolute and relative pressure types with either 2-wire
current or 3-wire voltage output. The pressure to be
measured acts without transmitting liquid fill on a stable,
corrosion resistant ceramic measuring cell. Piezoresistive
resistors are attached to the cell and connected in a
Wheatstone bridge configuration. The output signal of
this bridge is converted into a standardized current or
voltage output signal.
www.wisesensor.com
Technical Data
Input
Technology Piezoresistive ceramic pressure sensor
Pressure ranges 0~0.5 to 0~500kgf/cm2 absolute or gauge pressure
Pressure reference Gauge, absolute, vacuum and compound
Overload 1.5×full scale without damage
Output
Current output Voltage output
Electrical connection type 2-wire technique 3 or 4-wire technique
Full scale output signal 20mA ±0.5% 5V ±0.5%
Zero measured output 4mA ±0.05% 1V ±0.05%
Other signals available on request
Electrical Specifications
Excitation voltage 12~36V DC
Load resistance max@24V 500Ω at 24V
Influence of excitation 0.01% FSO/V
Power ripple ≤500mV P-P
Reverse polarity Protected
Shock resistance ≤20g
Response time 1.5ms
Adjustment ±10% FSO/zero and span
Performance Specifications
Accuracy ≤±0.5% FSO
Linearity, Hysteresis & Repeatability ±0.2...0.4% FSO typical
Stability °C
±0.3% FSO/a @25°
Cutoff frequency(-3 d B) ≤2kHz
Reference temperature °C
25°
Operating temperature range °C
-40~125°
Compensated temperature range °C
0~70°
Thermal sensitivity shift ≤±0.015%/°°C typical
Thermal zero shift ≤±0.02% FSO/° °C typical
Physical Specifications
Process connection PT1/4″″, PT3/8″
″, PT1/2″″male thread
PF1/4″″, PF3/8″
″, PF1/2″″male thread
Female thread & other connections available on request
Process media Gases and liquids compatible with ceramic Al2 O3, 96%
Materials wetted by process Diaphragm : Ceramic Al2 O3, 96%
Housing : Stainless steel 316
Gasket O-ring : Viton (HNBR, CSM, etc.)
Enclosure rating IP65
Explosion protection Ex d IIC T6(P119)
Influence of mounting position Not critical
Weight Approx.(270g)
Options Sealed diaphragm with thread connection
Sealed diaphragm with flange mounting
Siphon tube
Sealed diaphragm with capillary
Note : ① Cable version : 1.5m standard length, 4-wire, shielded with integral vent tube
② Vented gauge units must breathe dry, non - corrosive gases.
③ Connector version is vented through the removed pin, cable versions are vented through a vent tube inside
the cable sleeve
System connection for 2-wire transmitter System connection for 3-wire transmitter
Dimension(mm) Electrical connection

E : Excitation
S : Signal
MIL connector C : Common
System
Color
2-wire 3-wire 4-wire
Red E+ E+ E+
Black E- C- E-
Green S+ S+
White S-
Shielded Shielded Shielded
DIN connector
System
Color
1 E+ E+ E+
2 E- C- E-
3 S+ S+
Shielded Shielded S-
Integrated cable
System
Color
Red E+ E+ E+
Black E- C- E-
Green S+ S+
White S-
Shielded Shielded Shielded
Terminal head
Excitation + Excitation -
24V 24V
Ordering Information
P115 MIL Connector

P116 DIN Connector
P117 Integrated cable(1.5m)
P118 Terminal head
P119 Terminal head with Ex-protection(option)
R Relative pressure
A Absolute pressure
M Male thread
F Female thread
T PT thread as standard
N NPT thread
F PF thread
X Other process connections available on request
1 1/4″
2 3/8″
3 1/2″
X Other units available on request
S Accuracy ±0.5% FSO
01 Measuring range 0~0.5 kgf/cm2
02 0~1
03 0~2
04 0~5
05 0~10
06 0~20
07 0~35
08 0~50
09 0~100
10 0~200
11 0~350
12 0~500
XX Other calibration ranges available on request
K Calibration in kgf/cm2
A Calibration in MPa
B Calibration in bar
P Calibration in psi
X Other units available on request
C 4~20mA Current output signal
V 1~5V Voltage output signal
X Other signals available on request
N None options
T Sealed diaphragm with thread
F Sealed diaphragm with flange mounting
C Sealed diaphragm with capillary
S Siphon tube
X Other accessories available on request
P115 R M T 2 S 01 K C N Sample ordering code
Specifications subject to change without notice
WISE SENSOR INC.

#199 Sanggal - Ri, Kiheung - Eup, Yongin - City, Kyunggi - Do, Korea
(TEL) +82-31-287-3337, (FAX) +82-31-287-3339, E-mail : [email protected], http : // www.wisesensor.com
WISE CONTROL INC.
110 Plant Avenue Wayne, PA 19087 USA
(TEL) 610-989-9190, (FAX) 610-989-9121, E-mail : scott.bell@wisecontrolinc. com, http : // www. wisecontrolinc. com
FRL Modular Combination / AU320, AU321, AU420, AU421 Series
ORDER KEY
Specifications
option
76
FRL Modular Combination / AU320, AU321, AU420, AU421 Series
Dimensions (Unit : mm)
77
8㜷㘃#㙗⫇ᭊ#㐋⫐#ⓟ᭓ᓃ⪿ᠧ#ᾃ⅗
PHS530#⟆ẖ⹲
ⓗ㡏㘃#⡻2ⴌ⭜#ύ။㥠
825#Zd|
PHS530S ☼ᅋ#ⓟ᭓ᓃ⪿ᠧ
825#Zd|
PHS530D ᚟⅟#ⓟ᭓ᓃ⪿ᠧ
826#Zd|
PHS530C ⱜཏ#⅟ᬸ㥠
826#Zd|
PHS530E ⱜཏ#ύᅻ㥠
826#Zd|
PHS530P ⱜཏ#၀ᅔ㥠
⏷⣜
ถ Ḯ ᎒## ➮ SKV863V SKV863G SKV863F SKV863H SKV863S
⅖# # ❓# # ⟊# # ⵞ ᯞຳ⟊# ♺♞# ◿⸿ඟ໚+ຳ⟊# ಪፏ,
⢻ ∷ ถ ൧ Uf+SW, 乓
⟊ 㝒 ᎒ ᬞ ⢫ pp5+Fy, 63+419,
⅖❓⛒ᑮᴾ➮ 䮎 893
⅖❓◿ᣏᴾ➮ PSd+edu, 314831<+418<13, 31431<+413<13, 31531<+513<13,
⸆Ꭺ⅖❓Ỳᑮ f|foh2v ; 6
⟻ ᎟ ⎆ ಮ pv 58#⠞㘂 68# ⠞㘂
㎶ ⠦ ᢩ ᳚ ໚ ೆᵮ# ᳚໚
⋂ ᒃ ⤚ ⠻ 㔢⌖#ᴮ㍦+㔆⦪,/# ᢲᴮ+⛟∂,
ᅞ⹓൓2ᅞ⩮ᒃ p2v5 63J8J+;16533K},
⭏ᅻ#⏷⣜
⢿# ൓# ⢮# ◿# ## Y GF57Y/# DF443Y/# DF553Y+8393K},
㙲❓⢮◿ಿ㘂 ( ⢿൓⢮◿⠂# 䮃43(
∶Ữ⢮ᣏGF Z/# YD GF57Y+516Z,/# DF443Y+7YD,/# DF553Y+618YD,
⢲ ⚚ ⤯ ᵮ I⤯
᳚ ⇊ ᳓ ⎇ ᩖᖆ⇊ /# ᗂ#⾒ᇏ㇚
㔆 ⎆ ᡒ 㖮 OHG
PHS530#☧᳷ⳓ
ⱇẃ㥠☨
PHS530 S 10 110V DL L
僟僠僡僢僣僤僥
41#☧᳷ⳓ#᷐ 61#⦀⒣#⏷⣜
8㒖㍢#∾ᢲሢ⠞ᖆ#᳢Ặ ᯞ໚㛢 ᅞḪ#㎶⠦ᢩ+㔆⦪,
51#ᾃ⅗#㥠☨ [ ✢Ḫ#㎶⠦ᢩ
᳢Ặ໚ፏ 71#⭜ⓘ#Ⴗဈ
⎛ສ#∾ᢲሢ⠞ᖆ 43 SW# 乓
DE
V
81#⏷⧴#⭏⢠
U4 S U5
᏾Ế#∾ᢲሢ⠞ᖆ
DE
G
U 4 S U5
⦻ಮ#Ếᢗ㚿
91#ύ⑫#ὴ☨
D E
F ᯞ໚㛢 ᩖᖆ⇊
U4 S U5 G ᗂ#⾒ᇏ㇚
⦻ಮ#᳚໚㚿 ᗂ#⾒ᇏ㇚#.
GO
㔆⎆#ᡒ㖮
D E
H
:1#╣ᜤ#⮻⫝̸
U 4 S U5
ᯞ໚㛢㔢⌖#ᴮ㍦㚿+ሦᤆㅣ,
⦻ಮ#ඟຳ㚿 O ᢲᴮ㚿+ᤆㅣ,
DE
S
U 4 S U5
㊟⫇#὚#ᡣ0㈳㒘㑻#ⓗ㉞#ⱇẃ㥠☨
㊟⫇ ᡣ0㈳ᑰ㑻#ⓗ㉞
PEC5 24V D PES5 L 24V
⢮◿ ᩖᖆ⇊#㚿⎇ ᩖᖆ⇊#㚿⎇ ⢮◿
57Y GF57 ᯞ໚㛢 ᩖᖆ⇊# ㅪ⠯ ᯞ໚㛢 ᡒ㖮# Ữ# ᅞ⡏ 57Y GF57
443Y DF# 443Y G ᗂ0⾒ᇏ㇚#ㅪ⠯ O ᡒ㖮# ᅞ⡏ 443Y DF# 443Y
553Y DF# 553Y ⦦,#ᗂ0⾒ᇏ㇚#ㅪ⠯#⿾⠦#⦦ᯢ⎆♺ 553Y DF# 553Y
ጾ#⿾⠦∶⾽⟮#ᵮᑮ#⦦ᯢ㘂⇾☦#
㘓፲ᎎ1
ὴ㜸⧴#㊟⫇ ⅟᫸㐄#㡗᭓⪿㘃
SKV#863⎆ᩖ⨲♺ጾ#᳓㒗#⿾⠦#⡏ⳓ⠞# 㔲 ᴲ
ಪፏ㘓፲ᎎ1 Ếᡗㅣ# 㖶ᢲ⠞㍢ SKV8530ES
⠺⇢㘆#⅖☻⟪#7;6sdjhᨦ#Ⳣ⤚㘂⚖#⦦
⎗⎆⛎1
PHS530#☧᳷ⳓ
Ⴗ⮻ᜏ
12 11 10 9 8 6 3 1 2 4 6 5 7
5⩏ㆣ#☼ᅋ ᗂ0⾒ᇏ㇚
5⩏ㆣ#᚟⅟
ᩖᖆ⇊
6⩏ㆣ#ⱜཏ#⅟ᬸ㥠
6 3 1 15 6 21 18 19 20 8 9 22 23 13 14
ⱜཏ#ύᅻ㥠
ⱜཏ#၀ᅔ㥠
ⱇ⧟⃋㟓
㔲ᴲ Ḫ㔲ᬯ ⡖⩲ 㔲ᴲ Ḫ㔲ᬯ ⡖⩲
4 Ჾᖾ ◶ᦒᲢጮ 㘓າ 45 ⍎㖮ᩫ ⛪⇾ 0
5 ⍎㖶+5➮⼂, ◶ᦒᲢጮ 㘓າ 46 ⛎㐦ᢲ⠞㍢ ♞⇲Ếᩖ 0
6 ⍖ᠦ⠞ᖆ#㏒ㅣ NBR 47 ⍎りᨂ(⢻⎆ ⠻⟪ᅂ⅖) 0
7 ⍎㖶#⍎㖮ᩫ ⍎㎢ 48 ⍎㖶(3➮⼂)
8 Ჾᖾ#⾎ᴮ ZN 4; ᩖ㇞ ⍎㖮ᩫ ⍎㎢
9 ಪ⍎⾽ NBR 4< ⍎㑂⠞⇆ ⍎㎢
: ⍎ㄖᨂ 53 ⍖ᠦ⠞᏾ 㛪᏾ ⍎㎢
; 㗦⍎㉎ ⋂⩪ 54 ⍖ᠦ⠞᏾ ⍎㎢
< 㗦⍎㉎#㏒ㅣ NBR 55 ㎶⠦ᢩ Ჾᖾ(3➮⼂) ⍎㎢
43 ㎶⠦ᢩ#Ჾᖾ ⋂⩪ 56 ⍎ㄖᨂ VP45F
44 ⍎ㄖᨂ -
PHS530#☧᳷ⳓ
⧃㥠#ㆣ╣ᜏ +᎒➮#=#pp,
PHS530S
᳷ᠧ⑫#㐋⫐
Uf乓+㒖㍢#5䭩7, 44 2-䴒4.5 ඪ㉟#㛪

Uf乒+✢Ḫ#㎶⠦ᢩ#㒖㍢, 22
1.5 1.5
24
32
4 2
12
16
14 14
27 䴒
13.5
4.5
27
19
40.5
45 ᭓῏#㐋⫐#
55
109 3-䴒4.5 ඪ㉟#㛪
156
Uf乓+㒖㍢#4䭩6䭩8, 26 26
5 1 3
ᡣ0㈳ᑰ㑻#㐋⫐
27
13.5
4.5
72
19
40.5
45
55
109 3-䴒4.5 ඪ㉟#㛪
156
166.5
PHS530#☧᳷ⳓ
⧃㥠#ㆣ╣ᜏ +᎒➮#=#pp,
PHS530D
᳷ᠧ⑫#㐋⫐
Uf乓+㒖㍢#5䭩7,
44
Uf乒+✢Ḫ#㎶⠦ᢩ#㒖㍢, 2-䴒4.5 ඪ㉟#㛪
22
24
32
4 2
12
16
14 14
27 䴒
4.5
13.5
27
19
40.5
45
᭓῏#㐋⫐#
55
108.5 3-䴒4.5 ඪ㉟#㛪
162.5
218
Uf乓+㒖㍢#4䭩6䭩8, 26 26
5 1 3
ᡣ0㈳ᑰ㑻#㐋⫐
27
13.5
4.5
72
19
40.5
45
55
3-䴒4.5 ඪ㉟#㛪
109
218
238.5
PHS530#☧᳷ⳓ
⧃㥠#ㆣ╣ᜏ +᎒➮#=#pp,
PHS530C, PHS530E, PHS530P

᳷ᠧ#⦋⪿⣿#㐋⫐
44 2-䴒4.5 ඪ㉟#㛪
Uf乓+㒖㍢#5䭩7,
22
32
24
4 2
16
12
14 14
27
13.5
4.5
䴒
19
40.5
27
45
87.5
᭓῏#㐋⫐
124.5 3-䴒4.5 ඪ㉟#㛪
249
26 26
Uf乓+㒖㍢#4䭩6䭩8,
5 1 3
ᡣ0㈳ᑰ㑻#㐋⫐############
27
13.5
4.5
72
19
40.5
45
88
125 3-䴒4.5 ඪ㉟#㛪
249
271
ᴯᘓ㜿ᠧ
ⱇẃ㥠☨
ᴯᘓ㜿ᠧ#⏷⣜
PHS530 M5 SKV8630P䮥
㚿 ⎇ ඟ㉟ඟຳ+4㒖㍢,/#ඟ㉟᳚໚+6/8㒖㍢,
⭌⧴ᾃ⅗ ᳢Ặ#Ჾᖾ+5/7㒖㍢,
SKV863# ⎆ᩖ⨲ 㒖㍢# 4 Uf乓
⢻∷#ถ൧ 㒖㍢# 6䭩8 Uf乓
⤻╣ 㒖㍢# 5䭩7 Uf乓
⚚ ⋂ 5<⚚
P5 5⚚
ᩲ ❞ ㎯ ᳓ ⎇ ᎎ⠞ᢳ㍢#ᩲ❞㍢
= =
⢫ ❓ ᳢ Ặ SKV#863
P< <⚚
Ế ᡗ ㅣ 㖶 ᢲ ⠞ ㍢ SKV8630ES
⧃㥠#ㆣ╣ᜏ +᎒➮#=pp,
PHS530S/D
2-Rc乐 6-Rc乓
4-䴒5.4
2
2
21
22
6
8
4
1
1
7 3
3 26. 6.
33X(N-1)+47
33X(N-1)+60
PHS530C/E/P
2-Rc乐 6-Rc乓
4-䴒5.4
2
2
25
6
8
4
1
3 2 6. 4 3
27.5X(N-1)+44
27.5X(N-1)+56 q=⚚⋂
General Model EJA110A
Specifications Differential Pressure Transmitter
GS 1C21B1-E
The high performance differential pressure transmitter

model EJA110A can be used to measure liquid, gas,
or steam flow as well as liquid level, density and
pressure. It outputs a 4 to 20 mA DC signal corre-
sponding to the measured differential pressure. Model
EJA110A also features remote setup and monitoring
through communications with the BRAIN™ terminal
and CENTUM CS™ or XL™ or HART 275 host.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Refer to GS 1C22T2-E for Fieldbus communication
type marked with “ .”
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Zero-based calibrated span, linear output, wetted
parts material code ‘S’ and silicone oil.
Effect on Zero (can be corrected at line pres-
Reference Accuracy of Calibrated Span
(including the effects of zero-based linearity, hyster- sure)
esis, and repeatability) L capsule
[0.02 % Span+0.052 % URL] per 3.4 MPa {500 psi}
0.075 % of Span
M, H and V capsules
For spans below X 0.028 % of URL per 6.9 MPa {1000 psi}
Overpressure Effects (M, H and V capsules)
X 0.03 % of URL per 14 MPa {2000 psi}
[0.025 + 0.05 ] % of Span
Span Stability (M, H and V capsules)
where X equals: 0.1 % of URL per 60 months
Capsule X kPa {inH2O} Power Supply Effects “ ”
L 3 {12} 0.005 % per Volt (from 21.6 to 32 V DC, 350 for
M 10 {40} Output signal code D and E.)
H 100 {400}
V 1.4 MPa {200 psi} FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
Square Root Output Accuracy
Span & Range Limits
The square root accuracy is a percent of flow span.
Measurement
Output Accuracy Span/Range kPa inH2O(/D1) mbar(/D3) mmH2O(/D4)
Span 0.5 to 10 2 to 40 5 to 100 50 to 1000
same as reference L
50 % or Greater Range -10 to 10 -40 to 40 -100 to 100 -1000 to 1000
accuracy Span 1 to 100 4 to 400 10 to 1000 100 to 10000
M
reference accuracy 50 Range -100 to 100 -400 to 400 -1000 to 1000 -10000 to 10000
50 % to Dropout point Span 5 to 500 20 to 2000 50 to 5000 0.05 to 5 kgf/cm2
square root output (%) H
Range -500 to 500 -2000 to 2000 -5000 to 5000 -5 to 5 kgf/cm2
T00E.EPS
Span 0.14 to 14 MPa 20 to 2000 psi 1.4 to 140 bar 1.4 to 140 kgf/cm2
V*1 Range
Ambient Temperature Effects -0.5 to 14 MPa -71 to 2000 psi -5 to 140 bar -5 to 140 kgf/cm2
Total Effects per 28 ˚C (50 ˚F) Change T01E.EPS
*1: For Wetted parts material code other than S, the
Capsule Effect ranges are 0 to 14 MPa, 0 to 2000 psi, 0 to 140
bar, and 0 to 140 kgf/cm2.
L [0.08 % Span + 0.09 % URL]
M [0.07 % Span + 0.02 % URL] URL is defined as the Upper Range Limit from the table
H [0.07 % Span + 0.015 % URL] above.
V [0.07 % Span + 0.03 % URL]
Zero Adjustment Limits
Static Pressure Effects Zero can be fully elevated or suppressed, within the
Lower and Upper Range Limits of the capsule.
Total Effects per Change
L capsule External Zero Adjustment “ ”
[0.07 % Span+0.052 % URL] per 3.4 MPa {500 psi} External zero is continuously adjustable with 0.01 %
M, H and V capsules incremental resolution of span. Span may be
[0.1% Span+0.028 % URL] per 6.9 MPa {1000 psi} adjusted locally using the digital indicator with range
switch.
Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 1C21B1-E

2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 Japan ©Copyright June 1997
Phone: 81-422-52-5690 Fax.: 81-422-52-2018 9th Edition Sep. 1999
Printed with FinePrint - purchase at www.fineprint.com

2
Mounting Position Effect Supply & Load Requirements
Rotation in diaphragm plane has no effect. Tilting up to (Safety approvals may affect electrical requirements)
90 ˚ will cause zero shift up to 0.4 kPa {1.6 inH2O} With 24 V DC supply, up to a 570 load can be
which can be corrected by the zero adjustment. used. See graph below.
Output “ ”
Two wire 4 to 20 mA DC output with digital communi-
cations, linear or square root programmable. BRAIN
or HART FSK protocol are superimposed on the 4 to
600
20 mA signal.
Damping Time Constant (1st order) E-10.5
R=
The sum of the amplifier and capsule damping time 0.0236 Digital
constant must be used for the overall time constant. External Communication
Amp damping time constant is adjustable from 0.2 to load range
64 seconds. resistance BRAIN and HART
250
Capsule (Silicone Oil) L M H and V
Time Constant (approx. sec) 0.8 0.6 0.3 R( )
Ambient Temperature Limits

(approval codes may affect limits)
-40 to 85 ˚C (-40 to 185 ˚F) 24.7 42
10.5 16.4
-30 to 80 ˚C (-22 to 176 ˚F) with LCD Display Power supply voltage E (V DC)
Process Temperature Limits F02E.EPS
(approval codes may affect limits) Figure 2. Relationship Between Power Supply Voltage
-40 to 120 ˚C (-40 to 248 ˚F) and External Load Resistance
Ambient Humidity Limits
5 to 100 % RH @ 40 ˚C (104 ˚F)
Working Pressure Limits (Silicone Oil) Supply Voltage “ ”
Maximum Pressure Limit 10.5 to 42 V DC for operation(10.5 to 30 V DC for
Intrinsically safe type)
Capsule Pressure 16.4 to 42 V DC for digital communications, BRAIN
and HART protocols(16.4 to 30 V DC for
L 3.5 MPa {500 psig} Intrinsically safe type)
M, H, and V 14 MPa {2000 psig}
Load(Output signal code D and E)
Minimum Pressure Limit 0 to 1335 for operation
See graph below 250 to 600 for digital communication
EMC Conformity Standards ,
100{14.5} Atmospheric For EMI (Emission): EN55011, AS/NZS 2064 1/2
pressure For EMS (Immunity): EN50082-2
Working
pressure
Communication Requirements “ ”
kPa abs BRAIN
{psi abs}
Communication Distance
Applicable range Up to 2 km (1.25 miles) when using CEV polyethyl-
10{1.4} ene-insulated PVC-sheathed cables. Communication
distance varies depending on type of cable used.
Load Capacitance
2.7{0.38}
0.22 F or less (see note)
Load Inductance
3.3 mH or less (see note)
1{0.14}
-40 0 40 80 120 Input Impedance of communicating device
(-40) (32) (104) (176) (248) 10 k or more at 2.4 kHz.
Process temperature C ( F)
F01E.EPS Note : For general-use and Flameproof type.
For Intrinsically safe type, please refer to
Figure 1. Working Pressure and Process Temperature ‘OPTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS.’
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 1997, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 1C21B1-E July 01, 1999-00

3
HART
Communication Distance
Up to 1.5 km (1 mile) when using multiple twisted pair
cables. Communication distance varies depending on
type of cable used.
Use the following formula to determine cable length

for specific applications:
65 106 (Cf + 10,000)

L= -
(R C) C
Where:
L = length in meters or feet
R = resistance in (including barrier resistance)
C = cable capacitance in pF/m or pF/ft
Cf = maximum shunt capacitance of receiving devices
in pF/m or pF/ft
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted Parts Materials
Diaphragm, Cover flange, Process connector,
and Vent/Drain Plug
Refer to ‘MODEL AND SUFFIX CODE.’
Capsule Gasket
For wetted parts material code S, Teflon-coated
SUS316L.
For wetted parts material code other than S,
PTFE(Teflon).
Process Connector Gasket
PTFE Teflon
Non-wetted Parts Materials
Bolting
SCM435 or SUS630
Housing
Low copper cast-aluminum alloy with polyurethane
paint (Munsell 0.6GY3.1/2.0)
Enclosure Classification
JIS C0920 immersion proof
(equivalent to NEMA 4X and IEC IP67)
Cover O-rings
Buna-N
Name plate and tag
SUS304
Fill Fluid
Silicone, Fluorinated oil (option)
Weight
3.9 kg (8.6 lbs.) without integral indicator, mounting
bracket, and process connector.
Connections
Refer to the model code to specify the process and
electrical connection type.

4
MODEL AND SUFFIX CODES
Model Suffix Codes Description
EJA110A ························· Differential pressure transmitter
Output Signal -D · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4 to 20 mA DC with digital communication (BRAIN protocol)
-E · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4 to 20 mA DC with digital communication (HART protocol, refer to GS 1C22T1-E)
-F · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Digital communication (FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol, refer to GS 1C22T2-E)
Measurement L ····················· 0.5 to 10 kPa {50 to 1000 mmH2O}
span(capsule) M····················· 1 to 100 kPa {100 to 10000 mmH2O}
H····················· 5 to 500 kPa { 0.05 to 5 kgf/cm2}
V····················· 0.14 to 14 MPa { 1.4 to 140 kgf/cm2}*1
Wetted parts [Body]*2 [Capsule] [Vent plug]
material S ··················· SCS14A SUS316L*5 SUS316
H ··················· SCS14A Hastelloy C-276*6 SUS316
M ··················· SCS14A Monel*6 SUS316
T ··················· SCS14A Tantalum*6 SUS316
A···················· Hastelloy C-276 equivalent*3 Hastelloy C-276*6 Hastelloy C-276
D ··················· Hastelloy C-276 equivalent*3 Tantalum*6 Hastelloy C-276
B ··················· Monel equivalent*4 Monel*6 Monel
Process connections 0·················· without process connector (Rc1/4 female on the cover flanges)
1·················· with Rc1/4 female process connector
2·················· with Rc1/2 female process connector
3· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · with 1/4 NPT female process connector
4· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · with 1/2 NPT female process connector
5· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · without process connector (1/4 NPT female on the cover flanges)
[Maximum working pressure]
Bolts and nuts material
(L capsule) (M, H, and V capsule)
A················ SCM435 3.5 MPa {35 kgf/cm2} 14 MPa {140 kgf/cm2}
B················ SUS630 3.5 MPa {35 kgf/cm2} 14 MPa {140 kgf/cm2}
Installation -2 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Vertical impulse piping type, right side high pressure, process connector upside*7
-3 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Vertical impulse piping type, right side high pressure, process connector downside*7
-6 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Vertical impulse piping type, left side high pressure, process connector upside*7
-7 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Vertical impulse piping type, left side high pressure, process connector downside*7
-8 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Horizontal impulse piping type, right side high pressure*8
-9 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · Horizontal impulse piping type, left side high pressure*8
Electrical connection 0 ············ G1/2 female, one electrical connection

2 ············ 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections without blind plug
3 ············ Pg 13.5 female, two electrical connections without blind plug
4 ············ M20 female, two electrical connections without blind plug
5 ············ G1/2 female, two electrical connections and a blind plug
7 ············ 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections and a blind plug
8 ············ Pg 13.5 female, two electrical connections and a blind plug
9 ············ M20 female, two electrical connections and a blind plug
Integral indicator D·········· Digital indicator
E·········· Digital indicator with the range setting switch
N·········· (None)
Mounting bracket A········ SECC Carbon steel 2-inch pipe mounting (flat type)
B········ SUS304 2-inch pipe mounting (flat type)
C········ SECC Carbon steel 2-inch pipe mounting (L type)
D········ SUS304 2-inch pipe mounting (L type)
N········ (None)
Optional codes / Optional specification
T04E.EPS
The ‘ ’ marks indicate the most typical selection for each specification. Example: EJA110A-DMS5A-92NA/
*1: For Wetted parts material code H, M, T, A, and D, the range limits are 0 to 14 MPa{0 to 140 kgf/cm2}.
*2: Indicates material of cover flanges and process connectors.
*3: Indicated material is equivalent to ASTM CW-12MW.
*4: Indicated material is equivalent to ASTM M35-2.
*5: Diaphragm material is Hastelloy C-276. Indicated is other wetted parts materials.
*6: Indicates diaphragm and other wetted parts material.
*7: If necessary, specify Mounting bracket code C or D.
*8: If necessary, specify Mounting bracket code A or B.

5
OPTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS (For Explosion Protected type “ ”)
For FOUNDATION Fieldbus explosion protected type, see GS 1C22T2-E.
Item Description Code
FM Explosionproof Approval *3
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
Dust-ignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G
Hazardous (classified) locations, indoors and outdoors ( NEMA 4X ) FF1
Temperature class : T6
Amb. Temp. :–40 to 60 C (–40 to 140 F)
Electrical connection : 1/2 NPT female *1
FM Intrinsically safe Approval *3
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D, Class II, Division 1,
Groups E, F & G and Class III, Division 1 Hazardous Locations.
Factory Mutual (FM) Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D, Class II, Division. 2,
Groups E, F & G, and Class III, Division 1 Hazardous Locations.
Enclosure : "NEMA 4X", Temp. Class : T4, Amb. Temp. : –40 to 60 C (–40 to 140 F) FS1
Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters
[Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G]
Vmax=30 V, Imax=165 mA, Pmax=0.9 W, Ci=22.5 nF, Li=730 H
[Groups C, D, E, F and G]
Combined FF1and FS1*3
FU1
CENELEC (KEMA) Flameproof Approval *3
EExd IIC T4, T5, T6, Amb. Temp. : –40 to 80 C (–40 to 176 F)
KF1
Max. process Temp. : T4 ; 120 C (248 F), T5 ; 100 C (212 F), T6 ; 85 C (185 F)
Electrical connection : 1/2 NPT female, Pg 13.5 female and M20 female *2
CENELEC (KEMA) Intrinsically safe Approval *3
EEx ia IIC T4, Amb. Temp. : –40 to 60 C(–40 to 140 F)
CENELEC (KEMA) Ui=30 V, Ii=165 mA, Pi=0.9 W, Ci=22.5 nF, Li=730 H KS1
Combined KF1, KS1 and Type N Approval *3
KEMA Type N Approval
Ex nA IIC T4, Amb. Temp. : –40 to 60 C(–40 to 140 F) KU1
U=30 V, I=165 mA
CSA Explosionproof Approval *3
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
Dustignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G
Division2 'SEALS NOT REQUIRED' , Temp. Class : T4, T5, T6 Encl Type 4x CF1
Max. Process Temp. : T4 ; 120 C (248 F), T5 ; 100 C (212 F), T6 ; 85 C (185 F)
Amb. Temp. :–40 to 80 C (–40 to 176 F)
Canadian Standards Electrical connection : 1/2 NPT female *1
Association (CSA) CSA Intrinsically safe Approval *3
Class I, Groups A, B, C and D Class II and III, Groups E, F and G
Encl Type 4x, Temp. Class : T4, Amb. Temp. : –40 to 60 C (–40 to 140 F) CS1
Combined CF1 and CS1 *3
CU1
SAA Flameproof, Intrinsically safe and Non-sparking Approval *3
Ex d IIC T4/T5/T6, IP67 class I, Zone 1, Amb. Temp. : –40 to 80 C (–40 to 176 F)
Standards Association of Max. Process Temp. : T4 ; 120 C (248 F), T5 ; 100 C (212 F), T6 ; 85 C (185 F)
Ex ia IIC T4, IP67 class I, Zone 0 SU1
Australia (SAA)
Ex n IIC T4, IP67 class I, Zone 2
Ui=30 V DC, Ii=165 mA DC, Wi=0.9 W, Amb. Temp. : –40 to 60 C (–40 to 140 F)
T05E.EPS
*1: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2 and 7.
*2: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, and 9.
*3: Applicable for Output signal code D and E.
For intrinsically safe approval, use the safety barrier certified by the testing laboratories (BARD-400 is not applicable).
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 1997, Yokogawa Electric Corporation GS 1C21B1-E Sep. 01, 1999-00

6
OPTIONAL SPECIFICATION
Item Description Code
Color change Amplifier cover only P
Painting
Coating change Epoxy resin-baked coating X1
Transmitter power supply voltage: 10.5 to 32 V DC (10.5 to 30 V DC for intrinsically
Lightning protector safe type, 9 to 32 V DC for Fieldbus communication type.) A
Allowable current: Max. 6000 A (1 40 s), Repeating 1000 A (1 40 s) 100 times
Degrease cleansing treatment K1
Oil-prohibited use*11 Degrease cleansing treatment and with fluorinated oilfilled capsule.
Operating temperature -20 to 80 C K2
Degrease cleansing treatment and dehydrating treatment K5

Oil-prohibited use
with dehydrating treatment*11 Degrease cleansing treatment and dehydrating treatment with fluorinated oilfilled capsule.
Operating temperature -20 to 80 C K6
P calibration ( psi unit ) D1

Calibration units*1 ( See Table for Span and
bar calibration ( bar unit ) D3
Range Limits.)
M calibration (kgf/cm2 unit ) D4
Sealing treatment to Sealant ( liquid silicone rubber ) is coated on surfaces of SUS630 nuts used
SUS630 nuts for cover flange mounting. Y
Long vent*2 Total vent plug Length: 112mm (standard, 32mm) U

Down-scale burnout in CPU
Down-scale: -5 %, 3.2 mA DC or less C1
failure*3
Amplifier housing material: SCS14A stainless steel
Stainless steel amplifier housing*4 (equivalent to SUS316 cast stainless steel or ASTM CF-8M)
E1
Gold-plate*5 Gold-plated diaphragm A1

Cover flange *6 M01
Mill Certificate
Cover flange, Process connector *7 M11
Pressure test / Test Pressure: 3.5 MPa{35 kgf/cm2}*8 Nitrogen(N2) Gas*10 T01
Leak test Certificate Test Pressure: 14 MPa{140 kgf/cm2}*9 Retention time: 10 minutes T02
T06E.EPS
*1: The unit of MWP (Max. working pressure) on the name plate of a housing is the same unit as specified by Optional code
D1, D3, and D4.
*2: Applicable for vertical impulse piping type (Installation code 2, 3, 6, and 7) and Wetted parts material code S, H, M, and T.
Long vent material is SUS316.
*3: Initial preset status of the standard type (without /C1): Up-scale (110 %, 21.6 mA DC or more)
Applicable for Output signal code D and E.
*4: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, and 9. Not applicable for Optional code P and X1.
*5: Applicable for Wetted parts material code S.
*6: Applicable for Process connections code 0 and 5.
*7: Applicable for Process connections code 1, 2, 3, and 4.
*8: Applicable for Capsule code L.
*9: Applicable for Capsule code M, H and V.
*10: Pure nitrogen gas is used for oil-prohibited use (Optional code K1, K2, K5, and K6).
*11: Applicable for Wetted parts material code S, H, M, and T.
< Settings When Shipped > “ ”

Tag Number As specified in order *1 Calibration Range
Lower Range Value As specified in order
Output Mode ‘Linear’ unless otherwise specified in order
Calibration Range As specified in order
Display Mode ‘Linear’ unless otherwise specified in order Higher Range Value
Operation Mode ‘Normal’ unless otherwise specified in order Selected from mmH2O, mmAq, mmWG,
Calibration Range mmHg, kPa, MPa, mbar, bar, gf/cm2,
Damping Time ‘2 sec.’ Units kgf/cm2, inH2O, inHg, ftH2O, or psi.
Constant *2 (Only one unit can be specified)
T07E.EPS
*1: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters (including - and · ) will be entered in the amplifier memory.
*2: If using square root output, set damping time constant to 2 sec. or more.

7
DIMENSIONS
Model EJA110A
Vertical Impulse Piping Type
Process connector upside (INSTALLATION CODE '6') (For CODE '2','3' or '7', refer to the notes below.)
Process connector External indicator Unit : mm (approx.inch)
(Optional) conduit connection
259(10.20) (Optional)
197 (7.76) 110 (4.33)
97 146 (5.75) High 54 Low
(3.82) pressure pressure
Process side
(2.13) side (Note)
connections
Terminal
side
Internal
indicator
(Optional)
Ground
terminal Conduit Vent/Drain plugs
connection 9(note 3)
(0.35)
Zero 2-inch pipe
Mounting bracket adjustment (O.D. 60.5 mm)
(L-type, Optional)
F03E.EPS
Horizontal Impulse Piping Type (INSTALLATION CODE '9') (For CODE '8', refer to the notes below.)
110 (4.33)
94 72 Conduit
connection 9(note3) Zero
(3.70) (2.83) (0.35) adjustment
Internal
indicator
(Optional)
External indicator Terminal
conduit connection side
(Optional)
Ground
terminal
High Low
pressure pressure
side side (Note)
Process Vent plugs

46 connections 54 (2.13)
(1.81) Drain plugs
128 (5.04)
125 (4.92)
Process
connector
(Optional)
Mounting bracket
2-inch pipe (O.D. 60.5mm) (Flat-type, Optional)
F04E.EPS
* 1: When Installation code 2, 3, or 8 is selected, high and low pressure side on above figure are reversed.
(i.e. High pressure side is on the right side.)
* 2: When Installation code 3 or 7 is selected, process connection mounting bracket on above figure are reversed.
* 3: 15 mm(0.59 inch) for right side high pressure.(for code 2, 3 or 8)
Terminal Configuration Terminal Wiring

SUPPLY +
– Power supply and output terminal
+
CHECK – External indicator(ammeter) terminal
Communication Ground terminal

Terminals(BT200 etc.) SUPPLY CHECK CHECK METER
Connection hook *1: When using an external indicator or a check meter,
Connection hook
the internal resistance must be 10 or less.
Not available for Fieldbus communication(Output signal
code F). F05E.EPS

8
SELECTION GUIDE
Measurement Span Maximum Working Pressure
Application Type Model Capsule
kPa inH2O MPa psi
L 0.5 to 10 2 to 40 3.5 500
Differential M 1 to 100 4 to 400 14 2000
Pressure Traditional-Mounting*1 EJA110A
H 5 to 500 20 to 2000 14 2000
V 0.14 to 14MPa 20 to 2000 psi 14 2000
L 1 to 10 4 to 40 3.5 500
Flow Integral Orifice EJA115 M 2 to 100 8 to 400 14 2000
H 20 to 210 80 to 830 14 2000
Differential Pressure Extended EJA118N M 2.5 to 100 10 to 400
& Liquid Level Flush EJA118W 25 to 500 Based on Flange Rating
H 100 to 2000
with Remote Seals Combination EJA118Y
Draft Range Traditional-Mounting*1 EJA120A E 0.1 to 1 0.4 to 4 50 kPa 7.25
Differential Pressure Traditional-Mounting*1 M 1 to 100 4 to 400 32 4500
& Liquid Level EJA130A
H 5 to 500 20 to 2000 32 4500
Liquid Level, Closed Flush EJA210A M 1 to 100 4 to 400
20 to 2000 Based on Flange Rating
or Open Tank Extended EJA220A H 5 to 500
L 0.67 to 10*2 2.67 to 40*2 10 kPa*2 40 in H2O*2
Absolute (vacuum) 130 kPa*2
Pressure
Traditional-Mounting*1 EJA310A M 1.3 to 130*2 0.38 to 38 inHg*2 18.65*2
A 0.03 to 3 MPa*2 4.3 to 430 psi*2 3000 kPa*2 430*2
A 0.03 to 3 MPa 4.3 to 430 psi 3 430
Gauge Pressure Traditional-Mounting*1 EJA430A 0.14 to 14 20 to 2000 psi 14 2000
B
Gauge Pressure Extended EJA438N A 0.06 to 3 MPa 9 to 430 psi Based on Flange Rating
with Remote Seal B 0.46 to 7 66 to 1000 psi
Gauge Pressure A 0.06 to 3 MPa 8 to 430 psi
Flush EJA438W 66 to 2000 psi Based on Flange Rating
with Remote Seal B 0.46 to 7
C 5 to 32 MPa 720 to 4500 psi 32 4500
High Gauge Traditional-Mounting*1 EJA440A 5 to 50 MPa 720 to 7200 psi
D 50 7200
A 10 to 200 1.45 to 29 psi 200 kPa 29
Absolute & Gauge EJA510A B 0.1 to 2 MPa 14.5 to 290 psi 2 290
Direct-Mounting
Pressure*3 EJA530A C 0.5 to 10 MPa 72.5 to 1450 psi 10 1450
D 5 to 50 MPa 720 to 7200 psi 50 7200
T08E.EPS
*1: Traditional-mounting is 1/4 - 18 NPTF process connections ( 1/2 - 14 NPTF with process adapters ) on 2-1/8" centers.
*2: Measurement values in absolute.
*3: Measurement values in absolute for EJA510A.
< Ordering Information > “ ” < Related Instruments > “ ”

Specify the following when ordering Power Distributor: Refer to GS 1B4T1-E, 1B4T2-E.
1. Model, suffix codes, and optional codes 3-Value Manifold: Refer to GS 22B1C1-E
2. Calibration range and units: BRAIN TERMINAL: Refer to GS 1C0A11-E
1) Calibration range can be specified with range
value specifications up to 5 digits < Reference >
(excluding any decimal point) for low or high range 1. Teflon; Trademark of E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Co.
limits within the range of -32000 to 32000. 2. Hastelloy; Trademark of Haynes International Inc.
2) Specify only one unit from the table, ‘Settings 3. Monel; Trademark of Inco Alloys International, Inc.
when shipped.’ 4. HART; Trademark of the HART Communication
3. Select linear or square root for output mode and Foundation.
display mode. 5. FOUNDATION; Trademark of Fieledbus Foundation.
Note: If not specified, the instrument is shipped set for Material Cross Reference Table
linear mode.
4. Select normal or reverse for operation mode SUS316L AISI 316L
Note: If not specified, the instrument is shipped in SUS316 AISI 316
normal operation mode. SUS304 AISI 304
5. Display scale and units (for transmitters equipped S25C AISI 1025
with integral indicator only)
SCM435 AISI 4137
Specify either 0 to 100 % or engineering unit scale
SUS630 ASTM630
and ‘Range and Unit’ for engineering units scale:
Scale range can be specified with range limit SCS14A ASTM CF-8M
specifications up to 5 digits (excluding any decimal T09E.EPS
point) for low or high range limits within the range of

-19999 to 19999. < Specification Conformance >
6. Tag Nunber (if required) The model EJA110A maintains a specification
conformance to at least 3 .

NOISE CONTROL DIRECTORY
PROMOTES CLEAN QUIET PNEUMATICS
About Us
Based in the Cleveland, Ohio,
area for more than 60 years,
the Allied Witan Company
manufactures industrial noise
control devices that promote
clean, quiet, pneumatic
technologies. Our complete
line of air exhaust mufflers,
all-metal mufflers and filters,
porous metal filter silencers
and breather-vent-filters
help promote health and
safety in the industrial
workplace.
ATOMUFFLER ®
Advantages
The Atomuffler’s radical, full-flow
design uses interposing sound
waves, multiple-stage velocity
deceleration, an obstruction-free
expansion chamber and a porous
disseminator (filter element) to
BANTAM™
completely dissipate harmful air
exhaust blasts. A large peripheral
exhaust surface area diffuses the
air blast, further lowering velocity
and reducing air noise. The
ATOMUFFLER ® AND BANTAM™ DESIGNS Atomuffler is ideal for reducing
Exponentially Perceived Noise
FOR NOISE CONTROL BY THE ALLIED WITAN
(EPNdB).
COMPANY
Stop Noise Before it Starts

The deafening roar of air exhaust isn’t just distracting – it also can
be dangerous. Eliminate the noise and help keep employees safe
with the Atomuffler ® and Bantam™ designs for noise control, offered
exclusively by the Allied Witan Company.
How They Work

The Atomuffler and Bantam muffler and filter product lines eliminate
excessive noise by dividing the air stream and turning it back
on itself. As air exhaust enters the muffler at high velocity, the
Atomuffler and Bantam mufflers redirect it into smaller air streams
that rebound off opposing walls of the chamber. With the air steams
colliding head-on with each other, the velocity is reduced and the air
is dispersed throughout the disseminator surface area. This technique
eliminates noise without sacrificing machine performance.
How They Help

For more than 60 years the Atomuffler has been used in thousands of
plants and countless applications, and the Bantam muffler has proven
itself time and again for more than 40 years. They both have an
outstanding ability to eliminate excessive noise for a more pleasant
working environment while reducing potential physical injuries
caused by extreme air blasts.
ALLIED WITAN COMPANY I 1
Air Exhaust Muffler
“The Original”… provides up to 85% noise reduction and 94% flow factor
Thoroughly proven on thousands of installations, the world-class Atomuffler® Air Exhaust Muffler
expertly reduces Exponentially Perceived Noise (EPNdB) without impeding equipment performance.
Its design takes explosive air exhaust noise discharged from valve exhaust ports and muffles it with
optimized Constant Velocity (CV) flow factor. Exhaust air flows softly to atmosphere free of noise, oil
fog, and contaminates – providing a clean, comfortable and productive work environment.
The Air Exhaust Muffler features a unique obstruction-free expansion chamber. Standard Air Exhaust
Muffler construction includes aluminum end covers, zinc-plated steel components and a cellulose
fiber element.
This design is recommended for general purpose air exhaust applications for pressures up to 125 psi.
Single Chamber-Male Single Chamber-Female Multi-Chamber-Male
LENGTH DIA. LENGTH DIA. LENGTH DIA.
CONN SIZE
CONN SIZE
CONN SIZE CONN SIZE
Connection Thread Types Dimensions

Male NPT Female NPS Male BSPT Length Replace-
Conn Model Item Model Item Model Item Diameter Male Female Item Flow ment
Size Type Number Type Number Type Number weight SCFM Element
1/8 M01 0111001 N01 0211001 B01 0121001 1.84 3.12 2.81 .19 44 0911001
1/4 M02 0111002 N02 0211002 B02 0121002 1.84 4.37 4.00 .24 84 0911002
3/8 M00 0111000 N00 0211000 B00 0121000 2.59 5.12 4.56 .49 192 0911000
1/2 M05 0111005 N05 0211005 B05 0121005 3.15 6.00 5.50 .79 256 0911005
3/4 M07 0111007 N07 0211007 B07 0121007 3.40 7.18 6.68 1.04 544 0911007
1 M10 0111010 N10 0211010 B10 0121010 3.90 8.75 7.92 1.42 800 0911010
1-1/4 M12 0111012 N12 0211012 B12 0121012 3.90 8.75 8.00 1.45 1360 0911012
1-1/2 M15 0111015 N15 0211015 B15 0121015 5.25 13.56 12.50 3.27 2080 0911015
2 M20 0111020 N20 0211020 B20 0121020 5.25 18.87 17.75 4.22 3200 0911020
3 M30 0111030 - - B30 0121030 7.00 22.93 - 13.43 7200 0911030
4 M40 0111040 - - B40 0121040 8.00 23.56 - 14.69 14000 0911040
6 M60 0111060 - - B60 0121060 11.00 30.93 - 29.83 36000 0911060

Air Dryer Muffler
Dual-stage filter element traps particulates for longer element life

and less noise
The Atomuffler® Air Dryer Muffler is designed specifically to manage the demanding service problems
associated with desiccant regenerative-type air dryers. These air dryers often expel air laden with
moisture which can be heavily contaminated with desiccant dust.
The primary stage of the Air Dryer Muffler’s dual-stage filter element traps particulates, allowing
cleaner air to permeate freely through the secondary stage, which manages the reduction of noise.
This design also features a relief valve that is triggered to open if the air outflow becomes obstructed
by a build-up of particulate, which will divert the outflow directly to atmosphere.
It is highly recommended that the air dryer system be initially purged of free desiccant fragments
before installing a new Air Dryer Muffler or whenever an air dryer has been recharged with new
desiccant material.
Single Chamber-Male Single Chamber-Female Multi-Chamber-Male
LENGTH DIA. LENGTH DIA. LENGTH DIA.
CONN SIZE
CONN SIZE CONN SIZE
Connection Thread Types Dimensions

Male NPT Female NPS Male BSPT Length Replace-
Conn Model Item Model Item Model Item Diameter Male Female Item Flow ment
Size Type Number Type Number Type Number weight SCFM Element
1/8 X01 0375001 R01 0475001 X01 0325001 1.84 3.12 2.81 .25 42 0941001
1/4 X02 0375002 R02 0475002 X02 0325002 1.84 4.37 4.00 .32 80 0941002
3/8 X00 0375000 R00 0475000 X00 0325000 2.59 5.12 4.56 .68 182 0941000
1/2 X05 0375005 R05 0475005 X05 0325005 3.15 6.00 5.50 1.12 243 0941005
3/4 X07 0375007 R07 0475007 X07 0325007 3.40 7.18 6.68 1.58 517 0941007
1 X10 0375010 R10 0475010 X10 0325010 3.90 8.75 7.92 2.29 760 0941010
1-1/4 X12 0375012 R12 0475012 X12 0325012 3.90 8.75 8.00 3.54 1292 0941012
1-1/2 X15 0375015 R15 0475015 X15 0325015 5.25 13.56 12.50 4.96 1664 0941015
2 X20 0375020 R20 0475020 X20 0325020 5.25 18.87 17.75 6.61 3040 0941020
3 X30 0375030 - - X30 0325030 7.00 22.93 - 15.50 6840 0941030
4 X40 0375040 - - X40 0325040 8.00 23.56 - 19.29 13300 0941040
6 X60 0375060 - - X60 0325060 11.00 30.93 - 38.47 34200 0941060
For High Pressure Air Dryer Mufflers go to High Pressure Mufflers, page 9
GE
Sensing & Inspection Technologies
Moisture
Target™ Series 6
Moisture Analyzer
Features Applications
• Low-cost, single-channel hygrometer for OEM This single-channel analyzer measures moisture
applications in compressed air and gases. Designed for
permanent installations, it is used in conjunction
• M Series moisture probe or VeriDri moisture with M Series moisture probe or VeriDri moisture
transmitter compatible transmitter for air/gas dryer original equipment
manufacturer (OEM) applications:
• NEMA 4 weatherproof membrane front display/
keypad • Regenerative desiccant air or gas dryers
• Built-in isolated current or voltage analog output • Plastic drying applications prior to injection/
blowmolding
• MicroSD card for logging data up to 32 GB
• Medical air dryers
• Panel-mount and board-level configurations
• Glove box monitoring
• Fail-safe fault alarm relay
• Two Form C measurement alarm relays
• Upgrades from MTS5 with adaptor face plate

Low Cost, Real-Time
Moisture Measurement
The Moisture Target Series 6 is an economical, single
channel, aluminum oxide hygrometer in the Moisture
Series line of analyzers. It is intended for OEM
applications requiring low-cost, accurate, real-time
moisture measurement.
Improves OEM Product

Performance
The Moisture Target Series 6 can significantly
enhance the performance of OEM products by
allowing closed-loop control of moisture. For
example, in a regenerative dryer application it
can improve efficiency by initiating desiccant bed
regeneration when needed, rather than on an open-
loop timed cycle.
Panel-Mount
The panel-mount Moisture Target Series 6 comes
in a compact DIN standard meter housing for Microprocessor-Based
applications where space is at a premium. The case
slides directly into the panel cutout, and is held in Electronics
place from the rear by captive screws.
The microprocessor-based Moisture Target Series 6
The Moisture Target Series 6 can be supplied with accurately tracks fast-changing process conditions
a bezel adaptor to allow installation into existing and displays dew/frost point temperature in °F or °C
Moisture Target Series 5 panel cut-outs. on an LCD. Dew/frost point is also available as an
analog voltage or current output, and the Moisture
Target Series 6 features built-in isolation to ensure
the integrity of signals to remote devices. The unit
Uses M Series Probes and also features two Form C alarm relays for high and
low dew/frost point limits. The microprocessor-based
VeriDri Transmitter electronics and six-button keypad combine to make
selection of analog output zero and span, alarm
setpoints fast and easy, and entry of calibration data
The Moisture Target Series 6 uses M Series sample.
aluminum oxide moisture sensor probe or VeriDri
moisture transmitter. M Series probes and VeriDri
transmitter are rugged and accurate true absolute
humidity sensors with calibration traceable to NIST.
Exceptional dynamic range, speed of response and
calibration stability have made the aluminum oxide
sensor the standard for performance and value in
industrial moisture measurement for more than 40
years.
Series 6 Specifications
Electronics
Intrinsic Safety Temperature

External safety barrier for moisture input (optional) • Operating: –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C)
• Storage: –22° to 158°F (–30° to 70°C)
European Compliance
Complies with EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and Warm-Up Time
2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive (Installation Meets specified accuracy within three minutes
Category II, Pollution Degree II)
Configurations
Input • Panel (front panel meets Type 4 and IP66)
Moisture signal from GE Sensing thin-film aluminum • Board version, without enclosure
oxide moisture sensor on an M Series probe or VeriDri
transmitter
93 (3.65) 45 (1.77)
Analog Output
Single internal isolated recorder output for dew point,
internally optically isolated, 10-bit (0.1%) resolution
Standard Switch-Selectable Outputs

• 0 to 2 V, 10k minimum load resistance
• 0 to 20 mA, 400  maximum series resistance 115
(4.54)
• 4 to 20 mA, 400  maximum series resistance
• User-programmable within the range of the
instrument and the corresponding sensor or
transmitter
Alarm Relays
• One fail-safe fault relay
• Two standard Form C relays SPDT, rated for 3 A at 2.5 (0.10)
250 VAC/30 VDC 104 (4.09)
• Set to any level within the range of the instrument;

programmable from the front panel
Alarm Set Point Repeatability 57

(2.24)
±0.2°F (±0.1°C) dew point
Datalogger
32 GB capacity with MicroSD card included
94 (3.69)
Display
128 x 64 matrix LCD
PANEL CUTOUT 46
Display Functions (1.81)
Dew point temperature in °F, °C or sensor signals for

diagnostics
Note: Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).
Power Requirements
Universal power 100-240 VAC @ 50-60 Hz, or 24 VDC
nominal
Series 6 Specifications
Moisture Measurement
Sensor Type
Thin-film aluminum oxide
Moisture Probe Compatibility

Compatible with all GE Sensing M Series aluminum
oxide moisture probes and VeriDri transmitters
Dew/Frost Point Temperature

• Overall range capability: 140°F to –166°F
(60°C to –110°C)
• Standard 68°F to –112°F (20°C to –80°C) with data
to -166°F (–110°C)
• Extended 140°F to –85°F (60°C to –80°C) with data
to 166°F (–110°C)
• VeriDri ranges include:
• –110°C to 20°C
• –110°C to –50°C
• –90°C to 10°C
• –80°C to –30°C
• –80°C to 20°C
• –30°C to 20°C
• –130°F to 70°F
• –130°F to –40°F
• –40°F to 70°F
• –50°F to 50°F
• –100°F to 0°F
Calibrated Accuracy at 77°F (25°C)

• ±3.6°F (±2°C) from –85°F to 50°F (–65°C to 10°C)
• ±5.4°F (±3°C) from –112°F to –86°F (–80°C to –66°C)
Repeatability
• ±0.9°F (±0.5°C) from –85°F to 50°F (–65°C to 10°C)
dew/frost point
• ±1.8°F (±1.0°C) from –112°F to –86°F (–80°C to –66°C)
dew/frost point
www.gesensinginspection.com
920-053D-1
© 2010 General Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Specifications are subject to change without notice. GE is a registered trademark of General Electric Company. Other company or product
names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies, which are not affiliated with GE.
Electric Part List for Dryer Package
Rev. Date PAR'D CHK'D APP'D Sheet No.

0 2017. 07. 10 Y.J.KMI
ELECTRICAL PART LIST
1 of 3
for DRYER PACKAGE
MODEL No.
No. DESCRIPTION SIZE Q'ty SERVICE
MAKER
ABN-203c
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT
1 125A 1 ea
BRESKER 1
LSIS
ABE 32b
ABE-32b
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT
2 10A 1 ea
BRESKER 2
LSIS
BKM63H
3 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 4A 2 ea
LSIS
NX7-00
4 TEMP INDICATING CONTROLLER K(CA) 3 ea
HANYOUNG NUX
T3S-B4RK4C
5 TEMP INDICATING CONTROLLER K(CA) 1 ea
AUTONICS
SN-M6H-CM
6 NOISEFILTER 250V 6A 1 ea
FINESUNTRONIX
KTC-50
7 THERMO CONTROLLER 16A 250VAC 1 ea
KACON
HY-F15
8 FUSE 250V 15A 22 set
HANYOUNG NUX
EQ5-05024
9 POWER SUPPLY 24DC/50W 1 ea
KACON
KPB25M
10 PUSHBUTTON SWITCH 6A 25Ø 3 ea
KOINO
DRM570024LD
11 RELAY 24V DC 3 ea
WEIDMULLER
KAB-08
12 VOLT METER 0~600V 1 ea
LIGHT STAR
KAA-08
13 AMPERE METER 150/5A 1 ea
LIGHT STAR
HY-606-2
HY 606 2
14 BUZZER 220V 1 ea
HANYOUNG NUX
Pneutec Korea Co., Ltd. Rev.0


0 2017. 07. 10 Y.J.KMI
2 of 3
for DRYER PACKAGE
MODEL No.
MAKER
SJ1238HA2
15 FAN 120Ø 1 set
SUNTRONIX
STL060-A-A11-3-M
16 TOWER LAMP AC220V 1 ea
HANYOUNG NUX
L40HF-20PB-1
17 I/O CABLE 2MT 2 ea
FALINK
TB-1H4O
18 I/O BOARD 32POINT 2 ea
FALINK
F4T-G6DS
19 RELAY BOARD 4POINT 5 SET
FALINK
2P FG
20 OUTLET SOCKET 16A 250V 1 ea
SJELECOM
CPU UNIT
21 PLC NX-CPU700p 1 ea
RS AUTOMATION
POWER UNIT
22 PLC NX-POWER 1 ea
RS AUTOMATION
BASE UNIT
23 PLC NX-BASE08 1 ea
RS AUTOMATION
INPUT UNIT
24 PLC NX-X16D 1 ea
RS AUTOMATION
INPUT UNIT
25 PLC NX-X32D 1 ea
RS AUTOMATION
OUTPUT UNIT
26 PLC NX-Y32T 1 ea
RS AUTOMATION
A/D UNIT
27 PLC NX-AI8C 1 ea
RS AUTOMATION
D/A UNIT
28 PLC NX-AO8C 1 ea
RS AUTOMATION


0 2017. 07. 10 Y.J.KMI
3 of 3
for DRYER PACKAGE
MODEL No.
MAKER
MT8102IE
29 TOUCH SCREEN 10" 1 ea
WEINTEK
TPP4-110/NCT
30 SCR 110A 1 ea
PARA ENT
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

카운터 / 타이머 Counter / Timer
GE Series
디지털 배치카운터
배치기능
NPN/PNP 입력 선택
프리스케일 설정
소수점 4자리 표시 C
Off set 설정 카운터/타이머
2점입력간 가산, 감산표시
형명구성
형명 코드 내 용
GE - 디지털 배치카운터
3 96X48X107.6 ㎜
4 48X48X79.3 ㎜
외형(㎜)
6 72X36X81.0 ㎜
7 72X72X87.0 ㎜
P 프리셋카운터
종 류
T 토털카운터
4 4행표시(9999) ※ GE3, GE7 선택 불가
표시행수
6 6행표시(999,999)
1 1단 설정
설정단수
2 2단 설정
A 100 - 240 V a.c. 50 - 60 ㎐
전원전압
D 24 - 60 V d.c/a.c 겸용
사양
입력
1 cps, 30 cps, 1 Kcps, 10 Kcps
입 력 계 수 속 도
(ON/OFF비 : 1 : 1,“H”
레벨 : 4 - 30 V d.c,“L”
레벨 : 0 - 2 V d.c)
계 수 입 력 접점입력, 전압입력, 무접점입력
리 셋 전원리셋, 자동리셋, 외부리셋 (0.1㎳, 1㎳, 20㎳)
노이즈시뮬레이터에 의한 방형파 노이즈 (16 ㎳ 마다 1 ㎲ 펄스)
내 노 이 즈
±2 ㎸ (전원단자-입력단자 간)
절 연 저 항 100 MΩ 이상 (500 V d.c) 도전부단자-비충전금속
내 전 압 2000 V a.c. 60 ㎐. 1분간 (서로다른 충전부 단자)
C 6 7
카운터 / 타이머 Counter / Timer
기능
입 력 동 작 가산, 감산, 가ㆍ감산 (내부 파라미터에 의한 선택)
출 력 동 작 N, F, C, R, K, P, Q, A (내부 파라미터에 의한 선택)
입 력 신 호 방 식 점점, 무접점 (입력 신호전압의“H”
,”L”
에 의한 입력)
배치기능( B a t c h ) OUT(OUT2)출력 동작 횟수를 계수, 출력한다
C 계수값설정인식
정 전 기 억 기 능
표 시 행 수
상시인식 (통전중에도 설정변경 가능)
10년 (불휘발성 메모리 사용)
4행 (9999) / 6행 (999999)
카운터/타이머
설 정 단 수 1단/2단
ONE SHOT 출력 0.01 ~ 99.99 초 (Out, Out1, Out2 개별설정)
외부공급전원
전원전압 구분 GE4 GE6 GE3 GE7
100 - 240 V a.c 12 V d.c, 200 ㎃ Max
24 - 60 V d.c/a.c 12 V d.c, 100 ㎃ Max
문자표시
형명 GE4 GE6 GE3 GE7
표시문자 7세그먼트 LED
문자높이 계수값(P.V) 11 11 13 13
(㎜) 설정값(S.V) 8 8 10 10
제어출력
형명 GE4 GE6 GE3 GE7

1단 1c (OUT) 1a (OUT) 1c (OUT)
유접점 2단 1a (OUT 1), 1c (OUT 2)
용량 a접점 : 250 V a.c. 3 A (저항부하), b접점 : 250 V a.c 2A
1단 NPN 2점 (OUT, BAT.O)
무접점 2단 - - NPN 2점 (OUT 1, OUT 2)
용량 오픈컬렉터, 30 V d.c, 100 ㎃ Max.
※ BAT.O : Batch-out
자동제어 계측분야의 기술 선도기업

NX7 디지탈온도조절계
입력・출력 멀티기능의 ±0.5 class 250ms 고정도화 실현

● 퍼지(Fuzzy)제어기능
● 자동연산
● Zone PID
● 입・출력 멀티
● 외부접점 입력
● 프로그램 제어
● 가열 / 냉각제어
● 센서구동용 전원
● 입력단선시 출력량 설정
● 통신기능 (RS485 / 422)
● 설정값 (SV) 3단 외부선택
● 히타단선경보 (HBA)
● 보호구조 (IP65, 단, 전면에 한함)
1. 형명구성
NX7–
형 명 : 72×72 mm
디지탈온도지시조절계
제어타입 0 : 일반형
1 : 가열 / 냉각형
선택사양 0 : 없슴
1 : RS485 / HBA 1점
2 : SV2, SV3 / HBA
2. 외형 및 판넬가공치수
판넬가공치수
단위: mm
59
NX7 디지탈온도조절계
3. 외부결선도
선택사양 선택사양 1 선택사양 2
기본사양
기본사양
4. 전류검출기
■모델명: C T L - 6 - P ■모델명: C T L - 6 - S
(단위: mm)
60
Model : GL-2L
Panel Mounting Digital Indicator
Advantages
General Description
● Accepts Current or Multi (Current RTD,
Voltage, Thermocouple and mV/V) inputs.
● Analog output signals : 4~20mA, DC
● Display ranges : 4 digit - 9999~9999
● Built-in transmitter power supply 24V DC
● Red LED display unit
Applications The GL-2L panel mounting digital indicator is designed to

accept pressure or temperature transmitters and similar
A wide range of application for industrial sensors providing current or voltage output signals. It is
and commercial application where the an all new universal panel meter that handles all the
visual reading of the field instruments common process display applications with simplicity,
and monitoring reliability, accuracy and ease. The meter's universal
power supply allows it to be powered 110 AC or 220
AC, and it can also be powered from 24V DC as an
option.
Front panel description
① No. 1 alarm lamp ⑥ Set key

② No. 2 alarm lamp ⑦ Data shift key
www.wisesensor.com ③ PV Display windows ⑧ Data Increasing key
④ Display unit ⑨ Minus sign
⑤ Mode selecting key
Input
Technical Data
Thermocouple K, J, E, T, R
RTD PT 100, JIS PT100
Current 4 ~20mA DC
Voltage 1~5V DC
Unamplified mV/V or other input signals available on
request
Output
Alarm contacts 2 alarm contacts
4 alarm contacts optional
Current 4~20mA , DC optional
Load resistance : 0~750Ω
Impedance : greater than 5㏁
Display Principle : 7-segment red LED, 17mm high
Range : 4 digit -9999~9999
Performance Specifications
Accuracy ±0.2% full scale resolution
Scanning time 0.2 sec. For Current and Voltage input.
0.4 sec. For Thermocouple and RTD input.
Power supply 50 or 60Hz, 110/220V AC or 24V DC(Optional)
Voltage fluctuation ±10%
Data backup EEPROM
Ambient operating temperature -10 ~ 60℃, 10 ~ 90% RH
Storage temperature range -20 ~ 70℃, 5 ~ 95% RH
Temperature coefficient 0.02% / ℃
Insulation resistance 100㏁ with 500V DC
Scaling adjustment Menu driven, Zero & span fully adjustable -9999 to 9999
Physical Specifications
Wiring Screw terminals : max. 2.5mm2
Dimension 48(H) × 96(W) × 113(D) mm
Panel cutout 93 × 45mm
Mounting DIN 4896 panel cutout required, 2 panel mounting brackets
& gasket provide
Weight Approx. 500 Including all extras
Options
Analog output 4~20mA DC
4 alarm contacts
Other options available on request
Note
Ordering Information
GL-2L Digital indicator

S Input type Current only
M Multi inputs
1 Input siginal Current (4 ~ 20mA, DC)
2 Multi (Current, RTD,
Thermocpuples, and Voltage )
X Other input signals available on request
5 Display range -9999 ~ 9999
A Power supply AC 110V ~ 220V

D DC 24V
N Alarm output None
A H/L 2 points
B HH/H/LL/L 4 points
N Analog output None

C 4 ~ 20mA DC
X Other signals available on request
GL-2L S 1 6 A A N Sample ordering code

Specifications subject to change without notice.
WISE SENSOR INC.

#199 Sanggal-Ri, Kiheung-Eup, Yongin-City, Kyunggi-Do, Korea
(TEL) +82-31-287-3337, (FAX) +82-31-287-3339, E-mail : [email protected], http://www.wisesensor.com
WISE CONTROL INC.

110 Plant Avenue Wayne, PA 19087 USA
(TEL) 610-989-9190, (FAX) 610-989-9121, E-mail : [email protected], http://www.wisecontrolinc.com
Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram Electrical connection
Side view
Panel Cutout
Full Control at Your Finger Tips
Digital Indicating Controllers

UT55A/UT52A/UT35A/UT32A
Program Controllers
UP55A/UP35A
Digital Indicator with Alarms
UM33A Bulletin 05P01A01-01EN
www.utadvanced.com
INTRODUCING THE
Balancing Simplicity and Power

The UTAdvanced was designed as a result of
knowledge obtained in Yokogawa’s fifty plus years
of experience in the control market. Significant
changes in the market are setting the tone for the
future and Yokogawa will be leading the way meeting
the challenging needs of the control segment.
Balancing an easy to use controller with the power
to handle your most challenging applications, that’s
the UTAdvanced.
2
features
Advanced Control
PID Control — 8 Built-in Control Modes
— 8 Built-in Control Types
Ladder Sequence Control
Fuzzy Logic Control
Simplicity
Bright & Easy to Read Active Color LCD Display
Scrolling Text
Navigation Guide & Navigation Keys
Programmable Function Keys
User Settable Default Values
Multiple Language Support
Compact Design
Networking
Ethernet (Modbus/TCP)
RS-485 (Modbus/RTU, Peer to Peer, Coordinated Operation, PC-Link)
Open Network (PROFIBUS-DP, CC-Link, DeviceNet)
CSA C22.2 61010-1
172608
Reliability
3 Year Warranty *Note 1
RoHS/WEEE
UL61010-1
NEMA4*Note 2 /IP56 Front Panel
Note 1 : The 3 year warranty extends 36 months after shipment from our factory.
Note 2 : Hose down test only.
3
advanced Control
8 Built-in Control Modes

The control mode allows easily configuring settings and making changes with parameters.
• Single-loop control
PV auto-selector PV switching Cascade control Loop control for backup
• Cascade primary-loop control
• Cascade secondary-loop control
• Cascade control SELECT PID PID
• Loop control for backup
• Loop control with PV switching PID PID PID
• Loop control with PV auto-selector
• Control with PV-hold function
8 Built-in Control Types Output(%)

100 SP
• PID control
• ON/OFF control (1 point of hysteresis) PV
Cooling-side Heating-side Integral action
• ON/OFF control (2 points of hysteresis) output output P+I
• Two-position, two-level control
OUT Output held Output held
• Heating/cooling control 0
• Sample PI control Time
• Batch PID control Dead band Control start point
• Feedforward control Heating / cooling control Sample PI control
For the correspondence between the above control mode and control types for each model, please refer to the specifications of each model.
Ladder Sequence Control

Ladder sequence Control
With built-in ladder sequence control, the range of applications
are dramatically increased. This feature is standard in all the Temperature PV>SP DI2 OFF: Control stop Timer time out
UTAdvanced controllers (except UM33A). The ladder sequence Timer start Control stop
control function can replace a small PLC required by the application.
Sequence control and PID control can be performed simultaneously. SP
• Monitoring and control of external machinery
Eg. Lamps, switches, timers PV Hardening time
• Solve digital input / output logic functionality easily.
Number of basic instruction types : 13
Number of application instruction types : 73 PV in control stop
Name Symbol Time
DI2 ON: Control start
PV in time out
Load
X_DI2
SET M01
Set SET
Control start relay Control start flag
RST S. R
Timer TIM
Control run mode
M01
CNT
PV SP SET M02
Counter Control start flag PV>SP flag
M02
TIM CLK1 TIM1 K1
Compare > Hardening timer
X_DI2
RST M01
Logic & =
Control stop relay Control start flag
TIM1
Data transfer MOV RST TIM1
Quenching timer Hardening timer
High selector HSL

RST M02
PV>SP flag
Temperature correction TCMP1 SET S. R
X_DI2: DI2
Control stop mode
M01 to M02: Internal relay
* LL50A Parameter Setting Software (sold separately) is required to build
K1: 3600
functions.
4
Application Examples of Ladder Sequence Program
n Alarm Sequence Control Circuits Can be Reduced
The ladder sequence program is built in the UTAdvanced as standard. The ladder sequence function enables monitoring and
controlling peripheral devices such as relays, thus making it possible to reduce costs.
Conventional UTAdvanced
Example: Alarm annunciator
Alarm action was built by a sequence Alarm action is built by the ladder Action explanation
control circuit (relay, timer, etc.) sequence program inside the UTAd- • Lamp blinks when alarm occurs
outside of the controller. vanced, thus making it possible to • Lamp turns on by acknowledgment
reduce costs. when alarm is on
Alarm • Lamp turns off by acknowledgment
sequence when alarm is off
control Alarm acknowledgment by function key
circuit
Time Chart Alarm Ladder
Sequence Program
Alarm Alarm Alarm occurs Alarm occurs
ladder status SET M01
(AL1.ST)
sequence AL1.ST
program Blinks Turns off Blinks Turns off

RST M01
Lamp Acknowledgment button
output
Cost Acknowledgment M01 1-sec flag Lamp output

down button
operation Acknowledgment
Acknowledgment AL1.ST M01
n Host System Load is Reduced

Conventional UTAdvanced
Action: Various types of analog data were captured into the
host system (PLC, etc.) and calculated, and the results were PV
Communication
processed by the field controller for control via a command. Host
system OUT
PV
Communication
Host
system OUT The UTAdvanced with up to 4 analog inputs* enables various types of
Merit analog data to be captured directly into the controller and calculated by
the ladder program, thus reducing the system-building load of the host.
Fuzzy Logic
n SUPER Function suppresses overshoot
The field-proven SUPER function utilizes a
built-in operator experience and fuzzy theory to
SUPER:off
Fuzzy Logic
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
deliver fine control and suppress overshoot. SUPER: on SUPER:on SUPER:on

• When wishing to suppress overshoot
• When wishing to reduce the startup time
• When load changes are significant Time Time Time
• When setpoint is changed frequently Startup Program operation Disturbance
n SUPER2 Function suppresses hunting

The new SUPER2 function utilizes a built-in operator experience and modern control theory to deliver fine control and suppress hunting.
Effect 1 : Material change or load change with the same PID. Effect 2 : Setpoint (SP) change with the same PID.
When SUPER2 function is not used When SUPER2 function is used When SUPER2 function is not used When SUPER2 function is used
PV PV PV PV
SP PV
Control using SP Control using SP

with the set PID. with the set PID.
Operation with load causes
PV hunting Changing SP causes hunting. SUPER2 function suppresses
hunting even if SP is changed.
Time Time Time Time
5
simplicity
Digital Indicating Controller UT55A / UT52A / UT35A / UT32A
Bright & Easy to Read Active Color LCD Display

(Image of the UT55A)
PV display
Deviation indicator
DATA display
Group display
Bar graph display

Ladder operation indicator (PV, SP, OUT, DV)
Status indicator Event indicator
Optimal Display
The controller menus and layout are adjusted in accordance with the level (EASY, STD, PRO)
of information required by the user. If simple temperature or level control is needed, then select
the easy configuration. Very sophisticated applications are no problem for the UTAdvanced.
Just select the PRO setting and make use of the additional functionality shown in this mode.
Advanced applications can be programmed in the PRO setting and then changed back to the
easy setting to lock out functions not required by operators.
Active Color LCD Display Compact Design

With Yokogawa’s active color display you can instantly tell, at a glance, the The 65-mm depth of the controller
status of your process. reduces the constraints on installation
Alarm Status : Active color display changes from white (normal) to red (alarm). location.
Deviation Status : Color changes based on a PV deviation from SP.
User-defined Color : Choose between white or red display for constant readings.
65mm
6
Program Controller UP55A / UP35A
Versatile Color LCD Display

(Image of the UP55A)
PV display
Program monitor display
Group display Data display

(Program pattern number display)
Segment number
Ladder operation indicator Bar graph display

(Event, Alarm)
Status indicator Event indicator
Operation Displays of the Program Controller

SP Display Program Pattern Display Remaining Segment-time Display Remaining Repetition Display
overview
TSP Display Program Pattern Display Segment Number Display
* The same operation displays as those of

the UT are also available.
Soak and ramp
Event Display
Alarm 1 to 4
PV event 1 to 8
Time event 1 to 16
Functions of the Program Controller

Fast-forwarding of program operation Synchronized program operation
Use this function when checking the program pattern setting. If the progress of the operation of one unit is faster, the
Only times of segments and time events can be faster. program operation can be forcibly stopped by digital input
Program pattern-2 retransmission when switching between segments. Thus, synchronized
The controller can serve as a program pattern generator. program operation can be performed.
UP55A For control Retransmission
UT55A
Progress of the operation is slower Progress of operation is faster
For retransmission Forcibly stop the operation by

digital input
Continue operation until both units
are synchronized
Control Continue the stoppage until both
units are synchronized
7
simplicity
Easy Operation Map, Navigation Guide and Navigation Keys
Operation Display Navigation Guide
DISPLAY key or DISP key
Hold down PARAMETER key or PARA key
for 3 sec.
Menu Menu Menu END
key key
SET/ENTER key PARAMETER key
or PARA key
Menu Display and
Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Setting
Display are changed in
key key key a circular pattern.
Navigation Keys
Parameter Parameter Parameter
END END END
The parameter groups can be switched using , keys.

The navigation keys is an intuitive method to navigate the controller’s configuration menus and setting its various menus.
Navigation arrows even tell you what button to push next.
Programmable Function Keys

It is easy to assign frequently used functions, such as the operation
mode switch, Run/Stop, program pattern selection, Remote/Local,
alarm latch release, and PID parameter display. The function of
an external switch can also be assigned to the front panel key in
conjunction with a ladder sequence program.
UT series UP series
Scrolling Text
The UTAdvanced is equipped with a scrolling text feature that fully
lists the parameter being modified. There is no guessing
what parameter you are looking at. It is possible to turn off scrolling
text function.
Multiple Language Support

Example : TARGET SET POINT
German French Spanish
Sollwert Valeur de consigne Punto de ajuste objetivo
The UTAdvanced is fluent in multiple languages—English, Spanish, French, and German. The use of the UTAdvanced by local
language operators is not an obstacle.
User Settable Default Values

Factory Default Parameter values (SP, P, I, D, ALM1, etc.) configured by the user can be stored in the
Initialize controller as the default values. LL50A Parameter Setting Software (sold separately) is
User Default required. Even if a parameter set value is accidentally changed, it can be restored to the
original value with a simple operation.
8
networking
Communication Functions Ethernet
A network function is built into the back RS-485
Modbus (RTU/ASCII), Peer to Peer,Coordinated, PC-Link
panel of the controller to make wiring
Open Network
simple. (PROFIBUS-DP, CC-Link, DeviceNet)
Modbus/TCP
Modbus TCP/IP, a protocol that allows the controller to DXAdvanced
connect to any Ethernet network and have the ability to
PLC
exchange data with the computers or devices on that network.
• Allows control devices to be integrated into an application simply.
• Works with any Modbus TCP/IP compliant software. Ethernet
• Support for Modbus function codes 03, 06, 08 & 16. Ethernet-serial Gateway Function
• Gateway function allows RS-485 Modbus devices to RS-485
communicate via Ethernet.
• Reduced labor costs in wiring and setup of a
communications network.
• Physical layer : 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
• Max. number of connection : 2
Modbus/RTU Peer to Peer

The data of UTAdvanced (slave units) can be displayed and The use of the ladder sequence program makes it possible
saved on the DXAdvanced using the Modbus RTU function. to exchange analog data and status data between
Modbus master communication-capable UTs.
Example: A UT in which an input error occurs sends a signal to another UT to
enable that UT switch to MAN operation, thus shifting the whole system into
a safe mode. In such a case, the safety mechanism can be built into the UT
Advanced and is not required in the host system.
DXAdvanced RS-485
RS-485
Power monitor
PR300
Modbus slave units 1 2 4 15 32
Up to 4 master units, total 32 units
Coordinated Operation
In coordinated operation, a single UTAdvanced controller is Open Network
used as a master controller and multiple UTAdvanced or other (PROFIBUS-DP, CC-Link, DeviceNet)
UT digital indicating controllers as slave controllers.
The slave controllers are operated in accordance with the Embedded open networks will provide direct connection to PLC’s.
actions of the master controller. • Reads data from UTAdvanced
• Writes parameter setting value to UTAdvanced
UTAdvanced, UT/UP Series controller
PLC
RS-485
PROFIBUS-DP
Up to 31 slave units Modbus
PC-Link • FA-M3R, Daqstation and DXAdvanced are registered trademark of Yokogawa

Electric Corporation.
A protocol used for communicating with a general- • Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• Modbus is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.
purpose personal computer, or UT link module and serial • PROFIBUS-DP is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS User Organization.
communication module of FA-M3R (range-free controller). • CC-Link is a registered trademark of CC-Link Partner Association (CLPA.)
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vender Association, Inc.
9
product line-up
Digital Indicating Controller UT55A / UT52A / UT35A / UT32A
Model UT55A UT52A UT35A UT32A

1/4 DIN ✔ — ✔ —
Size 1/8 DIN — ✔ — ✔
Depth from the panel surface (mm) 65 65 65 65
Control Scan Period (msec) Choice 50/100/200 Choice 50/100/200 200 200
Number of PV Display Digits 5 5 5 5
Active Color PV Display Function ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Display Function Guide Scroll Display Function ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Message Display Function ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Bar graph display (Number) ✔ (2) ✔ (2) ✔ (1) ✔ (1)
PV Input Indication Accuracy (% of F.S.) 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
TC ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
RTD (3-wire) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
PV Input Type RTD (4-wire) ✔ ✔ — —
mV, V ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
mA ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Number of Analog Inputs Standard (Maximum) 1 (4) 1 (2) 1 1
Number of SPs (PIDs) Maximum 8 8 4 4
Number of Control Modes Maximum 8 8 1 1
Number of Control Types Maximum 8 8 5 5
Relay Contact Output, Voltage
Type ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
pulse output, Current output
ON/OFF ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Control Output
PID (Continuance, Time Proportion) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Algorithm
Position proportional ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Heating / cooling ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Number of Analog Outputs Standard (Maximum) 2 (3) 2 (3) 2 2
Number of Digital Inputs Standard (Maximum) 3 (9) 3 (5) 2 (7) 2 (4)
Number of Alarms 8 8 4 4
Number of Digital Outputs Standard (Maximum) 3 (18) 3 (5) 3 (8) 3 (5)
RS-485 communication (Maximum) ✔ (2) ✔ (1) ✔ (1) ✔ (1)
Ethernet communication ✔ — ✔ —
Communication
Open Network (CC-Link/PROFIBUS-DP
✔ — ✔ —
/DeviceNet)
Quick Setting Function ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Split Computation Output Function ✔ ✔ — —
Ratio and Square Root Extraction Function ✔ ✔ — —
Various Function Remote SP Function ✔ ✔ — —
24 V DC Loop Power Supply Function ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ (Standard type or ✔ (Standard type or
Heater Break Alarm Function ✔ (Standard type) ✔ (Standard type)
Heating/cooling type) Heating/cooling type)
Ladder Sequence Function (Number of max. steps) ✔ (500) ✔ (500) ✔ (300) ✔ (300)
Power AC100 V to 240 V ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Supply AC/DC 24 V ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Dust and waterproof Level of Front Panel NEMA4*1 (IP56) NEMA4*1 (IP56) NEMA4*1 (IP56) NEMA4*1 (IP56)
Other Specifications Via Light-loader Communication ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Via Maintenance Port
Configuration ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Communication
Tool
Via RS-485/Ethernet
✔/✔ ✔/— ✔/✔ ✔/—
communication
The table above includes specifications of the standard models only.
* 1: Hose down test only.
Input Range
Input type
K, J, T, B, S, R, N, E, L, U, W
TC
PL-2, PR20-40, W97Re3-W75Re25
RTD JPt100, Pt100
DC Voltage 0.4 to 2.0 V, 1.0 to 5.0 V, 0.0 to 2.0 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 20 mV, 0 to 100 mV
DC Current 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA
10
Program Controller UP55A / UP35A, Digital Indicator with Alarms UM33A
Model UP55A UP35A UM33A

1/4 DIN ✔ ✔ —
Size 1/8 DIN — — ✔
Depth from the panel surface (mm) 65 65 65
Control Scan Period (msec) Choice 100/200 200 Choice 50/100/200
Number of PV Display Digits 5 5 5
Active Color PV Display Function ✔ ✔ ✔
Display Function Guide Scroll Display Function ✔ ✔ ✔
Message Display Function ✔ ✔ ✔
Bar graph display (Number) ✔ (2) ✔ (1) —
PV Input Indication Accuracy (% of F.S.) 0.1 0.1 0.1
TC ✔ ✔ ✔
RTD (3-wire) ✔ ✔ ✔
PV Input Type RTD (4-wire) ✔ — —
mV, V ✔ ✔ ✔
mA ✔ ✔ ✔
Number of Analog Inputs Standard (Maximum) 1 (4) 1 1
Number of SPs (PIDs) Fixed 8 4 —
Number of Control Modes Maximum 5 1 —
Number of Control Types Maximum 4 4 —
Relay Contact Output, Voltage
Type ✔ ✔ —
pulse output, Current output
ON/OFF ✔ ✔ —
Control Output
PID (Continuance, Time Proportion) ✔ ✔ —
Algorithm
Position proportional ✔ ✔ —
Heating / cooling ✔ ✔ —
Number of Analog Outputs Standard (Maximum) 2 (3) 2 1
Number of Digital Inputs Standard (Maximum) 8 (9) 3 (8) 2
Number of Program Patterns Standard (Maximum) 30 2 (4) —
Number of Programs
300 20 (40)
Number of Segments per Standard (Maximum) —
99 10
Pattern
Number of PV Events (Per segment) 8 2 —
Number of Time Events (Per segment) 16 4 —
Number of Alarms Maximum 8 2 8
Number of Digital OutputsStandard (Maximum) 8 (18) 3 (8) 3 (9)
RS-485 communication (Maximum) ✔ (2) ✔ (1) ✔ (1)
Ethernet communication ✔ ✔ —
Communication
Open Network (CC-Link/PROFIBUS-DP
✔ ✔ —
/DeviceNet)
Quick Setting Function ✔ ✔ ✔
Split Computation Output Function ✔ — ✔
Ratio and Square Root Extraction Function ✔ — ✔ *3
Various Function
Remote SP Function ✔ — ✔
24 V DC Loop Power Supply Function ✔ *2 ✔ *2 ✔
Heater Break Alarm Function ✔ (Standard type) ✔ (Standard type) —
Ladder Sequence Function (Number of max. steps) ✔ (500) ✔ (300) —
Power AC100 V to 240 V ✔ ✔ ✔
Supply AC/DC 24 V ✔ ✔ ✔
Dust and waterproof Level of Front Panel NEMA4*1 (IP56) NEMA4*1 (IP56) NEMA4*1 (IP56)
Other Specifications Via Light-loader Communication ✔ ✔ ✔
Via Maintenance Port
Configuration ✔ ✔ ✔
Communication
Tool
Via RS-485/Ethernet
✔/✔ ✔/✔ ✔/—
communication
The table above includes specifications of the standard models only.
* 1: Hose down test only.
* 2: This function is available when the /L4 or /LC4 option is specified with the detailed code model.
* 3: Square root extraction available
11
product line-up
Digital Indicating Controller UT55A / UT52A (Standard model)
Model and Suffix Codes
Model Suffix code Optional Description
suffix code
Digital Indicating Controller (provided with retransmission output or 15 V DC loop
UT55A
power supply, 3 DIs, and 3 DOs) (Power supply: 100-240 V AC)
-0 Standard type
Basic control -1 Position proportional type
-2 Heating / cooling type
0 None
Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input, 6 additional DIs, 5 additional DOs,
1
and RS-485 communication (Max.19.2 kbps, 2-wire / 4-wire) (* 2)
Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input, 1 additional DI,
2
Functions and RS-485 communication (Max.19.2 kpbs, 2-wire / 4-wire) (* 2)
(* 1) 3 5 additional DIs and 5 additional DOs
4 Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input and 1 additional DI
5 Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input, 6 additional DIs, and 5 additional DOs
6 5 additional DIs and 15 additional DOs
Main Features 7 3 additional aux. analog inputs and 3 additional DIs
0 None
• Up to 4 analog inputs available 1 RS-485 communication (Max.38.4 kbps, 2-wire / 4-wire)
2 Ethernet communication (with serial gateway function)
• 3 alarm independent common terminals Open networks
3 CC-Link communication (with Modbus master function)
4 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function)
available as standard 5 DeviceNet communication (with Modbus master function)
• Ladder sequence programs can be built -1 English
-2 German
• Simple operation Display language (* 7)
-3 French
• Up to 18 DOs (combinations available) -4
0
Spanish
White (Light gray)
Case color
• Multiple language operation manual 1 Black (Light charcoal gray)
-00 Always “-00”
(Japanese, English, German, French, Additional direct input (TC and 3-wire / 4-wire RTD) and DC current to Remote (1
/DR
Spanish, Chinese, and Korean) available. /LP
additional aux. analog) input, 1 DI to be deleted (* 3)
24 V DC loop power supply (* 4)
Please specify the desired language when ordering. Options /HA Heater break alarm (* 5)
/DC Power supply 24 V AC / DC
External Dimensions /CT Coating (* 6)
* 1: When “1” or “6” is specified for the Functions code, only “0” can be specified for the Open networks code.
* 2: When the /LP option is specified, the RS-485 communication is 2-wire system.
UT52A UT55A Unit : mm * 3: When any of “1,” “2,” “4,” “5,” or “7” is specified for the Functions code, the /DR option can be specified.
* 4: /LP option can be specified in the combination of Functions code (any of "0", "2", "3" or "4") and Open networks code (any of "0" or "1"). Additionally, /LP
48 96
option can be specified in the combination of Functions code "1" and Open networks code "0".
* 5: When “-0” is specified for the Basic control code, the / HA option can be specified.
* 6: When the /CT option is specified, the UT55A does not conform to the safety standards (UL and CSA) and CE marking.
* 7: English, German, French, and Spanish can be displayed as the guide display.

suffix code
UT52A
-0 Standard type
96
96

0 None
Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input, 1 additional DI, and RS-485 communication
1
Functions (Max. 38.4 kbps, 2-wire)
2 Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input and 1 additional DI
11 Terminal
65 Bracket Cover Open networks 0 None
-1 English
20 -2 German
Display language (* 5)
-3 French
-4 Spanish
0 White (Light gray)
Case color
1 Black (Light charcoal gray)
105.2
-00 Always “-00”

91.6
94.6
Additional direct input (TC and 3-wire / 4-wire RTD) and DC current to Remote (1
/DR
additional aux. analog) input, 1 DI to be deleted. (* 1)
/LP 24 V DC loop power supply (* 2)
Options
/HA Heater break alarm (* 3)
/CT Coating (* 4)
Bracket * 1: When “2” is specified for the Functions code, the /DR option can be specified.
* 2: When “-0” or “-1” is specified for the Basic control code, the /LP option can be specified.
1–10mm (Panel thickness) When “0” is specified for the Functions code, the /LP option can be specified.
* 3: When “-0” is specified for the Basic control code, the /HA option can be specified.
Popular Universal I/O and Auto-Tuning Function Available

n Universal Input
Select from TC, RTD, mV / DC voltage and DC current. Thermocouple Type K, J, T, B, S, R, N, E, L, U, W, PL-2,
(Direct connection : No shunt resistor required) PR20-40, W97Re3-W75Re25
The input type and range is user selectable via the front panel or by using the RTD Type Pt100, JPt100
LL50A parameter setting software. DC Voltage Input 0.4 to 2V, 1 to 5V, 0 to 2V, 0 to 10V,
• 0.1% Indication Accuracy -10 to 20mV, 0 to 100mV
• Connect up to two 2-wire transmitters simultaneously DC Current Input 4 to 20mA, 0 to 20mA
All instruments have a 15 V Loop Power Supply (15 V LPS) for a transmitter.
In addition, a 24 V LPS is also available simultaneously for some instruments as optional function.
Applicable models for 24 V LPS: UT55A, UT52A
TC Position proportional control for Control motor
mV 4 to 20 mA current Room UT52A
V temperature
mA
Voltage pulse
RTD
Relay contact Motor drive
Position On/Off outputs
Model : EJX 2-wire Motor operated valve feedback
transmitter slide wire
Control motor
Universal Inputs Universal Control Outputs
12 Hot air
Digital Indicating Controller UT35A / UT32A (Standard model)
suffix code
UT35A
-0 Standard type
0 None
Functions 1 2 additional DIs and 2 additional DOs
0 None
1 RS-485 communication (Max.38.4 kbps, 2-wire / 4-wire)
Open networks
4 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function)
Main Features 5
-1
DeviceNet communication (with Modbus master function)
English
• 4 target setpoints (PID numbers) -2 German
Display language (*1)
-3 French
available as standard -4 Spanish
• 3 alarm independent common terminals Case color
available as standard -00 Always “-00”
• Ladder sequence programs can be built /HA Heater break alarm (* 3)
Options
• Simple operation /DC Power supply 24 V AC / DC
/CT Coating (* 4)
• Up to 8 DOs (combinations available) * 1: English, German, French, and Spanish can be displayed as the guide display.
• Multiple language operation manual * 2: The /LP option can be specified in combination with function code "0" or "1" and open network code "0" or "1."
* 3: The /HA option can be specified when basic control code is "-0" or "-2."
(Japanese, English, German, French, * 4: When the /CT option is specified, the UT35A does not conform to the safety standards (UL and CSA) and CE marking.
Spanish, Chinese, and Korean) available. Optional
Please specify the desired language when ordering. Model Suffix code suffix code Description
UT32A
External Dimensions -0
Standard type
UT32A UT35A Unit : mm -2 Heating / cooling type
0 None
48 96 Functions 1 RS-485 communication (Max.38.4 kbps, 2-wire / 4-wire) (* 2)
Open networks 0 None
-1 English
-2 German
-3 French
-4 Spanish
96
96
Case color
-00 Always “-00”
/HA Heater break alarm (* 3)
Options
/CT Coating (* 4)
11 * 1: English, German, French, and Spanish can be displayed as the guide display.
65 Bracket * 2: The /LP option can be specified in combination with basic control code “-0” or “-1” and function code “0” or “1.” Futhermore, when the function code is “1,”
the RS-485 communication is 2-wire system.
* 3: The /HA option can be specified when basic control code is “-0” or “-2.”
Sold separately (Accessory)

105.2
91.6
94.6
Model Name Model Note

UTAP001 For UT55A/UT35A/UP55A/UP35A
Terminal Cover
UTAP002 For UT52A/UT32A/UM33A
User’s Manual (CD-ROM) UTAP003
Bracket
1–10mm (Panel thickness)
n Universal Output n Auto-Tuning (AT) Function

User selectable for Relay, Voltage Pulse and Current outputs. The following conditions can be set in order to
• Relay output: ON/OFF control, Time-proportional PID control increase the accuracy of calculating PID constants
• Voltage Pulse output: Time-proportional PID control using AT .
• Current output: Continuous PID control 1) Two types of algorithms to calculate PID constants
are available for selection.
Heating/Cooling Control has two sets of universal outputs.
Normal: Fast-rising PID constant
• Any combinations of Relay, Pulse and Current outputs are available.
Stable: Slow-rising PID constant
Drive a Motorized Control Valve by using Position-Proportional PID. 2) High and low output limits can be set individually for
• The position-proportional PID control function has two sets of relay outputs for control output values during AT runtime.
direct / reverse rotation of motorized control valve.
• The slide wire input to feed back the valve position is also available.
13
product line-up
Program Controller UP55A (Standard model)
Optional
Model Suffix code Description
suffix code
Program Controller (provided with retransmission output or 15 V DC
loop power supply, 8 DIs, and 8 DOs) (Power supply: 100-240 V AC)
UP55A
30 program patterns / 300 program segments (Max. 99 segments
per pattern)
-0 Standard type
Main Features -2 Heating/cooling type
0 None
• Up to 30 program patterns 1 Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input, 1 additional DI
• 8 PV events, 16 time events, and 8 alarms Functions (*1) 2 RS-485 communication (Max.19.2 kpbs, 2-wire/4-wire)
can be monitored simultaneously 3 10 additional DOs
• Ladder sequence programs can be built 4 3 additional aux. analog inputs, 2 DIs and 5 DOs to be deleted
• Simple operation 0 None
• Up to 9 DIs and 18 DOs (combinations 1 RS-485 communication (Max.38.4 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire)
available) Open networks
• Multiple language operation manual 4 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function)
(Japanese, English, German, French, 5 DeviceNet communication (with Modbus master function)
Spanish, Chinese, and Korean) available. -1 English
Please specify the desired language when ordering. -2 German
-3 French
External Dimensions -4 Spanish
UT55A Unit : mm Case color
11 Terminal Fixed code -00 Always “-00”
96 65 Bracket Cover
Additional direct input (TC and 3-wire/4-wire RTD) and current input
20 /DR
to Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input, 1 DI to be deleted (*3)
Optional suffix codes /HA Heater break alarm (*4)
/DC Power supply 24 V AC/DC
/CT Coating (*5)
105.2
91.6
94.6
96
* 1: When “3” is specified for the Function code, only “0” can be specified for the Open network code.
* 3: When any of “1” or “4” is specified for the Function code, the /DR option can be specified.
* 4: When “-0” is specified for the Basic control code, the /HA option can be specified.
* 5: When the /CT option is specified, the UP55A does not conform to the safety standards (UL and CSA) and CE marking.
Bracket
Program Controller UP35A (Standard model)

Optional
suffix code
Program Controller (provided with retransmission output or 15 V DC
loop power supply, 3 DIs, and 3 DOs) (Power supply: 100-240 V AC)
UP35A
2 program patterns/20 program segments (Max. 20 segments per
pattern)
-0 Standard type
Main Features -2 Heating/cooling type
0 None
• Up to 4 program patterns Functions
1 5 additional DIs, 5 additional DOs
• 2 PV events, 4 time events, and 2 alarms can 0 None
be monitored simultaneously. 1 RS-485 communication (Max.38.4 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire)
• Ladder sequence programs can be built 2 Ethernet communication (with serial gateway function)
Open networks
• Simple operation 4 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function)
• Up to 8 DIs and 8 DOs (combinations available) 5 DeviceNet communication (with Modbus master function)
• Multiple language operation manual -1 English
(Japanese, English, German, French, Display language (*1)
-2 German
Spanish, Chinese, and Korean) available. -3 French
Please specify the desired language when ordering. -4 Spanish
Case color
External Dimensions Fixed code -00 Always “-00”
UT35A Unit : mm /AP 2 additional patterns/20 additional segments
11 /HA Heater break alarm (*2)
96 65 Terminal Optional suffix codes
Bracket Cover /DC Power supply 24 V AC/DC
20 /CT Coating (*3)
* 2: The /HA option can be specified when the Basic control code is "-0" or "-2."
* 3: When the /CT option is specified, the UP35A does not conform to the safety standards (UL and CSA) and CE marking.
105.2
91.6
94.6
96
Bracket
14
Digital Indicator with Alarms UM33A (Standard model)
Optional
suffix code
Digital Indicator with Alarms (provided with retransmission output
UM33A or 15 V DC loop power supply, 2 DIs, and 3 DOs) (Power supply:
Main Features 100-240 V AC)
• Up to 9 alarm outputs (including one Fail) Basic control -0 Standard type
0 None
• Input correction function (PV bias, polygonal
1 additional DO (c-contact relay), RS-485 communication (Max. 38.4
line approximation, polygonal line bias) 1
kbps, 2-wire/4-wire)
Functions
• 24 VDC sensor power supply available 2 1 additional DO (c-contact relay)
• Simple operation 3
6 additional DOs (c-contact relay; 1 point and open collector; 5
points)
• Multiple language operation manual
Open networks 0 None
(Japanese, English, German, French, -1 English
Spanish, Chinese, and Korean) available. -2 German
Please specify the desired language when ordering. Display language (*1)
-3 French
-4 Spanish
External Dimensions Case color
UM33A Unit : mm
/LP 24 V DC loop power supply (*2)
105.2 Optional suffix codes /DC Power supply 24 V AC/DC
94.6 /CT Coating (*3)
Terminal cover
91.6 * 1: English, German, French, and Spanish can be displayed as the guide display.
* 2: T
he /LP option can be specified only when the code for Function is “0”, “1” or “2” Additionally, the RS-485
communication for “1” of the Function code is 2-wire system.
20
* 3: When the /CT option is specified, the UM33A does not conform to the safety standards (UL and CSA) and CE marking.
Bracket
Bracket
65
11
1 to 10
96 (panel thickness)
48
Other Convenient Functions Available
n Parameter Setting n Message Function

LL50A Parameter Setting Software (sold separately) allows for Using the message function and turning the contact input on/
easily setting parameters. off, the message registered beforehand can be displayed on PV
To USB terminal display by interrupt.
The message is registered using LL50A Parameter Setting Software.
Draft The messages are limited to 20 alphanumeric characters. A
maximum of four messages can be registered.
LL50A Parameter Operation Display
Dedicated cable Setting Software
n Quick Setting Function

Minimum parameters necessary for operation can be set.
n Security Function
The password function can prevent inadvertent changes to the
CLOSE VALVE
parameter settings. If a password is set, the password is required
When the contact input
when moving to the Setup Parameter Setting Display. When the is turned on, the scrolling
password is verified, can be changed to the Setup Parameter message registered
beforehand is displayed
Setting Display. on PV Display.
15
Customize
The detailed code model allows you to
customize specifications best suited to you.
Detailed model code – Control output individual selection
– Option selection
Standard specifications – One Universal input
– Three digital inputs/outputs (Alarms) * Note 1
Note 1: UT35A, UT32A: 2 points
Additional Functions Terminal Positions when

n Triac output can be selected in Control Additional Functions are Added
Output: -T / - T The positions of extended terminal areas E1 to E4 are shown
ITEM Specification below.
Contact type zero-cross Please note that although the additional Functions are the same,
Load voltage 75 to 250 V
Contact the mount positions are different.
Allowable 0.8 A (at an ambient temperature of 25°C)
capacity Example: When 5 DIs are added in the UT55A, the positions of
load current 0.3 A (at an ambient temperature of 50°C)
Application Time proportional control output the terminals to be mounted are different between /X1 (E1 area)
Time resolution of 1/commercial frequency (sec) and /X2 (E2 area) as shown below.
control output or 0.1% of the output value, whichever greater
Terminal arrangement of Terminal arrangement of
UT55A/UT35A/UP55A/UP35A UT52A/UT32A
n 2 DIs and 2 DOs combination specs can E4 terminal area E1 terminal area E1 terminal area
be selected: /W 101 501 301 201 101 301 201

102 502 302 202 102 302 202
The electrical specifications Example : E1 terminal area option /W1
103 503 303 203 103 303 203
are the same as DI/DO
301 COM 104 504 304 204 104 304 204
incorporated in the standard
105 505 305 205 105 305 205
model, except for the terminal
302 DI11 106 506 306 206 106 306 206
arrangement.
107 507 407 307 207 107 307 207
303 DI12 108 508 408 308 208 108 308 208
109 509 409 309 209 109 309 209
304 DO12 110 510 410 310 210 110 310 210
111 511 411 311 211 111 311 211
305 DO11 112 512 412 312 212 112 312 212
306 COM E3 terminal area E2 terminal area (UT55A/UP55A only)
16
Detailed code model
General option Extension Extension Extension Extension
Model and Suffix code Language Case color Output1 Output2 option1 option2 option3 option4
UT55A-NNN- -
Optional
suffix code
UT55A Digital Indicating Controller (provided with 3 DIs and 3 DOs) (Power supply 100-240 V AC)
Fix -N N N Always “-NNN”
-1 English Display language
-2 German Select one type.
Display language -3 French
-4 Spanish
Case color
0 White (Light gray) Case color
1 Black (Light charcoal gray) Select one type.
-A Analog output (current/pulse) Output1
Control output 1 -R Relay output (form C) Select one type.
(Heating-side, Position -U Universal output (current/pulse/relay)
proportional) (* 1) -T Triac output
-P Position proportional output
A Analog output (current/pulse) Output2
R Relay output (form C) When you perform heating/cooling control,
Control output 2
U Universal output (current/pulse/relay)
(Cooling-side) (* 1) select one type. If you select -P in Output 1,
T Triac output
N None specify N.
/DC Power supply 24 V AC/DC General option
/CT Coating (* 3) Select any options you
General option /HA Heater break alarm need.
/RT Retransmission output or 15 V DC loop power supply
/R1 Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input and 1 additional DI
/U1 1 additional universal input (TC/RTD/DCV/mA)
Extension option1
E1 terminal area option (* 2) /X1 5 additional DIs Select one type.
/Y1 5 additional DOs
/W1 2 additional DIs and 2 additional DOs
/A2 1 additional aux. analog input and 1 additional DI Extension option2
/X2 5 additional DIs Select one type.
E2 terminal area option (* 2) /Y2 5 additional DOs
/CH3 RS-485 communicaiton (Max.38.4 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire) Extension option3
/CC3 CC-Link communication (with Modbus master function)
Select one type.
/PD3 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function)
/DN3 DeviceNet communication (with Modbus master function)
E3 terminal area option (* 2) /ET3 Ethernet communication (with serial gateway function)
/X3 5 additional DIs
/C4 RS-485 communicaiton (Max.19.2 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire) Select one type.
/L4 24 V DC loop power supply
/AC4 1 additional aux. analog input, 1 additional DI, and RS-485 communicaiton (Max.19.2 kbps, 2-wire)
E4 terminal area option (* 2,4) /LC4 24 V DC loop power supply and RS-485 communication (Max.19.2 kbps, 2-wire)
* 1) For heating /cooling output, specify both Output1 and Output2.Not available when Output2 is “N”. For Position proportional output, specify “P” for Output1 and “N” for
Output2. The /HA option can be specified when the code of Output1 and Output2 is “-AN”, “-RN”, “-UN” or “-TN”.
* 2) One option can be selected from each of E1 to E4 terminal area options.
* 3) When the /CT option is specified, the UT55A does not conform to the safety standards (UL and CSA) and CE marking.
* 4) The “/L4” and “/LC4” of E4 terminal area option can be specified when E3 terminal area option is “Not select”, “/CH3,” “/X3,” “/Y3,” or “/W3”.
Detailed code model

General option Extension
Model and Suffix code Language Case color Output1 Output2 option1
UT52A-NNN- -
Optional
suffix code
Fix -N N N Always "-NNN"
-4 Spanish
Case color
proportional) (* 1 and 4) -T Triac output
Control output 2 R Relay output (form A) When you perform heating/cooling control, select
(Cooling-side) (* 1 and 4) U Universal output (current/pulse/relay)
one type. If you select -P in Output 1, specify N.
N None
General option
/CT Coating (* 3)
General option /HA Heater break alarm
Select any options you
/RT Retransmission output or 15 V DC loop power supply need.
/U1 1 additional universal input (TC/RTD/DCV/mA) Extension option1
/L1 24 V DC loop power supply Select one type.
/CH1 RS-485 communicaiton (Max.38.4kbps, 2-wire/4-wire)
E1 terminal area option (* 2, 5) /RCH1 Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input, 1 additional DI, and RS-485 communicaiton
(Max.38.4kbps, 2-wire)
/LCH1 24 V DC loop power supply and RS-485 communication (Max.38.4kbps, 2-wire)
* 1) For heating /cooling output, specify both Output1 and Output2.Not available when Output2 is “N”. For Position proportional output, specify “P” for Output1 and “N” for
Output2. The /HA option can be specified when the code of Output1 and Output2 is “-AN”, “-RN”, “-UN” or “-TN”.
* 2) One option can be selected from E1 terminal area option.
* 4) When Output1 is “R”, “U”, contact point C is changed to contact point A when Output2 is “R” or “U”. When Output1 is “T ,” only “A “ or “N” can be specified for Output2.
* 5) The “/L1” and “/LCH1” can be specified when Output2 is “N”.
17
Customize Detailed code model
General option Extension Extension Extension
Model and Suffix code Language Case color Output1 Output2 option1 option3 option4
UT35A-NNN- -
Optional
suffix code
Digital Indicating Controller (provided with 2 DIs and 3 DOs)
UT35A (Power supply 100-240 V AC)
-4 Spanish
Case color 1 Black (Light charcoal gray) Select one type.
proportional) (* 1, 2 and 4) -T Triac output
(Cooling-side) (* 1, 2, 4 and 5) U Universal output (current/pulse/relay)
N None
/CT Coating (* 3) Select any options you
General option /HA Heater break alarm (* 4) need.
/RT Retransmission output or 15 V DC loop power supply (* 5)
Extension option1
/W1 2 additional DIs and 2 additional DOs Select one type.
/CH3 RS-485 communicaiton (Max.38.4 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire)
E3 terminal area option (* 6 and 7) /PD3 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function) Extension option3
/DN3 DeviceNet communication (with Modbus master function) Select one type.
/ET3 Ethernet communication (with serial gateway function)
E4 terminal area option (* 6 and 7)

/X4 5 additional DIs Extension option4
/Y4 5 additional DOs Select one type.
* 1) For heating /cooling output, both Output 1 and Output 2 should be specified. Not available when Output 2 is “N”.
For position proportional output, specify “-P” for Output 1 and “N” for Output 2.
* 2) When the code for Output 1 is “-R” or “-U” and Output 2 is “R” or “U”, Output 1 is changed from the contact point c to the contact point a.
When the code for Output 1 is specified to “-T ,“ only “A “ or “N” is available for Output 2.
* 4) The /HA option can be specified in the combination of Output 1 and Output 2 codes execpt for “-PN”.
* 5) The /RT option can be specified only when the code for Output 2 is “R” or “N”.
* 6) Only one option is available for each terminal area of E1, E3 and E4.
* 7) The /L4 option for E4 terminal area can be specified only when the E3 terminal area option is not specified or specified /CH3.
Detailed code model

General option Extension
Model and Suffix code Language Case color Output1 Output2 option1
UT32A-NNN- -
Optional
suffix code
-4 Spanish
Case color
proportional) (* 1, 2 and 4) -T Triac output
(Cooling-side) (* 1, 2, 4 and 5) U Universal output (current/pulse/relay)
N None
General option
/CT Coating (* 3)
General option /HA Heater break alarm (* 4)
Select any options you
/RT Retransmission output or 15 V DC loop power supply (* 5) need.
/CH1 RS-485 communicaiton (Max.38.4kbps, 2-wire/4-wire) Extension option1
/LCH1 24 V DC loop power supply and RS-485 communication (Max.38.4kbps, 2-wire) Select one type.
E1 terminal area option (* 6) /X1 5 additional DIs
* 1) For heating /cooling output, both Output 1 and Output 2 should be specified. Not available when Output 2 is “N”.
For position proportional output, specify “-P” for Output 1 and “N” for Output 2.
* 2) When the code for Output 1 is “-R” or “-U” and Output 2 is “R” or “U”, Output 1 is changed from the contact point c to the contact point a.
When the code for Output 1 is specified to “-T”, only “A” or “N” is available for Output 2.
* 4) The /HA option can be specified in the combination of Output 1 and Output 2 codes execpt for “-PN.”
* 5) The /RT option can be specified only when the code for Output 2 is “R” or “N”.
* 6) Only one option is available for E1 terminal area.
The /L1 or /LCH1 option can be specified only when the code for Output 2 is “N”.
18
Detailed code model
General option Extension Extension Extension Extension
Model and Suffix code Language Case color Output1 Output2 option1 option2 option3 option4
UP55A-NNN- -
Optional
suffix code
Program Controller (provided with 3 DIs, and 3 DOs) (Power supply: 100-240 V AC)
UP55A 30 program patterns/300 program segments (Max. 99 segments per pattern)
Display language (*1) -3 French
-4 Spanish
-A Analog output (current/voltage pulse) Output1
-R Relay output (c-contact) Select one type.
Control Output 1 (*2 and 3) -U Universal output (current/voltage pulse/relay)
-T Triac output
A Analog output (current/voltage pulse) Output2
R Relay output (c-contact) When you perform heating/cooling control,
Control Output 2 (*2 and 3) U Universal output (current/voltage pulse/relay)
select one type. If you select -P in Output 1,
T Triac output
N None
specify N.
/CT Coating Select any options you
General option /HA Heater break alarm need.
/RT Retransmission output or 15 V DC power supply
/U1 1 additional universal input (TC/RTD/DCV/mA)
Extension option1
E1 terminal area option (* 4) /X1 5 additional DIs Select one type.
/X2 5 additional DIs Select one type.
/CH3 RS-485 communication (Max. 38.4 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire) Extension option3
Select one type.
/PD3 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function)
E3 terminal area option (* 4 and 5) /ET3 Ethernet communication (with serial gateway function)
/C4 RS-485 communication (Max. 19.2 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire) Select one type.
/AC4 1 additional aux. analog input, 1 additional DI, and RS-485 communication (Max.19.2 kbps, 2-wire)
E4 terminal area option (* 4 and 5) /LC4 24 V DC loop power supply and RS-485 communication (Max.19.2 kbps, 2-wire)
* 1) English, German, French, and Spanish can be displayed as the guide display.
* 2) For heating/cooling output, both Output 1 and Output 2 should be specified. Not available when Output 2 is “N.” For position proportional output, specify “-P” for Output 1 and “N” for Output 2.
* 3) The /HA option can be specified only when the code for Output 1 and 2 is “-AN”, “-RN”, “-UN” or “-TN.”
* 4) Only one option is available for each terminal area of E1 to E4.
* 5)
* 6)
The /L4 and /LC4 options for E4 terminal area can be specified only when the E3 terminal area option is not specified or specified any of /CH3, /X3, /Y3 or /W3.
When the /CT option is specified, the UP55A does not conform to the safety standards (UL and CSA) and CE marking. Detailed code model
General option Extension Extension Extension
Model and Suffix code Language Case color Output1 Output2 option1 option3 option4
UP35A-NNN- -
Optional
suffix code
Program Controller (provided with 3 DIs, and 3 DOs) (Power supply: 100-240 V AC)
UP35A 2 program patterns/20 program segments (Max. 20 segments per pattern)
Display language (*1) -3 French
-4 Spanish
-A Analog output (current/voltage pulse) Output1
-R Relay output (c-contact) Select one type.
Control Output 1 (*2, 3 and 5) -U Universal output (current/voltage pulse/relay)
-T Triac output
A Analog output (current/voltage pulse) Output2
R Relay output (a-contact) When you perform heating/cooling control, select
Control Output 2 (*2, 3, 4 and 5) U Universal output (current/voltage pulse/relay)
N None
/AP 2 additional patterns/20 additional segments
General option
Select any
General option /CT Coating
/HA Heater break alarm options you
/RT Retransmission output or 15 V DC power supply need.
/X1 5 additional DIs Extension option1
E1 terminal area (*6) /Y1 5 additional DOs Select one type.
/CH3 RS-485 communication (Max. 38.4 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire)
/CC3 CC-Link communication (with Modbus master function) Extension option3
E3 terminal area (*6 and 7) /PD3 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function)
Select one type.
/ET3 Ethernet communication (with serial gateway function)
E4 terminal area (*6 and 7) /X4 5 additional DIs Extension option4
/Y4 5 additional DOs Select one type.
*1: English, German, French, and Spanish can be displayed as the guide display.
*2: For heating/cooling output, both Output 1 and Output 2 should be specified. Not available when Output 2 is “N”. For position proportional output, specify “-P” for Output 1 and “N” for Output 2.
*3: When the code for Output 1 is “-R” or “-U” and Output 2 is “R” or “U”, Output 1 is changed from the contact point c to the contact point a. When the code for Output 1 is specified to “-T”, only “A” or “N” is available for Output 2.
*4: The /RT option can be specified only when the code for Output 2 is “R” or “N.”
*5: The /HA option can be specified in the combination of Output 1 and Output 2 codes except for “-PN.”
*6: Only one option is available for each terminal area of E1, E3 and E4.
*7: The /L4 option for E4 terminal area can be specified only when the E3 terminal area option is not specified or specified /CH3. 19
*8: When the /CT option is specified, the UP35A does not conform to the safety standards (UL and CSA) and CE marking.
configuration Tool
LL50A Parameters Setting Software
Parameter Setting/Program Tuning Function Ladder Building Functions
Pattern Creating Function Used to tune a controller’s PID Ladder sequence programs can be
Parameters that determine controller parameters. Displays measured input created and ladder programs can be
functions can easily be set: controller value, target setpoint, and control monitored.
model type, controller mode (single-loop output value as a trend graph on a
control, cascade control, loop control personal computer screen, allowing PID
with PV switching, etc.), universal input/ parameter modification, AUTO/MAN
output functions, setup parameters switching, control output modification in
and others. It also allows you to create manual operation, etc.
program patterns.
Ladder programs building display
Network Profile Creating

Function
Can be used to create an electronic
device data sheet for Open Network.
Parameters setting display Tuning display
Via Bus Powered USB Cable Via Ethernet Communication Connector

Can be set parameters while no
Ethernet
power supply to controller.
RS-485
Via Dedicated Adapter Via RS-485 Communication Terminals

Can be used while attached to the RS-485
control panel. RS-232C
• Applicable Controllers : UT55A, UT52A ML2

ML2 recommended for RS-232C/RS-485 communication
UT35A, UT32A
UP55A, UP35A Model and Suffix Code
UM33A
• Applicable OS : Windows XP / Vista Model Suffix code Description
• Communication method : USB 1.1 LL50A -00 Parameters Setting Software
UTAdvanced is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation.

Microsoft, MS, and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation A parameter conversion tool that enables GREEN series parameter data to be
in the United States and other countries. used with the LL50A is available and downloadable from the website below.
Other company names and product names appearing in this document are registered https://y-link.yokogawa.com
trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders.
Sign up for our free e-mail newsletter

www.yokogawa.com/ns/
Vig-RS-4E
Printed in Japan, 007 (KP) [Ed : 04/b]
Subject to change without notice.

All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2009, Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
고성능 설치형 노점계
모델명 : GMI3000-AMT
특 징
• 광범위한 측정 범위: -120 ℃ to +20 ℃ Dew point.
• 센서에 맞는 측정 단위 선택: °C Dew point & °F Dew point, ppm(v), ppb(v),g/m3 or lbs/MMSCF
• 전원: AC 85 ~265,45~65Hz
• 아날로그 신호출력: Linear 4-20mA output Signal
• 알람 경보 신호 출력: 릴레이 신호출력 2개
• 자동 교정기능 내장: 센서에 “AUTOCAL” 교정기능 있음.
• 빠른 응답시간과 장기간의 안정성, 온도 보상.
• 지시계 전면 IP65 / NEMA4 Weatherproof Protection
• 센서용 전원 24vdc 지시계에서 공급
• 센서의 크기가 작다.
• 선택사양: RS485 또는 ModBus 인터페이스 통신

㈜굿모닝계측기의 GMI3000 AMT 1채널 온라인 노점계는 공정상의 가스나 건조 압축 공기에
있는 극미량의 수분량을 측정할 수 있도록 만들어진 초정밀 노점계다. GMI3000 지시계는 1/8 DIN
규격의 판넬 마운팅 타입이며, 여기에 높은 측정 정밀도를 유지하는 센서인 AMT 을 연결해서
사용한다. 모델 GMI3000-AMT 노점계는 다양한 측정 범위 중에서 한가지로 설정 되어 제공 되며
장기간 문제없이 안정적으로 아주 민감하게 작동한다. 감도, 재현성, 응답시간 등이 뛰어나다.
각 센서 속에 내장된 집적회로는 교정 값을 그 자체 메모리에 저장하며, 그래서 센서를 분석기에
관계없이 현장에서 교환 할 수가 있다. 센서는 전체 측정 범위 내에서 편차가 ±2°C D/P 이내가 되게
교정 되며 국제 수분 표준 규격에 따르는 교정 성적서가 제공된다. 모델 GMI3000-AMT에는 또한
“AUTOCAL” 기능이 있어 현장에서 특별한 장비의 추가 없이도 교정을 할 수 있는 특징이 있다.
우발적인 또는 허가되지 않은 사람의 오작동을 방지하기 위한 간단한 키 패드 잠금 기능이 있다.
분석기와 센서 사이의 거리는 1000m 까지도 가능하며 한 쌍의 트위스트 케이블로 연결하여 사용 할
수가 있다. Model GMI3000-AMT Dew point Hygrometer 는 사용자의 사양에 맞춰 설정이 되서 제공
되며 기본적으로 센서 케이블 2 m, 사용자 매뉴얼 등이 함께 제공된다. 필요 시에는 보다 안정적인
측정을 위한 샘플 시스템도 공급할 수가 있다.
GMI3000-AMT 지시계 사양서

외 함: 1/8 DIN panel mounting ABS case
화 면: 4 digit, LED indicator
공장설정 표시단위: ℃, ℉, ppm(v), ppb(v), g/m3 or lbs/MMSCF 중 한 개
전 원: 85~265 VAC, 45/65Hz, 10 VA
출력신호: Linear 4 to 20mA, Maximum load 600Ω
센서전원 제공: DC 24 V, 30mA
알람 릴레이: 프로그램 가능한 2 개의, Normal open. Nomal close
경보 알림 표시: 전면부에 AL1 & AL2 LED 로 표시
인터페이스 (선택사양): RS485 or ModBus
무 게: 250 g
분해능: 16 bit A/D CONVERTER
크 기: 99(W) * 51(H) * 112(D) mm
판넬 컷팅크기: 92(W)*45(H) mm
제 조: ㈜굿모닝계측기
센서사양 & 일반사양

센서 모델: AMT
측정원리: Ultra High Capacitance - Aluminium Oxide Type
정확도: ± 2°C dew point (NPL / NIST traceable for range -90°C to +20°C)
AUTOCAL: 현장교정 / Span 점검 장치. 2개의 버튼스위치로 조작.

트랜스미터 외 함 재질: 316 Stainless steel body with size C, DIN EN 175301 connector.
센서 보호: 316 Sintered stainless steel filter - 50 micron
작동 압력: From 1kPa (0.01 bar A) to Maximum 35,000kPa (350 bar A)
샘플유량: 분당 2 to 5 standard liters. Max: 25 liters/min
방수등급: IP66 / NEMA4X when Connector mated to Transmitter.
무 게: Transmitter and connector - 175grams
케이블: 2 m 2 core 케이블 표준 제공, 공칭직경 3.4mm, 92ohms/km at 20ºC
온도계수: Transmitter temperature compensated for operating range.
재현성: Better than ±0.3ºC dew point
공장 교정: Supplied with Certificate of Calibration traceable to NPL / NIST
작동온도: -20°C to +60°C 보관온도: -20°C to +70°C
기계적인 부분 보증 기간: 24 months, 사용자 과실에 의한 물리적인 파손은 제외
교정 및 센서에 대한 보증기간: 12 months (부식성가스나 사용자 과실에 따른 손상은 제외)
셈플가스 연결 구: Inlet & outlet both 1/8” NPTF
파이프 피팅: 2 x Swagelok® male pipe fittings.( 1/4”, 1/8” or 6mm OD – inlet / outlet fitting size )
제조사: ALPHA MOISTURE SYSTEMS (영국)
측정범위:
SDC: -100°C to +20°C dew point

LDC: -120°C to +20°C dew point
HDC: -65°C to +20°C dew point
SPX: 1 to 1000 ppm (v) 1ppm resolution
MPX: 0.1 to 100.0 ppm (v) 0.1ppm resolution
LPX: 0.01 to 10.00 ppm (v) 0.01ppm resolution
PBX: 1 to 1000 ppb (v) 1ppb resolution
㈜ 굿모닝계측기 서울시 금천구 가산동 371-28 우림라이온스밸리 B동 508호

Tel: 02-2026-5425 Fax. 02-2026-5428
Web-site. : www.hitouch.co.kr E-mail: [email protected]
65 2-M4 안전커버
L
85
75
40± 1
65± 1 6
88 35
NX Series(NX700/NX70/NX7)
컴팩트한 사이즈에 담긴 첨단 기능 PLC
컴팩트한 사이즈에 담긴 첨단기능, OEMax PLC 시리즈
OEMax PLC의 신제품 NX시리즈는 국내외에서 가장 보편적으로 적용될 수

있도록 설계되었고, 첨단 기능을 집약시킨 고성능 아키텍쳐를 채택
하여 개발하였습니다.
또한, 고객의 다양한 요구사항을 효율적으로 구성이 가능하여 사용자의
설비 또는 시스템의 성능을 대폭 향상시킬 수 있게 되었으며, NX7, NX70,
NX700 시리즈가 모두 Line-up 되어 중형부터 초소형까지 제어설비의
종류에 따라 다양한 시스템 구성이 가능하게 되었습니다.
아울러 NX시리즈는 세계적인 규격의 높은 신뢰성이 확보된 제품으로써
국내 뿐만 아니라 해외 각국에서 높은 브랜드로 수출하고 있으며,
세계 시장에서도 보편적인 제품으로 자리잡고 있습니다.
Contents
■ NX 시리즈 특징 3
■ PLC 기종체계 4
■ 네트워크 구성도 6
■ NX700 기본구성 10
■ NX70 기본구성 22
■ NX700/NX70 특수모듈 35
아날로그 모듈 36
특수모듈 40
통신 및 네트워크 모듈 48
Field bus 64
■ NX7 구성도 67
■ 프로그램 장치 및 소프트웨어 72
■ 외형치수 79
■ 제품목록 84
2 I OEMax NX Series
NX 시리즈
NX700 / NX70 / NX7 Series
첨단기능이 집약된 NX700 시리즈

NX700 시리즈는 차세대 제어장치에 대응이 가능하도록 컴팩트하고 사용이 편리한 디자인으로 효율적 구성, 성능이
획기적으로 향상된 신제품입니다.
-제어점수 : Local 1600점 (REMOTE포함 2048~8192점)
-다양한 CPU Line-up: CPU700P, CPU700, CPU 750A/B/C/D등
-메모리 용량 : 16K ~ 120K 까지
-처리속도 : 0.03us ~ 0.4 us
-내부접점 : 2048 ~8192 점
-데이터 메모리 : 2048 ~ 10,240 워드
고신뢰성과 확대된 구성의 NX70 시리즈

NX70 시리즈는 고신뢰성 확보를 위한 내노이즈 설계와 전원용량 및 내구성을 강화시켰으며, 다양한 시스템 구성이
가능하도록 통신 및 고성능 특수모듈을 개발 적용된 신제품입니다.
- 제어점수: 외부 입출력 384점
- 베이스 종류 : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 Slot
- 메모리 용량 : 9.6K ~ 32K Words
- 처리속도 : 0.2 us ~ 0.4 us
- 내부접점 : 2048 ~ 8192점
- 데이터메모리 : 2048 ~ 6000 Words
초소형 사이즈와 다양한 기능의 NX7 시리즈

NX7 시리즈는 초소형 사이즈와 각종 특수기능이 내장되어 있으며, 경제적인 구성이 가능하도록 일체형으로
설계된 신제품입니다.
-제어점수: 10~104점
- 메모리 용량 : 9K Words, 통신포트 : RS232C/485겸용 2 Ports.
- 특수기능 : 고속카운터, 펄스출력, 펄스캐치, PID, 시계기능, 백업메모리 등 기본내장.
OEMAX NX Series I 3
OEMax 기종 체계 OEMax PLC는 소형 PLC인 NX7부터 중형 PLC인
또한 프로그래밍 (NX-시리즈, NX-plus 시리즈)이나
대규모제어 네트워크 모듈 및 기능
�EtherNet (TCP/IP, UDP/IP)
CIM 대응 �MW- LINK
NX70
�W- LINK
�REMOTE I/O (4대, 32국)
�DeviceNet (64노드)
중규모제어
네트워크다양화 CPU70
�384점
�0.5us
�16k Step
�코멘트메모리
NX7 시리즈
NX7 시리즈 CPU70p1

�28점/48점 일체형 �384점
�Analog 4입력,2출력 일체형 �0.2us
�확장가능 �9.6K 워드
�통신 2포트
�9K Step
릴레이시퀀스대체
소규모제어 NX7S 시리즈
�10점/14점 일체형
�확장불가
�통신 2포트
�2K Step
NX7 PLC 일체형 NX70 PLC

�일체형의 초소형 PLC (컴팩트한 사이즈)
�기본형 4종(10점,14점,28점,48점)
확장형 2종(14점,28점)
�최대 104점까지 확장가능
�통신기능 : 2포트(RS232C/ RS485)
�고속카운터 및 펄스출력 기능
�사용자 소프트웨어 : WinGPC S/W
4 I OEMax NX Series
NX700까지를 LINE-UP하여, 어떠한 제어의 규모나 목적으로도 사용할수 있으며,
제품모듈 및 네트워크의 호환성을 갖추고 있어 최적의 제품을 선택할 수 있습니다.
NX700 시리즈
시리즈
CPU750
�384점
�0.35us
�32K Step
CPU750A CPU750B CPU750C CPU750D
�코멘트메모리 �2,048점(Remote포함) �2,048점(Remote포함) � 8,192점(Remote포함) � 8,192점(Remote포함)
�PID 오토튜닝등 �0.35us � 0.35us � 0.03us(30ns) � 0.03us(30ns)
�16K Step �32K Step � 60K Step � 120K Step
�PID 오토튜닝등 �코멘트메모리 � 코멘트메모리 � 코멘트메모리
� PID 오토튜닝등 � PID 오토튜닝등
CPU70p2
�384점
�0.2us
�20K 워드
CPU700 CPU700p
�1,600점 �2,048점(Remote포함)
�0.4us �0.2us
�16K Step �20K 워드
�코멘트메모리 �2Port
빌딩블럭형 NX700 PLC 빌딩블럭형

�빌딩블럭형의 소형 PLC (컴팩트한 사이즈) �빌딩블럭형의 중형 PLC
�CPU 모듈 4종 (고급형 : CPU750, CPU70p2 �CPU 모듈 6종 -고성능형 : CPU750C, CPU750D,
일반형 : CPU70, CPU70p1) -고 급 형 : CPU750A, CPU750B,
�마더보드:2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12슬롯보유 -기 본 형 : CPU700, CPU700p)
�다양한 I/O 모듈 및 고속카운터(4CH), �기본 / 증설마더보드 동일하게 사용
펄스출력(4CH), 통신 유니트(CCU, SCU), �마더보드 3, 5, 8, 10, 12 슬롯보유
네트워크(MW-Link)등을 보유 �PID 오토튜닝(NX-CPU750), I/O(13종),
�최대 384점 Digital I/O 제어 특수모듈등(30종)
�소형이면서 중형급 PLC 기능, 성능 보유 �Local 최대 1600점(Remote I/O시 8,192점)
OEMAX NX Series I 5
소규모 레벨부터 중�대규모 까지 구축
OEMax PLC 네트워크 구성도
OEMax PLC 네트워크는 Device Level의 소규모

EtherNet
제어부터 EtherNet의 대규모 제어까지 사용자의 EtherNet EtherNet
어떤 환경에도 맞출수 있는 풍부한 LINE-UP이

되어있어, PLC NETWORK 구성시 쉽게 대
네트워크 시스템,
규 각종 설비기기,
대응할 수 있습니다.
모 빌딩관리 시스템등
정
OEMax PLC 네트워크 특징 보
제
�OEMax PLC 네트워크는 환경에 맞는 다양한 링크 시스
어
템 구축 가능 Multi Wire-링크 네트워크
네
�컴퓨터 링크와 PLC링크를 동시에 실행할 수 있어, PLC 트
간의 통신을 중단하지 않고 컴퓨터에서 데이터를 수집 워
트위스트 페어
하거나 PLC로 정보를 보낼 수도 있습니다. 크 케이블에 의한
멀티드롭 배선
�PLC에서도 컴퓨터로 데이터를 요구하거나 전송할 수

있어, 컴퓨터의 실행처리시간을 유효하게 사용할 수
있습니다. NX700 시리즈 NX700 시리즈
MW-링크 MW-링크
�네트워크내의 PLC나 컴퓨터에서 리모트 프로그래밍을

할 수 있어, 다른 PLC 에서의 프로그래밍 편집, 모니터
링등이 가능합니다 중
NX70 시리즈
규 Wire-링크 네트워크 MW-링크 유니트
�각각의 링크 네트워크 시스템에서 상호정보 교환이 가
모
능하며, OEMax PLC의 기종에 관계없이 통신접속이 가
능합니다 제
어 트위스트 페어
케이블에 의한
�각각의 링크유니트 자신이 자기진단기능(RAS)이 있어, 멀티드롭 배선
링크계 감시장치가 불필요 하기때문에 경제적입니다.
네
트
NX700 시리즈 리모트 I/O 모국
워 MW-링크 유니트
크
W-Link Master 유니트
트위스트 페어
소 케이블에 의한
멀티드롭 배선
규 Remote I/O 시스템
모
네
트 NX700 시리즈 NX70 시리즈
워
크
SLAVE 유니트
SLAVE 유니트
6 I OEMax NX Series
할 수 있어, 최적의 PLC 네트워크를 선택할 수 있습니다.
EtherNet 네트워크
EtherNet TCP/IP와 UDP/IP에 대응하며,10BASE5(N700a용) 및100BASE-TX,
10BASE-T, 10BASE5(NX700용) LAN에 접속하여 네트워크상(LAN)의
컴퓨터등과 폭넓게 통신할 수 있습니다.
★ 대응 PLC : N700a PLC, N700H PLC, NX700(CPU750) PLC
■ EtherNet망에 접속된 다른 PLC 또는 컴퓨터사이에 컴퓨터링크, 데이
터전송, 리모트프로그래밍등의 기능보유
NX700 시리즈
전송속도 : 100M bit/s(NX700), 10M bit/s(N700a)
EtherNet 유니트
최대 NODE수 : 100Node/ Segment, 전송방법 : 베이스 밴드
통신 커넥션수 : 최대 8커넥션, 노드간 최장거리: 2500m�205m
Multi W－링크 네트워크

Twisted-Pair 케이블에 의한 대용량 PLC 네트워크시스템이며, 경제적
인 분산제어를 구축할 수 있습니다. (MW-Link 유니트)
★ 대응 PLC : NX700 PLC (CPU750), NX70 PLC (CPU750)
■ 한번에 전송할 수 있는 PLC 데이량이 1,020워드이며, PLC 링크기능
도 32국이 동시가능 (또한 L, Ld 용량 대폭증대)
■ 전송거리도 속도전환으로 1,200m까지 가능
전송속도 : 0.5MBps, 800m 국수 : 32국/ 1계층
계층 : 2계층 전송로 : Twisted-Pair케이블
NX700 시리즈 NX700 시리즈

MW-링크 MW-링크 W－링크 네트워크
Twisted-Pair 케이블에 의한 PLC 네트워크이며, 경제적인 분산제어를
구축할 수 있습니다.
★ 대응 PLC : NX700, NX70시리즈 지원 (단, NX-CPU700,
NX70 시리즈 NX70-CPU70, NX70-CPU70p1 은 제외)
MW-링크 유니트 ■ Twisted-Pair 케이블에 의한 멀티드롭 배선으로, 설치가 간단하며
고속 장거리 전송을 실현할 수 있습니다.
전송속도 : 0.5MBps, 800m 국수 : 32국/ 1계층
계층 : 2계층 전송로 : Twisted-Pair케이블
리모트 I/O 시스템

CPU 유니트 1대로 장거리 및 분산된 지역에 분포한 I/O등을 제어할 수
NX70 시리즈 NX70 시리즈 있는 시스템입니다
W-링크 유니트 W-링크 유니트 ★ 대응 PLC : NX700기종에서 Master지원 (단,NX-CPU700은 제외)
NX700, NX70기종에서 Slave지원
NX700 시리즈
전송로 : Twisted-Pair케이블 (700m) , 2선 케이블 (400m)
국수 :32국(Slave유니트) /Master 유니트, 4 Master/ CPU유니트
MW-링크 유니트
DeviceNet 네트워크 DeviceNet 시스템
OPEN 네트워크인 DeviceNet 제품이며, Open Architecture와 Device
Level 기능이 규격화 되어 있어 DeviceNet Profile을 채택하고 있는 제품
들과 상호 접속하여 데이터 송수신이 가능.
컴퓨터(PC)용 ★ 스캐너(마스터) : N700 PLC, NX700 PLC, 컴퓨터용 카드(PCI, ISA..)
DeviceNet PLC용 Master카드 Scanner 카드
(ISA, PCI, PCMCIA)
■ 슬립타입의 초소형 사이즈(104 x 43 x 52mm)
(Master) Scanner 카드
(NX700용) ■ DeviceNet를 채용한 이기종 제품간 접속 가능
전송속도 : 0.5MBps 노드수 : 64Node/ Network
NETWORK 프로토콜 : I/O Slave messaging( Group 2 only)
DeviceNet NX70 시리즈
ODVA 승인 : DeviceNet Conformance 시험규격 취득
(Slave)
터미널타입 터미널타입 커넥터타입

(38핀) (20핀) (37핀) 로보트
DeviceNet(Slave) 인버터
OEMax NX Series I 7
고기능 CPU (WinFPST 사용)
■CPU750A *별첨참조
■CPU750B
■CPU750C
NX700 Series
■CPU750D
범용 CPU (WinFPST 사용)

■CPU700
범용 플러스 CPU (WinGPC 사용)

■CPU700P
OEMax NX Series I 9
NX700 기본구성
기본구성과 제어 I/O점수 �시스템의 기본구성 및 제어 I/O점수는 CPU기종에 관계없이 동일합니다.
(CPU기종 : CPU750A, CPU750B, CPU750C, CPU750D, CPU700, CPU700p)
� 3모듈 타입 (NX-BASE03) � 5모듈 타입 (NX-BASE05)
48점 : 16점 I/O 구성시 80점 : 16점 I/O 구성시

192점 : 64점 I/O 구성시 320점 : 64점 I/O 구성시
�8모듈 타입 (NX-BASE08) �10모듈 타입 (NX-BASE10)
128점 : 16점 I/O 구성시 160점 : 16점 I/O 구성시

512점 : 64점 I/O 구성시 640점 : 64점 I/O 구성시
�12모듈 타입 (NX-BASE12)
192점 : 16점 I/O 구성시

768점 : 64점 I/O 구성시
■ 유니트 조합이 자유로운 빌딩블럭 방식

�NX700 PLC에는 5종류의 마더보드가 있으며, 각종 입출력 유니트를 자유롭게 장착할 수 있습니다. (마더보드 5종: 3, 5, 8, 10, 12모듈 타입)
�I/O 모듈, 전원모듈, 특수모듈, 마더보드는 CPU기종에 관계없이 공통입니다.(CPU 6종: CPU750A, CPU750B, CPU750C, CPU750D .CPU700, CPU700p)
■ 슬롯수 표시
마더보드의 슬롯수 표시는 I/O유니트 및 특수모듈을 실장할 수 있는 숫자의 표시입니다.
(ex. 5슬롯 타입인 NX-BASE05 마더보드는 I/O유니트 및 특수모듈을 5개까지 실장할 수 있습니다.)
■ 증설마더보드로 사용시
(주의사항)
1) 증설 마더보드에도 전원유니트가 필요합니다.
2) 증설 마더보드에는 CPU 유니트는 사용불가.
3) 증설 마더보드의 모듈수는 CPU측의 마더보드
의 모듈수보다 1슬롯 더 사용할 수 있습니다.
(CPU측 슬롯위치에 I/O 및 특수모듈 실장가능함)
증설케이블
■ 마더보드는 기본 및 증설용 구별없이 동일하게 사용합니다.

■ 마더보드의 증설은 1대만 가능합니다.
주의사항 증설측 마더보드에 사용불가능한 유니트

CPU유니트, CCU유니트, CCU+ 유니트, Remote Slave유니트, MW-Link유니트, EtherNet유니트, DeviceNet Master유니트
10 I OEMax NX Series
주의 CPU700p의 명령어 및 프로그래밍 툴은 CPU750계열과 다릅니다.
시스템 구성
■ 실장할 수 있는 유니트 구성
CPU 유니트 특수 유니트 I/O 유니트 주변기기
�NX-CPU750A
�A/D, D/A, RTD, TC �16점 타입 �컴퓨터용 소프트웨어
16k Step, 0.35μ
s 통신포트 2port
�CCU, SCU 유니트 �32점 타입 - WinFPST S/W(CPU750, CPU700용)
�NX-CPU750B �위치결정(1, 2, 3, 4축) �64점 타입 - WinGPC S/W(CPU700p용)
32k Step, 0.35μ
s 코멘트메모리 (오픈콜렉터 & LineDrive) �컴퓨터 접속케이블
통신포트 2port �고속카운터(1/ 2CH) - NX-CBLCPU02,05
�NX-CPU750C �고성능 고속카운터(4CH)
60k Step, 0.03μ
s 코멘트메모리 �펄스출력유니트(4CH)
통신포트 2port �Remote I/O SYSTEM
�MW-LINK SYSTEM
�NX-CPU750D �EtherNet SYSTEM
120k Step, 0.03μ
s코멘트메모리
�DeviceNet SYSTEM
통신포트 2port
마더보드
�NX-CPU700
16k Step, 0.4μ
s코멘트메모리 �3슬롯 타입
통신포트 1port �5슬롯 타입
�8슬롯 타입
�NX-CPU700p
20k Step, 0.2μ
s통신포트 2port �10슬롯 타입
WinGPC S/W 사용 �12슬롯 타입
※기본/증설 겸용
※ 슬롯수 표시는 I/O 및 특수유니트를

전원 유니트 실장할 수 있는 숫자입니다.
※ 마더보드를 증설용으로 사용할때는
�NX-POWER (AC110/220V)
CPU모듈이 필요없기 때문에 1슬롯을
5V 4A, 24V 0.5A
추가로 사용가능합니다
�NX-PWR220 (AC 220V) 5V 6A
�NX-PWRDC (DC 24V) 5V 5A
■ 유니트 종류에 의한 제한 ○ : 사용가능 △ : 버전에 따라 사용가능 × : 사용불가
기본 유니트 특수 유니트 네트워크 유니트

마더보드 (3, 5, 8, 10, 12 모듈)
전원 유니트
입력 유니트
출력 유니트
A/D, D/A, RTD, TC 유니트
(오픈콜렉터 & 라인드라이브)

위치결정 유니트(1,2,3,4축)
고속카운터 유니트 (1, 2CH)
고성능 고속카운터 유니트(4CH)
펄스 입출력 유니트 (4CH)
SCU 유니트 (2CH)
CCU 유니트 (1CH)
CCU+ 유니트 (1CH)
(MASTER / SLAVE 유니트) *1

REMOTE I/O SYSTEM
(W, W2-모드)
MW-Link 유니트
EtherNet 유니트
DeviceNet Master 유니트

사용할 유니트 종류
컴퓨터용 소프트웨어
CPU 유니트에 따른
*1
*1
*1
모듈별 실장가능
*1
고성능
�NX-CPU750C � NX-CPU750D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○
CPU
고급 WinFPST
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○
CPU �NX-CPU750A �NX-CPU750B S/W
기본 �NX-CPU700 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × ○ ○ × × × × ○
CPU
�NX-CPU700p (Plus 기종) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ ○ △ △ ○ × ○ △ △ × ○ WinGPC
주) NX-CPU700p 기종은 OS버젼 2.0 이상에서 일부 특수기능이 지원 됩니다.
※1. 링크계 유니트의 실장의 제한

유니트 종류 CPU750A, CPU750B 유니트일 경우 CPU750C, CPU750D 유니트일 경우 CPU700 유니트일 경우 CPU700p 유니트일 경우
CCU 유니트를 포함 5대까지 사용가능 1대만 사용가능 사용불가
CCU 유니트 3대까지 사용가능 단, PLC링크 기능은 2대까지만
MW-Link 유니트 (W-모드) (PLC링크 기능은 2대까지만) CCU 유니트를 포함8대까지 사용가능 사용가능
MW-Link 유니트 (W2-모드) 단, PLC링크 기능은 2대까지만
사용불가 사용불가
EtherNet 유니트 3대까지 사용가능 8대까지 사용가능
Remote Master 유니트 Master 기능 : 4대/ 1CPU, 32 Slave 유니트/ 1Master Master 1대
CCU+ 유니트 사용 불가 사용가능
OEMax NX Series I 11
고성능 CPU 유니트(CPU750)
처리속도최대 0.03us(30ns), 프로그램용량은 16k~120k이며, N700α기종과와 동일한 명령어를 보유하고 있으며, PID
오토튜닝 기능 및 2개의 통신포트를 내장한 고속 중대형 PLC입니다 . 또한, 대규모의 PLC기능을 컴펙터한 사이즈로
축소하여 편리하게 사용할 수 있게 하였습니다.
메모리유니트
(NX-MEM750A)
�16k STEP(증설메모리)
�코멘트 메모리
COM포트 통신케이블
�EPROM 소켓 TOOL포트
NX-CPU750A NX-CPU750B (CPU750A만 적용) NX-CBLCPU02
�16k STEP �32k STEP NX-CBLCPU05
�0.35us �0.35us
�시계기능 �시계기능 C-언어
�코멘트 메모리 BASIC
WinFPST S/W
NX-CPU750C NX-CPU750D
�60k STEP �120k STEP T/P
�0.03us (30ns) �0.03us (30ns)
�시계기능 �시계기능
�코멘트 메모리 �코멘트 메모리 컴퓨터 컴퓨터
■ 특징
1. 초고속의 연산속도 및 풍부한 데이타메모리 보유 5. RUN(동작)중 프로그램 편집(삽입, 삭제, 수정)기능
CPU 종류 NX700 PLC NX700 PLC NX700 PLC
항목 (CPU750A, B) (CPU750C, D) (CPU700) 6. PID 오토튜닝 가능
연산명령 시퀀스 명령 0.35μs 0.03μs 0.4μs 응용명령어인 F355(PID) 명령어 사용하여 파라메타 설정가능
(1명령당) 응용 명령 0.93μs� 0.06μs� 수십μs�
프로그램 용량 16k,32k 스탭 60k,120k스탭 16k 스탭 7. 시계(RTC : Real Time Clock)기능 기본내장
입력 릴레이(X) 2,048점 8,192점 2,048점 내장형 시계를 이용하여 공정을 시간, 날짜별로 프로그램 할 수 있습
출력 릴레이(Y) 2,048점 8,192점 2,048점 니다.
내부 릴레이(R) 4,048점 14,192점 1,568점
데
데이터레지스터(DT) 6,000워드 10,240워드 2,048워드
이 8. CPU 유니트에 RS232C 2포트 탑재
타 파일 레지스터(FL) 30,717워드 32,765워드 22,525워드
용 1,024점 10,240점 1,024점
∙TOOL 포트를 이용해서 프로그래밍 툴(WinFPST S/W) 접속
링크 릴레이(L)
량 링크 레지스터(Ld) 128워드 8,448워드 128워드 ∙COM 포트를 이용, Touch Panel 또는 컴퓨터등과의 통신
타이머/ 카운터(T/C) 1,024점 3,072점 256점
펄스릴레이(P) 1,024점 1,024점 없음 9. 통신포트가 115kbps까지 지원
인덱스레지스터 14워드 14워드 2워드 통신속도를 대폭 향상, 프로그램 다운로드/ 업로드의 처리도 스피드
하게 수행할 수 있습니다.
2. 스캔 타임 1ms. (20,000 Step 작성시)
연산처리와 통신처리의 병렬방식의 채용에 따라, 1 스캔에 걸리는 시간 10. 오픈네트워크인 고속 EtherNet 유니트에 대응
을대폭감축했습니다. (CPU750C, CPU750D 모듈사용시) ∙100BASE-TX 및 10BASE-T 가능 (전환은 자동적으로 실행) ; UTP
케이블사용
3. 프로그램 메모리 120k step (CPU750D) ∙10BASE5 ; 트랜시버 케이블 사용
∙CPU750A 모듈 : 16K STEP(확장메모리 사용시, 32k) ∙데이터 전송속도 : 100M bit/s (100BASE-TX의 경우)
∙CPU750B 모듈 : 32k STEP ∙TCP/IP 및 UDP/IP에 대응, 1대에 8컨넥션 통신가능
∙CPU750C 모듈 : 60k STEP
∙CPU750D 모듈 : 120k STEP 11. 래더 프로그램에 주석이 가능한 코멘트 기능
∙코맨트용 RAM이 별도로 있어 프로그램 작성시에 각 접점등에 코멘
4. 대형 PLC기종에서 요구되는 기능탑재. 트를 붙일수 있다. 따라서, 래더 프로그램을 다시 볼 때나 프린터하
∙1ms(0.001초) 단위의 타이머 탑재. 여 편리하게 사용할 수 있습니다.
∙부동소수점 연산기능 (삼각함수, 지수, 대수, 평방근) ∙NX-CPU750D : 기본내장
∙인덱스 레지스터 추가 (14워드, IO�ID) ∙NX-CPU750C : 기본내장
∙PID 명령어 내장 ∙NX-CPU750B : 기본내장
∙NX-CPU750A : 메모리유니트 별도필요.
■ 성능 사양
CPU 종류 NX-CPU750C
항목 NX-CPU750A NX-CPU750B NX-CPU750D
항목
프로그램 방식/ 제어방식 릴레이심볼 방식/ 사이클릭 연산방식
제어 I/O 점수 1,600점 (REMOTE 사용시, 2,048점) 1,600점 (REMOTE시, 8,192점)
프로그램 메모리 기본 16k 스탭 (증설시, 32k 스탭) 기본 32k 스탭 750C 기본:60k 스탭 750D:기본 120k
연산 속도 시퀀스명령 0.35μs/ 1명령 � 0.03μs/ 1명령 �
(대표값) 응용명령 0.93μs/ 1명령 � 0.06μs/ 1명령 �
명령어 기본명령 95종 95종
종류 응용명령 428종 434종
외부입력(X) 2,048점 (X0�X127F) 8,192점 (X0�X511F)
외부출력(Y) 2,048점 (Y0�Y127F) (내부 릴레이로도 사용 가능) 8,192점 (Y0�Y511F)
내부릴레이(R) 4,048점 (R0�R252F) 14,192점 (R0�R886F)
접점 데이타(비트)
링크릴레이(L) 2,048점 (L0�L127F) (내부 릴레이로도 사용 가능) 10,240점 (L0�L639F)

특수 내부릴레이(R) 176점 (R9000�R910F)
연 1,024점(점수변경가능) 3,072점(점수변경가능)
산 타이머/카운터(T/ C) 1) 타이머 : 1000점 (T0�T999), 타이머 4종(0.001초외 3종) 1) 타이머: 3000점 (T0�T2999)
용 2) 카운터 : 24점 (C1000�C1023) 2) 카운터: 72점 (C3000�C3071)
메 펄스릴레이(P) 1,024점 (P0�P63F)

모 데이타레지스터(DT) 6,000워드 (DT0�DT5999) 10,240워드 (DT0�DT10239)
데이타 메모리(워드)
리
화일레지스터(FL) 14.333워드 (증설메모리시 30717워드) 30.717워드 (FL0�FL30716) 32.765워드 (FL0�FL32764) x 3뱅크
링크레지스터(Ld) 256워드 (Ld0�Ld255) (데이타 레지스터로도 사용 가능) 8,448워드 (Ld0�Ld8447)
타이머/카운터 설정치에리어(SV) 1,024워드 (SV0�SV1,023) 3,072워드 (SV0�SV3,071)
타이머/카운터 경과치에리어(EV) 1,024워드 (EV0�EV1,023) 3,072워드 (EV0�EV3,071)
인덱스레지스터 (I0�ID) 14워드 (I0�ID) 14워드 (I0�ID) x 16뱅크
이상보고 릴레이(E) 없음 2,048점 (E0�E2047)
MCR 점수 256점
라벨수(JMP + LOOP수) 합계 256점
미분 점수 점수 무제한
보조타이머 (F137명령 사용) 점수 무제한 (감산식 0.01초 타이머, 0.01초�327.67초)
스텝 래더수 1,000 공정
서브루틴수 100 서브루틴
인터럽트 프로그램수 1 프로그램 (정시 인터럽트 : 0.5ms � 1.5s 범위에서 시간간격을 설정할 수 있다.)
코멘트 메모리 사용가능 (단, 증설메모리 필요) 기본 내장 (12문자 x 2,730개)
시계기능 (카렌다타이머 기능) 기본 내장(년, 월, 일, 시, 분, 초, 요일)
시프트레지스터 최대 253점
자기 진단 워치독 타이머, 메모리이상 검출, 입출력이상 검출, 전지이상 검출, 프로그램의 문법체크등
링크 기능 PLC링크, 컴퓨터링크, 리모트프로그래밍, 데이터전송, 모뎀기능
PID 오토튜닝 PID 오토튜닝가능, F355(PID) 명령어 사용
기타 기능 사용자 메모리(EPROM 및 EEPROM 운전기능), RUN중 프로그램 입력, 강제입출력, TEST RUN, Constant Scan기능
메모리 백업 약 10,000시간, 증설메모리 사용시 시간축소 약 8,000 시간 약 3,500 시간
■ 일반 사양
항 목 사 양
사용 온도 0 � 55℃
주변 온도
보존 온도 -25 � 70℃
사용 습도 30 � 85% RH (단, 이슬이 없을때)
주변 습도
보존 습도 30 � 85% RH (단, 이슬이 없을때)
I/O 터미널(AC) <-> Frame Ground(Power Unit), AC 1500V 1분간
내전압
I/O 터미널(DC) <-> Frame Ground(Power Unit), AC 500V 1분간
절연 저항 I/O 터미널 <-> Frame Ground(Power Unit), 100MΩ 이상(DC 500V메가에서)
내진동 10 � 55Hz 1掃引/ 1분간 , 복진폭 0.75mm , X,Y,Z 각 방향 10분간
내충격 최대충격 가속도 및 인가시간 15g/ 11ms, X, Y, Z 방향 각 3회
내 노이즈성 1500Vp-p 펄스폭 50ns, 1μs (노이즈 시물레이터에 의함)
사용환경 부식성 가스가 없을것 , 먼지가 심하지 않을것
범용 CPU 유니트(CPU700)
처리속도 0.4us, 프로그램 용량은 16k Step이며, NX700 PLC의 기본유니트를 사용할 수 있으며, RUN중 프로그램 편집
과 같은 편리한 기능을 보유하고 있습니다. 또한 코멘트메모리를 기본으로 내장시켜 사용자들이 쉽게 이용할 수 있게
하였습니다.
EPROM 소켓 통신케이블
(NX-ROM700) NX-CBLCPU02
NX-CBLCPU05
WinFPST S/W
CPU 유니트(NX-CPU700)
�16k STEP 기본메모리
�코멘트 메모리
■ 특징
1. 고속처리 및 대용량 메모리 보유 6. 다양한 명령어 추가
연산속도는 중형급 PLC급인 0.4μsec /1명령(기본명령) 이며, 프로그 SET, RST, 데이터 변한명령(F70�F78), 압축시프트 명령(F98, F99),
램 용량은 15,871 STEP 까지 작성 가능합니다. 입출력 제어점수는 최 보조타이머 명령(F137, STMR) 이 추가되어 보다 많은 명령어를 사용
대 1,600점까지 사용할 수 있습니다. 하게 하였습니다.
2. 강제입출력 / 타임챠트 모니터링 기능 7. 래더 프로그램에 주석이 가능한 코멘트메모리 기본내장

PROGRAM MODE시(Y,R,L 대상), RUN MODE시(X,Y,R, L,T,C 대 코맨트용 RAM 16K워드(12문자 x 2730개)가 기본으로 내장되어 있어
상)에 강제 입출력 시킬 수 있으며, 또한 제어 실행상태를 로직 아날 프로그램 작성시에 각 접점등에 코맨트를 붙일수 있습니다 CPU모듈
라이즈의 타임챠트와 같은 형태로 16점을 동시에 모니터링 할 수 있 내부에 접점등에 대한 코멘트내용이 기록되어 있기 때문에 몇년후,전
는 기능을 보유하고 있어 PLC 모니터링 및 디버깅시에 아주 편리하게 장설계 내역등을 살펴볼때 편리합니다.
사용할 수 있습니다.
8. EPROM 기능(사용자 메모리)은 별매
3. RUN(동작)중 프로그램 편집기능 EPROM 소켓을 옵션으로 판매하고 있으며, EPROM은 사용자가 직접
PLC를 RUN(동작)중에도 중단하지 않고 프로그램의 수정, 삭제, 삽입 구입하여 래더프로그램을 입력시키면 됩니다. 따라서,PLC 프로그램
을 할 수 있습니다. (Ladder Symbol 모드에서도 가능) 을 EPROM으로 구동시킬 수 있습니다.
(EPROM 소켓 : NX-ROM700, EPROM IC : 27C256-12상당, 2개 필요)
4. 패스워드 기능
유저 프로그램의 보호를 위하여 패스워드를 설정할 수 있는 기능이
며, 관계자 이외는 PLC의 프로그램에 접근할 수 없기때문에 프로그
램의 TROUBLE을 미연에 방지할 수 있어 시스템의 신뢰성 향상을 꾀
할 수 있습니다.
5. 기존 N-시리즈 PLC와 100% 호환가능

기존 N-시리즈 PLC와 명령어 호환
■ 성능 사양
항 목 사 양
제어 방식 사이클릭 연산방식(Cyclic operation method)
연산 속도 0.4㎲/ 1 명령
프로그램 용량 최대 15,871스탭 (16K Step)
최대 입출력 처리점수 1,600점
명령어 기본 명령어 45종 (types)
종류 응용 명령어 195종 (types)
외부 입력 (X) 2,048점 (X0�X127F)
외부 출력 (Y) 2,048점 (Y0�Y127F)
접점 데이타(비트)
내부 릴레이(R) 1,568점 (R0�R97F)

링크 릴레이(L) 1,028점 x 2 (L0�L127F)
연 특수 릴레이(R) 176점 (R9000�R910F)
산
용 타이머∙카운터 (T/C) 합계 256점 ① 타이머(0.01초 타이머, 0.1초 타이머, 1초 타이머), T0�T199
(점수변경가능) ② 카운터 (프리셋트 타입 1 ~ 32,767카운터) , C200�C255
메 데이타 레지스타 (DT) 2,048워드 (DT0�DT2047)
모
데이타 메모리(워드)
리 링크 레지스타 (Ld) 128워드 x 2 (Ld0�Ld255)

화일 레지스타 (FL) 최대 22,525워드(FL0�FL22524)
특수 레지스타 (DT) 256워드(DT9000�DT9255)
타이머/카운터 설정치에리어(SV) 256워드(SV0�SV255)
타이머/카운터경과치에리어(EV) 256워드(EV0�EV255)
인덱스 레지스타 (IX, IY) 2워드 (IX, IY)
마스터 콘트롤 (MC, MCR) 64점
라벨 (JMP, LOOP) 각 256점
미분 (Differentials) 무제한
보조타이머(F137 명령사용) 점수 무제한 (감산식 0.01초 타이머, 0.01초�327.67초)
스탭 래더 (STEP LADDER) 1,000
서브 루틴(SUB ROUTINE) 100
인터럽트 프로그램 25개
샘플링 트레이스 최대 4,000개 (1,000 샘플) (16접점 + 3워드 / 샘플)
코멘트메모리 기본내장, 12문자 x 2,730
① 워치독 타이머 ② 메모리 이상 검출 ③ 입출력 이상검출
자기 진단 ④ 전지 이상 검출 ⑤ 프로그램의 문법체크
LINK 기능 ① PLC 링크 ② 컴퓨터링크 ③ 데이타 전송 ④ REMOTE 프로그래밍
① EPROM 운전기능 ② RUN중 프로그램편집기능 ③TEST 운전
기타 기능 ④ 강제 입출력 ⑤ 인터럽트 처리
메모리 BACK-UP 리튬전지 유지시간 8,000 Hr
제어 루프수 : 최대 32 LOOP, 동작모드 정동작, 역동작
PID 기능
샘플링 시간: 0.1�120.0초, 제어알고리즘 : PI-D ∙I-PD (상세한 내용은 PID 매뉴얼을 참고하십시오.)
■ 일반 사양
항 목 사 양
사용 온도 0 � 55℃
주변 온도
보존 온도 -25 � 70℃
주변 습도
내전압
범용 CPU 유니트(CPU700P) Plus 계열 주의 CPU700p의 명령어 및 프로그래밍 툴은 CPU750과 다릅니다.
처리속도 0.2us/1명령, 프로그램용량 20k 워드, NX700 PLC의 기본유니트를 사용할 수 있는 plus용 CPU 유니트
입니다.(WinGPC S/W를 사용합니다.)
통신케이블
NX-CBLCPU02
NX-CBLCPU05
CPU 유니트
(NX-CPU700p)
컴퓨터
WinGPC S/W MMI S/W
T/P 등
■ 특징
NX-CPU700p 모듈은 중소형 PLC로서, 사용자 프로그램의 고속처리 기능과 아나로그, 네트워크모듈과 같은 다양한 특수모듈을 제공함으로 제
어 환경에 적절하게 대응할 수 있는 제품입니다.
�제어점수 100~1000 point의 중규모 제어환경에 최적제어를 위한 고속처리
<기본명령 : 0.2us>, PID 기능 내장등으로 생산성향상을 도모했습니다.
�2채널의 통신 포트 내장으로 TOUCH PANEL과 직접 접속, 고속으로 대용량의 DATA교환이 가능하며,
NX700의 기본적인 특수모듈을 사용할 수 있습니다.(CCU+ 유니트, SCU 유니트, Analog 유니트, 고속카운터(1CH, 2CH) 유니트 )
�다양한 입출력모듈과 분리형 터미널블럭을 채용하여, 유지/보수 및 설계에 용이합니다.
주) CPU OS버젼 2.0 이상에서 고기능 특수모듈(HSC4, Pulse4, Posi 1~4, MW-Link)을 사용할 수 있습니다.
1. RUN중 프로그램 수정 6. 다양한 입출력 및 기본적인 특수모듈 지원

CPU 운전중에도 시스템을 중단하지 않고 프로그램을 수정할 수 DC24V 입력(16/32/64점), AC110V 입력, AC220V 입력, 릴레이출
있습니다. 력, TR출력(16점/32/64점),SSR출력, A/D, D/A, RTD, TC,고속카
운터(1CH, 2CH), CCU+(통신전용), SCU(데이터 처리장치)등을
2. PID 처리기 내장 사용할 수 있습니다.
8 Loop의 PID 제어 Logic을 내장하여 온도/동작 제어등 아나로그
제어환경의 응용이 매우 용이 합니다. 7. 다양한 주변기기
CPU제어를 위한 전용 그래픽 소프트웨어(WinGPC S/W), 프로그
3. 시계(RTC : Real Time Clock)기능 내장 래머(PGM500) 등이 구비되어 있어, CPU상태 체크 및 강제입출
내장형 시계를 이용하여 공정을 시간, 날짜별로 프로그램 할 수 력, 입출력 모니터링, 프로그램 다운로드/업로드 등이 편리합니
있습니다. 다.
4. 충분한 프로그램 용량/백업 기능 8. 다양한 통신기능

최대 20K워드까지 프로그램이 가능하고, FLASH 백업방식을 채 2개의 고속 통신 Port를 제공함으로 별도의 모듈 없이 컴퓨터연결
택한 ROM Pack 모듈을 제공함으로 프로그램을 별도로 영구보 및 부가 기기의 연결이 용이할뿐 아니라, COM2포트는 사용자정
관할 수 있도록 하였습니다. 의 통신방식을 지원하여 바코드 리더, INVERTER, 서보를 통신으
로 연결,제어할 수 있습니다.( 바이너리 통신 가능 )
5. 자기진단 기능
편리한 자기진단 기능이 있어 시스템 에러 및 고장진단에 편리합
니다.
■ 성능 사양
CPU 명 NX-CPU700p
제어 방식 프로그램 저장, 반복연산 방식
외부입출력 1,600점 (Remote I/O 사용시 2.048점)
기본 명령어 28종
명령어
응용 명령어 150 여종
기본 명령어 0.2us/step
처리속도
응용 명령어 0.4~수십 us/step
프로그램 용량 20K 워드
입출력접점 (R) R0.0 ~ R127.15 (2048점, 128워드)
링크 접점 (L) L0.0 ~ L63.15 (1024점, 64워드)
내부 접점 (M) M0.0 ~ M127.15 (2048점, 128워드) 단, M0.0~ M63.15는 링크접점으로 사용가능
정전유지접점 (K) K0.0 ~ K127.15 (2048점, 128워드)
데이터 특수접점 (F) F0.0 ~ F15.15 (256점)
메모리
용량 타이머/ 카운터접점 256채널 (타이머+카운터), 설정치 : 0 ~65535
�타이머 : 0.01초 : CH000 ~ CH063 (64채널) , 0.1초 : CH064 ~ CH255 (192채널)
(TC 또는 TIM) �카운터 : CH000 ~ CH255 (256채널)
데이터 레지스터 (W) W0000 ~ W2047, W3072 ~ W5119 (4096워드)

특수레지스터 (W, SR) W2560(=SR000)~W3071(=SR511) (512워드)
시계기능 (RTC) 년, 월, 일, 시, 분. 초, 요일
Port 1 Port 1 : RS232C/ RS485 겸용, 9600/ 19200/ 38400 bps
통신기능 Port 2 : RS232C/ RS485 겸용, 4800/ 9600/ 19200/ 38400 bps
Port 2 사용자정의 통신방식 지원 (바코드, INVERTER, 서보 드라이버를 통신으로 연결가능)
바이너리통신 지원
FLASH ROM Backup 사용자 PROGRAM Backup 내장
■ 일반 사양
항 목 사 양
사용 온도 0 � 55℃
주변 온도
보존 온도 -25 � 70℃
주변 습도
내전압
전원 유니트
■ 제품도 ■ 성능 사양
제품 번호 NX-POWER NX-PWR220
입력 정격전압 AC 110�220V, Free Voltage AC 220V
입력 정격전류 540mA max 300mA Max
허용 전압범위 AC 85 � 264V AC 176 � 264V
입력 전원주파수 47 � 63Hz 47 � 63Hz
돌입 전류 20A 이하 20A 이하
정격 출력전류 5V 4.0A, 24V 0.5A 5V 6.0A
중 량 약 350g 약 300g
제품 번호 NX-PWRDC
입력 정격전압 DC 24V
입력 정격전류 1.7A man
허용 전압범위 DC 21.6�26.4V
전원 유니트 정격 출력전류 5V 5.0A
중 량 약 320g
마더보드
3슬롯 마더보드 5슬롯 마더보드 8슬롯 마더보드

(NX-BASE03) (NX-BASE05) (NX-BASE08)
10슬롯 마더보드 12슬롯 마더보드

(NX-BASE10) (NX-BASE12)
주의 �마더보드의 슬롯수는 I/O 모듈 및 특수모듈을 실장할 수 있는 수입니다.

�NX700 PLC의 마더보드는 기본 및 증설마더보드 구별없이 동일하게 사용합니다.
�NX700 PLC의 마더보드는 1장만 증설할 수 있습니다
입력 유니트
■ 특징
�16점, 32점, 64점 입력유니트
� DC 입력 타입은 ＋, －COMMON 모두
사용가능
�LED 표시에 의한 동작확인
�전 모듈의 포토커플러 절연
�터미널 블럭(16점 모듈)의 단자대 분리로
사용자 편리성 확대
16점 TYPE 32점 TYPE 64점 TYPE

입력유니트 입력유니트 입력유니트
■ 입력 유니트 규격
입력 형식 DC입력 AC입력
제품 코드 NX-X16D NX-X32D NX-X64D NX-X16A110 NX-X16A220
입력점수 16점 32점 64점 16점
정격 입력전압 12 ~ 24V DC 12 ~ 24V DC 100 ~ 120V AC 200 ~ 240V AC
사용 전압범위 10.2 ~ 26.4V DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V DC 85 ~ 132V AC 170 ~ 264V AC
최대 입력전류 10mA 이하 10mA 이하 20mA 이하 20mA 이하
ON 전압 최소 9.6V 최소 9.6V 최소 AC 80V 최소 AC 160V
동작전압
OFF전압 최대 2,5V 최대 2.5V 최대 AC 30V 최대 AC 50V
내전압 포토 커플러 절연
OFF→ON 10ms 이하 10ms 이하
10ms 이하 10ms 이하 15ms 이하 15ms 이하
응답시간
ON→OFF 10ms 이하 10ms 이하
10ms 이하 10ms 이하 20ms 이하 20ms 이하
내부소비전류 65mA 130mA 250mA 60mA 60mA
COMMON 방식 8점/ 1COM(극성＋,－ 공통) 32점/ 1COM (극성＋,－ 공통) 8점/ 1COM
동작 표시 LED 표시 (단, 64점은 32점씩 변환표시)
외부접속방식 분리형 단자대 (M3.5) 40P 커넥타 x 1 40P 커넥타 x 2 분리형 단자대 (M3.5)
■ 외부접속도 주의 아래그림(NX-X32D/ NX-X64D)의 번호(1�40)는 제품전면에 인쇄되어 있는 번호를 나타냅니다.
NX-X16D NX-X32D NX-X64D NX-X16A110/ NX-X16A220
(주)
(Ⅰ) (Ⅱ) (주1) NX-X16A220: AC 200-240V
출력 유니트
■ 특징
�16점, 32점, 64점 입력유니트
�LED 표시에 의한 동작확인
�전 모듈의 포토커플러 절연
�터미널 블럭(16점 모듈)의 단자대 분리로
사용자 편리성 확대
16점 TYPE 32점 TYPE 64점 TYPE

출력유니트 출력유니트 출력유니트
■ 출력 유니트 규격
출력 형식 트랜지스터 (NPN) 출력 릴레이 출력 SSR 출력
제품 코드 NX-Y16T NX-Y32T NX-Y64T NX-Y16R NX-Y16RV NX-Y32RV NX-Y16SSR
출력점수 16점 32점 64점 16점 32점 16점
절연방식 포토 커플러 절연 SSR
정격 부하 전압 12V ~ 24V DC 250V AC, 30V DC 100V~240V AC
사용 부하 전압 범위 10V ~ 30V DC 85 V ~ 264V AC, 10V~30V DC 85V ~ 264V AC
최대 부하 전류 0.6A /점 0.4A /점 0.2A /점 2A/ 점, 5A/ COM 1A/점, 3A/COM 0.5A/점, 2A/COM
응답 OFF→ON 1㎳ 이하 10㎳ 이하 1㎳ 이하
시간 ON→OFF 1㎳ 이하 10㎳ 이하 0.5CYCLE+1m이하
내부 소비 전류(5V) 120㎃ 180㎃ 250㎃ 120㎃ 180㎃ 250㎃
서지 킬러 제너 다이오드 없음 바리스터 없음
퓨즈 정격 없음 3.0A
COMMON 방식 8점/ COM 32점/ COM 8점/ COM 32점/ COM 8점 / COM
동작 표시 LED 표시 (단, 64점은 32점씩 변환표시)
외부 접속 방식 분리형단자대 (M3.5) 40P 커넥타ｘ1 40P 커넥타ｘ2 분리형 단자대 (M 3.5) 40P 커넥타ｘ1 분리형 단자대 (M 3.5)
■ 외부 접속도 주의 아래그림(NX-Y32T, NX-Y64T, NX-Y32RV)의 번호(1�40)는 제품전면에 인쇄되어 있는 번호를 나타냅니다.

NX-Y16T NX-Y32T/ NX-Y64T NX-Y16R/ NX-Y16RV NX-Y32RV NX-Y16SSR
250VAC
30VDC
최대
250V AC AC100~240V
30V DC
qXpT qXfT qYkT qYj
6}3 Zl, UxF f3zv*
w8~
Kchm RLi ]SB Cj}
K>Nwb _ e:q ;USZN
Ke2}} sd _ rXq q}2+}3
QiC[* u` +~UES` s, N]un lD {oQENn

M H5[ rz QiC[* G8./S
wF2{V
q X p ` Y o n Y a
.o N:
A i
4 1==e5==0 1==2=e5==2=
5 4e==2=
6 4e5==
h0Ho N:
8 4e7==
< 4e;==
? 4e===
A 4e5644
D :44e5:44
M M`544k
v7WS N: G G-FA.
H H-A?.
N N-MN.
87A3 N: N ?6t 87K

O OON x1}` 87K
A }:87K-BA8164[?.
}n}` N: 7 5543664R?A 943:4Ed

8 5441684R?A 943:4Ed
-aA3 N:
@ LK3LDD -a0 P8-a ul
O BFK OXdV S8<hE8<[[

kKQt3 N: E BFK OXdV S8<hE=:[[
J BFK OXdV S;6hE;6[[
I BFK OXdV S=:hE=:[[
IY N: 7 7 BXWX`
8 8 BXWX`
{0 N:
P PV[]V^Tà^V
uF2 Tx[ WSM f3 Kl@ H5[ GqCb {\[eS PaRXW <p} *zQ
A175
>|F
wWSM f3Kl
P_Q
\>3@ qXp qXf qYk T qYj .j4
f}/ ;h{G7 f}/ ;h{G7 f}/ ;h{G7

|lWS
G-FA. H-A?. M`544k G-FA. H-A?. M`544k G-FA. H-A?. N-MN. M`544k
P`Q
5:44i
-i. 5:44 2pB
5644i
5644
===i
; 5444
;==i ;==i ;==i
, <44 PaQ
:44 f3
h 7==i 7==i 7==i 7==i 7==i 7==i 7==i 7==i :44i 7==i zv*
844 5==2=i
0 5==i 5==i 5==i
644 ==2=i ==2=i
H 544 PbQ
o 4 u<
1544 1==i 1==2=i
zx*
j|l WSn N-MN. Pc]Vu rm :44i tEdS+ iE< -a@Vr br Y cpD9 Ql\ 1sE^\g2
PcQ
wxyTV- :+C2
\ > 3 @ qXp qXf qYk qYj

PdQ
} n } ` VUURWYUs`b ZUT[Ug8 VVUTWWUs`b ZUT[Ug8 20T
Z@5T
Jl}`J1Ho sdsQi Û9VVUN ;ZC2
X P } 7 Zs` Xs`
PeQ
C \ F ] \q}*.}/4 kdc c+31-z7 6Z?;p
m.7
C x ? { tY<g].. t[<gVU.. t\SW<g^S].. t^SZ<gVYSW..
C \ , 0 eIq ; VN 2|* ;V|+*+4 eIq ; USZN 2|* ;V|+*+4
PfQ
U , F ] c+*+4z- Hw WS
17=:
U , , 0 e:q ; VN e:q ; USZN
ZsÒrSbP _ jOb`PQ iOhbPQ pOopPT 0] rE-OprcP _ o4VUU@
v 7 W S PgQ
x^Q rXqQ rXgZ pOopPj x` g\]Sy Zl-9k
S?7p
v 7 T 9 { G ZsÒrSbP _ VUU@ jA T 0] rE-OprcP _ B G_ Z@ jA
ytGb _
LK3LDD-a ytGb _ eIq USW9XN D9
-a eIq USZN ;USWN Ow PhQ
}wWS
F] Aq` = _ eIq XN Ow
P 8 - a Aq` = _ eIq V9VUN D9Q AqzT _ WU. Ow
AqzT _ WU. Ow
NCOCP RN .~Ho e:q ;XN D9 PiQ
=6WS
Kzoj vu/p _
WZUs`b W` V{
Kqqp QdsQ /p _ Kzoj vu/p _ WZUs`b X` V{
PjQ
- a 8 7 VWscb ;Xs WU.` lz6S Kqqp QdsQ /p _ WYscb ;Xs WU.` lz6S ^<WS
Kb522}/4 /p_ Kb522}/4 /p _ cbYRWU.` k0z| [UU@ lz6S
cbYRWU.` k0z|
[UU@ lz6S
PkQ
x { 5 . a52/ n54 Jr VqOIF ^GN /p ,^P a01
~ e { G VUUl@ jDOZUUscb ~DT{P

PlQ
} } ` WUUUs`b ZUT[Ug8WF V@F ZR Z5B
F4 O
} * t 3 Xj} N/oj7W iB 5H9 Xj}O:L= V?P ;V,s 57pJ O
17=:
} 5 1 VU 9 ZZg8OzTV@FP <*= US\Z.. uQ vQ w E 5G VNF
5 1
g 1 y VU 9 ZZg8OzTV@FP <*= USZ.. uQ vQ w E 5G VU@F PmQ
|9A
} 9 q XUU.T3COXUfP uQ vQ w E 5G XJ :+
9 q
g 1 y VUU.T3COVUfP uQ vQ w E 5G XJ
?6t { s | VUUU|J jD
Y @ } { | VU|J jDOWZUs`b X` rE ?AP PnQ*2
Q l 1 o h 0 RVU 9 ZU=O^Q MBe~ PZ D6P

K / h 0 RWU 9 [U=O^Q MBe~ PZ D6P
Q l 1 o [ 0 XZ9]ZNpg
2 5 R V^[* R Y^[* R X^^* R Y[]*
>^Q |mg <q2L x`f .KlS
>e5-- q{z-}OeSqPg IF: 0w]b 8e_ dkD\]S
[P0w]b 8eD R^^S^9V^^S^= k Nc e5-- q{z-}g MW^^S]Mj g\]S
A176
qXpT qXfT qYkT qYj
wwX3
jNPB-Gy ;h {G7. > M` 544k-7T]. jP2A-f}/. > H0 G0 N
KqXp KqYk
jP8Jq P8J?j =tZ= ulp9 Ql
E+ ws9 -Dd+ ?ZT^[ \a` .xn
OCKOLN C\2awp| 1yE4 _[,-2
KALKP?AP LQP >
694R?A 6? 5U NCOFOPFRC IL?B P2A / 1
KOON LQP >
56RBA g7R 64[? JTb2 NPB ? @ @,
KAQNNCKP LQP >
BA8164[? IL?B :44k JTb2 ] ^ VU VV VW VX VY
j
/ A
?I?NJ LQP
1 Y Z
I E
@,
X [
@
W \
1
V ]
OCKOLN
I E
/ /
?
e 1 A 664R?A 554R?A 4R
P2A NPB
M OLQNAC V W X Y Z [ \
5441684R?A
KALKP?AP LQP>
943:4Ed 9R? 694R?A 7? 5U e
NCOFOPFRC IL?B e
KOON LQP> M OLQNAC
68RBA g7R
64[? JTb2
KAQNNCKP LQP>
BA8164[?
IL?B :44k JTb2
KqXf KqYj
OCKOLN
4R KAQNNCKP LQP> P2A NPB
V BA8164[? / V KALKP?AP LQP> V]
IL?B :44k JTb2 I / ?
e 694R?A 7? 5U
554R?A A
e W VU / 1 W NCOFOPFRC IL?B V\
KOON LQP> @
664R?A E 68RBA g7R 1
X VV 1 X V[
M OLQNAC 64[? JTb2 @,
KAQNNCKP LQP>
Y VW Y BA8164[? VZ
KALKP?AP LQP>
694R?A 7? 5U IL?B :44k JTb2
NCOFOPFRC IL?B Z VX Z VY
KOON LQP>
68RBA g7R [ VY [ VX
64[? JTb2
664R?A
\ VZ \ VW
E @,
/ A N 554R?A
] V[ ] e M OLQNAC VV
@
1 e
I 4R
^ V\ ^ VU
? M
NPB P2A
OCKOLN
A177
>|F
whF,Y3
P_Q
vqXp .j4
KO4> KA~ nu<Y0

8< 544 97tR P`Q
2pB
56 ;7 59
/42:
89 14 PaQ
f3
zv*
:6tR
:4
89 /42:
8<
89
r r r
i 14
X ^ ^ NCOCP
PbQ
/
4
J J J 1
qXp i UsX^^t
u<
zx*
.o>[[
PcQ
vqXf :+C2
KA~ nu<Y0
58:
8< 94tR
56 568 54 PdQ
20T
Z@5T
;ZC2
PeQ
=6 /42<
14
6Z?;p
LQP
t m.7
MP544 4e7==i
=:
544
546tR
=5
89 /42: PfQ
14
X ^ ^ WS
17=:
54
/
1 5
NCOCP
PgQ
M2@+
qXf Zl-9k
S?7p
.o>[[
PhQ
vqYk }wWS
KA~ nu<Y0
<: 569 =5tR
PiQ
;6 57 546 54 =6WS
t :< /42;
14
PjQ
^<WS
=5tR :< /42;

;6
:;
14
V W U U
PkQ
4
a01
5 54 1 /
M2@+ H-A?.4e5644i NCOCP
P8J
.o>[[ PlQ
ZR Z5B
F4 O
57pJ O
vqYj 17=:
KA~ nu<Y0
=: 55<
55:tR PmQ
5< <; |9A
57
:+
PCJMCN?PQNC
i
LQP
=6 /42<
14
PnQ*2
FKMQP N-MN. :44e5:44i

54=
=:
55:tR =6 /42<
=4
14
V [ U U
5 54 1 /
M2@+ NCOCP
P8I
.o>[[
A178
qXpT qXfT qYkT qYj
wG?x QiC, IL
vuD N>o Qi` 0Cb KP8I3P7E
I\UY z<
A
X ^ ^
4 A
5 54 1 /
M2@+ NCOCP
B
qYk
8, 26w ZO A7 5G U~ JDlfr o+/ @nS
M2@ L; NV_V` L; fr hkj6r cy KOB OAPw Yv D6WF B7P
KoSa >t 5GfrP _T+ 3jL_ Ij koH hkj6r 3j
nmTneexT k jZ ytGb =OeSq USW9XN D9P @xg\]S Lw iT ^yKO3`;b
hQ AqxTk jZ Aq` =OeSq V9VUN D9Ph dkAKP A 5Gfr 1+
HwD\]S ^Q rXqWFZ ytGb =OeSq USZNPP @xg\]S
Aq` =OeSq XNPg OweT nM\]S vf3zv*g OCwXo d
Kp}3}4 >t
KOON 87s rm
AqxTr CbC NcW 4EAZ wD;,On~~3}4P
h0.~{ B+* ?6t-OON.
w KwAZ >tm\]S /
p}3}4 >ti yw =g eSq ;XN m\]S nmTnee /
OON F I
xTr CbC NcWZ p}3}4 >th cx~ {ON\S K
ME
4 x1}` 56RBA \^ 68RBA M
L
?
l m 87.x 64[? JTb2 Q B ME
P f
1 }n
1 / 1
17+ /7+
NCOCP RN >qqp QdsQh ]v bbr CbN wL ssw
AwD;,OneeqdrPD Hw1;] 5 jZ a+fr .PA~ PZ 8e VWF CbAON\S
ywS OA5GP >Nx}:r qqp Qdb sQj ]u0r CbW zi
BwD;,OneeqdrPD Hw1;] ph jZ \v+ AX zON\S
fr ywS OB5GP K?6t 87s rm
vxIc4t h0.~{
ME
Ydpg ~N1D Hw1;] Uh j /ph nmAZ KL
dph }A* DZNWZ Ydpfr CbD\]S I ME
f }n
wdpg jJPZ 3`r dph FA* WEi NcW A
ALJ
CbD\]S O= x?g Ydpfr dpD\]SP
E
vy_F5o uH IL KA ?6t +* 87 .x
= TTZ /AN AqxTOoPr HweT nM\]S
nmTneexTr CbC NcWZ TTw 3jLr?7 >-a:r pvi vubmj ]u0r ziAX zO
@xB K xT-h sILe1w oWF e5Gfr sI N\S ?Ai bmj 5 NcWZ vubmj 4 ;y
AX zON\S ^ xT/pj ss/pk NcWZ o zojw CbAX zON\S
xTb Owe0r xT-h sI o+/j VM\]S K}: 87s rm
}7.,{
h0.~{ -OMA5179.
M D M D
/
/
P8-a LK3LDD-a
F
I ME
v/pZ PAIL }`87 BA8164[? K
L
.x M
KP8I3P7E IL?B :44k JTb2 ?
Q
B
ME
f
P }n
1
1
B s+ Djh k0{, ?w
erOA5GP Yv D6 >cbYRWU.` ss1Z ?A rEHj [UU@ jAW
WF s+fr LiT F| Cbj D[A\\ ziAX zON\S
_T+OB5GP 3jL
_ @xg\]S j:z\ 1sQGv h0.~{s oBF pQFId
A /HS+ A1;MTWV = 6tE^\g2
A179
표준사양서
PRODUCT NOISE FILTER 일 시 2007.08.28.
MODEL SN-M1H-CM SN-M3H-CM SN-M6H-CM
허 용 전 압 250VAC, 단상
입 력 조 건 주 파 수 50/60Hz
허 용 전 류 1A 3A 6A
누 설 전 류 0.5mA max (250VAC 인가시, 60Hz)
내 전 압 1500VAC(at cut off current 10mA), 1min

LINE/GND
절 연 저 항 300MΩ min (500VDC 인가시)
전 압 강 하 1.5V/PHASE max
온 도 상 승 주위온도 + 40 ℃ Max
동작 온도 범위 -25 ~ 85℃, 20% ~ 90% RH (Non condensing)
보존 온도 범위 -25 ~ 100℃, 20% ~ 90% RH (Non condensing)

일 반 항 목
진동 시험 조건 10~55Hz at 1G 3 minutes periods, 30minutes along X,Y and Z axis
SIZE(길이×폭×높이) 50×32×25
비고 :
REV.
서식번호 BR-41('94. 9. 1.) REV 2

+" fghh / " 34 {;

N 0O |} %ae [ a9_ ;! %

,x+" )*N K12cO {N12 O *N 2O
DE BC
+" $ae ,- ab+/ yz 834 {; 8|} s ,x[ {
ae ¡ ae R¢ £ s¤¥ ,x?@A
4 ! "#" $

%
( & ' ) * + , )3+ -
-2 &'
! %
& . 2& . . . 22

&1
& . & . / .
& . &
& . /&
& . &
& . 2&
& . 20&
& . &
& . &

. . . 22 .
& . 0& &
. . / . .
& . 50&

& . 2<&
& . 2 0<&
& . <&
& . <&
& . 0<&
& . 5 0<&

F F
Future Automation Link
FA배선기기 종합 Catalogue Vol.4
고신뢰성 / 장수명 경제형

OMRON G6DS/G6B 릴레이 사용 Tyco PCN/PANASONIC PA 릴레이 사용
www.falink.net
FA링크-5차 2012.7.30 4:31 PM 페이지6
TB 단자대 (7.0mm Pitch, 인터페이스 표준 단자대)

■ 특징 및 장점
Y형 단자 및 O형 단자 공통으로 사용
안전성 구조 및 내환경성
콘넥터식 PLC 및 전용 콘트롤러 I/O에 사용
취부면적의 최소화
작업 및 유지·보수 편리
■ 형명 구성
TB - 1H40 적용 콘넥터 사양 및 단자 Pole수
7.0mm Pitch 인터페이스 표준 단자대
■ Model 선정
장착 콘넥터 케이블측 콘넥터 제품 치수
Model Pole수 장착 콘넥터 Model Model (W×D mm)
TB-1H20 20 MIL Standard HIF3BA-20PA-2.54DSA HIF3BA-20D-2.54R 80×40
TB-1H40 40 MIL Standard HIF3BA-40PA-2.54DSA, XG4A-4031 HIF3BA-40D-2.54R 148×40
TB-1H50 50 MIL Standard HIF3BA-50PA-2.54DSA HIF3BA-50D-2.54R 183×40
※ 장착 콘넥터는 호환 가능한 제품으로 예고없이 변경될 수 있습니다.
■ 일반 사양 ■ 재질
정격 전압 125V AC / 24V DC 단자대 및 커버 Modified PPO
정격 전류 1A 보호커버 Polycarbonate
절연 저항 100㏁ 이상(DC 500V)
내전압 AC 500V 1min
적합 전선 1.25㎟/MAX
단자 Screw M3×10L
Screw 토크 1.2N·m (12Kgf·cm)
사용 주위온도 -10℃ ~ +50℃ (결로가 없을 것)
■ 적용 압착단자 사양
MAX6.2
MAX6.2
MIN3
MIN3
MIN5.8 MAX4.2 MIN5.8 MAX4.2
6
FA링크-5차 2012.7.30 4:31 PM 페이지7
TB 단자대 (7.0mm Pitch, 인터페이스 표준 단자대)
TB-1H20 ■ 외관도
■ 결선도
콘넥터측
단자대측
■ 결선도
■ 결선도
Future Automation Link 7

FA링크-5차 2012.7.30 4:31 PM 페이지17
F4T-G6DS (4점, 유도부하에 강한 OMRON G6DS 릴레이)

■ 특징 및 장점
중부하용 장수명 릴레이보드
유도성 부하, 개폐빈도가 큰 부하, Noise가 많은 부하에 적합한
고신뢰성의 장수명 및 경제형 릴레이보드
사용자의 편리한 기능
■ Model 선정
Common Interface 제품 치수
Model I/O점수 Coil 정격 전압 (W×D mm)
Coil측 Contact측 Coil측 Contact측
4Point 개별 전원 개별 Com. Screw 단자대
F4T-G6DS 24V DC 32.3×67
(1a×4) (4P 쇼트바 내장) (4P 쇼트바 내장) 7.62mm Pitch
■ G6DS 릴레이 사양 ■ 내부 결선도

항 목 G6DS-1A
INPUT
접점 구성 Ω1a
접점 정격 부하 5A 250V AC/5A 30V DC
Contact 최대 통전 전류 5A
최대 개폐 전압 270V AC/150V DC
정격 전압 24V DC
동작 전압 70% 이하
코일
복귀 전압 5% 이상
Coil
코일 저항 3,200Ω
정격 소비전력 180mW
■ 외관도 (투명 PC커버 개방 시)

67.1
OMRON OUTPUT
찬넬 착탈 레버 M3 BOLT 릴레이x4EA 37.5
29.1 (중판치부 Holes)
7.6
32.3
접점 동작 확인용 LED
■ 릴레이 교체 방법(릴레이 교체 공구 내장) ■ 내장품 ■ 적용 압착단자 사양

4Pole용 Short bar(2ea)
MAX6.2
MAX6.2
MIN3
MIN3
MIN5.8 MAX4.2 MIN5.8 MAX4.2
Future Automation Link 17

Meta Solution
Meta Solution
기종일람표 MCCB
배선용차단기
AF 30AF 50AF 60AF
Type E-Type S-Type N-Type S-Type H-Type N-Type S-Type

형명 및 극수 2극 (2-pole) ABE32b ABS32c ABN52c ABS52c ABH52c ABN62c ABS62c
3극 (3-pole) ABE33b ABS33c ABN53c ABS53c ABH53c ABN63c ABS63c
4극 (4-pole) - ABS34c ABN54c ABS54c ABH54c ABN64c ABS64c
정격전류, In A (3, 5, 10) 주1), 15, 20, 30 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
정격전압, Ue AC (V) 460 690 690 690 690 690 690

DC (V) - 500 500 500 500 500 500
정격절연전압(Ui) V 460 750 750 750 750 750 750
정격임펄스전압(Uimp) kV 6 8 8 8 8 8 8
정격차단전류(Icu) kA (Sym), KS C 8321, IEC 60947-2

AC 690V - 2.5 2.5 5 10 2.5 5
480/500V - 7.5 (5) 7.5 10 35 7.5 10
415/460V 2.5 14 (10) 14 18 50 14 18
380V 2.5 18 (14) 18 22 50 18 22
220/250V 5 30 (25) 30 35 100 30 35
DC 500V (3극) - 5 5 10 30 5 10
250V (2극) - 5 5 10 30 5 10
Ics=%×Icu 50 100 100 100 100 100 100
외형치수(mm) W×H×D 75×96×60mm 75×130×60mm 75×130×60mm 90×155×60mm 75×130×60mm
(3극) (외형도 1) (외형도 1) (외형도 2) (외형도 1)
기술자료 상세정격 36 쪽 38 쪽 40 쪽 40 쪽 42 쪽
특성곡선 105 쪽 105 쪽 105 쪽 106 쪽 105 쪽
외형 및 설치치수 112 쪽 113 쪽 113 쪽 114 쪽 113 쪽
주) 1. S-Type의 정격차단전류중 ( ) 는 3, 5, 10A 정격전류 제품만 해당합니다. 2. 50/60Hz 공용사용 가능합니다. 3. 안전인증 취득정격은 220V, 460V 기준입니다.
4. DC 차단전류는 참고치 입니다. 5. 개정된 KS(‘11,‘12) 규격에 의해 인증완료(220V, 460V) 6. 신 KS에서는 3극 차단기의 2극 변형 제품에 대하여 정의하지 않습니다.
Metasol MCCB
Ø7.4
AF
Type 30AF 50AF 60AF 100AF 125AF 250AF 50
Ø4.5
130
115
ABN50c ABN60c ABN100c ABN250c

84
50
ABN 14kA 14kA 18kA 26kA
ABS30c ABS50c ABS60c ABS125c ABS250c

ABS 14kA 18kA 18kA 37kA 37kA
22 58
60
ABH50c ABH125c ABH250c 50
ABH 50kA 50kA 50kA 64
75
68
82
(외형도 1)
22
100AF 125AF 250AF
N-Type S-Type H-Type N-Type S-Type H-Type

ABN102c ABN102d ABS102c ABH102c ABN202c ABS202c ABH202c
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 100 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 100, 125 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
690 690 690 690 690 690 690

500 500 500 500 500 500 500
750 750 750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
5 7.5 8 10 8 8 10
10 14 26 35 18 26 35
18 26 37 50 26 37 50
22 30 42 50 30 42 50
35 50 85 100 65 85 100
10 15 20 30 10 20 30
10 15 20 30 10 20 30
100 50 100 100 100 100 100
75×130×60mm 90×155×60mm 105×165×60mm
(외형도 1) (외형도 2) (외형도 3)
44 쪽 46 쪽 48
105 쪽 106 쪽 107
113 쪽 114 쪽 115
Ø8.2
Ø8.2
50
Ø5
47
Ø4.5
100
50
155
135
59.4
102
126
144
165
50
60 58
60 60
90 35
64 64
70
68 68.5
105
82
86.85
(외형도 2) (외형도 3)
23
30AF MCCB
ABE30b
제품의 정격 및 사양
프레임의 크기 30AF
형명 및 극수 E-Type
2극 (2-pole) ABE32b
3극 (3-pole) ABE33b
4극 (4-pole) -
정격전류, In 3-5-10-15-20-30A
정격전압, Ue AC : 460V
-
정격절연전압, Ui AC : 460V
ABE32b
정격임펄스전압, Uimp 6kV
정격차단전류, Icu 주1) E-Type

KS C8321(Sym) AC 690V -
IEC 60947-2 (lcu) 480/500V -
460V
2.5kA
415V 2.5kA
380V 2.5kA
220/250V
5kA
DC 500V (3극) -
ABE33b
250V (2극) -
lcs=%×Icu 50%
보호기능 과부하, 순시 및 단락전류

과전류트립방식 완전전자식 (ODP)
순시트립동작특성 12In
내구수명 기계적 8500회
전기적 1500회
접속방식 표준 표면형 (Front connection)
선택 -
-
설치방식 표준 나사취부
외형치수 (mm) 극수 2극 3극
ad 50 75
c2
a c1
b 96 96
c1 주2) 60 60
b
c2 주2) - -
d 80 80
기타 자료 제품중량, kg 표준 0.5 0.7
•외형치수 ▶ 112 쪽
취득규격 극수 2극 3극
•특성곡선 ▶ 105 쪽
•부속장치 ▶ 80 쪽 전기용품안전관리법 ○ ○
•부착과 접속 ▶ 130 쪽 CE 마크 ○ ○
주) 1. 정격차단전류중 안전인증(형식승인) 취득정격은 빨간색 글씨부분이고 나머지 전압의 차단전류는 참고정격임.
2. C1 : 명판 노출 방법, C2 : 핸들 노출 방법
36
250AF MCCB
ABN250c, ABS250c, ABH250c
제품의 정격 및 사양
형명 및 극수 N-Type S-Type H-Type
2극 (2-pole) ABN202c ABS202c ABH202c
정격전류, In 100-125-150-175-200-225-250A
정격전압, Ue AC : 690V
DC : 500V
정격절연전압, Ui AC : 750V
ABS202c
정격임펄스전압, Uimp 8kV
정격차단전류, Icu 주1) N-Type S-Type H-Type

KS C 8321(Sym) AC 690V 8kA 8kA 10kA
IEC 60947-2 (lcu) 480/500V 18kA 26kA 35kA
lcs=100%Icu 460V 26kA 37kA 50kA
415V 26kA 37kA 50kA
380V 30kA 42kA 50kA
220/250V
65kA 85kA 100kA
DC 500V (3극) 10kA 20kA 30kA
250V (2극) 10kA 20kA 30kA
ABS203c lcs=%×Icu 100% 100% 100%
보호기능 과부하, 순시 및 단락전류

과전류트립방식 열동전자식 (Thermal-Magnetic, TM)
순시트립동작특성 12×In
내구수명 기계적 20000회
전기적 5000회
접속방식 표준 표면형 (Front connection)
선택 이면형 (Rear connection)
꽂음접속식 (Plug-in)
설치방식 표준 나사취부
ABS204c 외형치수 (mm) 극수 2극 3극 4극 2극 3극 4극 2극 3극 4극

d
ac2 105 105 140 105 105 140 105 105 140
a c1
b 165 165 165
c1 주2) 60 60 60
b
c2 주2) 64 64 64
d 87 87 87
기타 자료 제품중량, kg 표준 1.1 1.2 1.6 1.1 1.2 1.6 1.1 1.2 1.6
•외형치수 ▶ 115 쪽
취득규격 극수 2극 3극 4극 2극 3극 4극 2극 3극 4극
•특성곡선 ▶ 107 쪽
•부속장치 ▶ 80 쪽 전기용품안전관리법 ○ ○ ○
•부착과 접속 ▶ 130 쪽 CE 마크 ○ ○ ○
주) 1. 정격차단전류중 안전인증(형식승인) 취득정격은 빨간색 글씨부분이고 나머지 전압의 차단전류는 참고정격임.
2. C1 : 명판 노출 방법, C2 : 핸들 노출 방법
3. 4극형 제품의 경우 N상의 통전전류는 정격전류의 최대 50%임.
48
특성곡선
적용모델 온도 보정 곡선표 정격전류 : 3~30A (ABE)

MCCB ABE30b
ABE30b
적용모델 온도 보정 곡선표
MCCB ABN/S, EBN/S
ABN50c/60c/100c/100d
ABS30c/50c/60c
ELCB
EBN50c/60c/100c
EBS30c/50c/60c
정격전류 : 3~30A (ABN/S,EBN/S) 정격전류 : 40~100A (ABN/S,EBN/S)
106
특성곡선
적용모델 정격전류 : 100~225A

MCCB
ABN250c, ABS250c
ABH250c
ELCB
EBN250c, EBS250c
EBH250c
온도 보정 곡선표 정격전류 : 250A

240
정격전류 : 100~225A 180
150
정 150 120
100
80
격 60
전 40
류
분 20
변 100
10
화 8
6
율
4
(%)
2
50 최대값
0 10 20 30 40 50
동작시간
1
주위온도℃(40℃기준) 40
20
10
8
6 최소값
4
2
정격전류 : 250A
정 150 1
초 0.8
격 0.6
0.4
전 순시트립범위
류 0.2 (960~1440%)
변 100 0.1
0.08
화 0.06
율 0.04
(%) 0.02
50
0 10 20 30 40 50 0.01
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 80 100
주위온도℃(40℃기준)
전류(정격전류의 배수)
108
Miniature
circuit
breakers
BK63H
BK63H DC
BK63HU
• 극수 : 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
• 정격전류 : 1~63A
• 정격차단용량 : 10kA
• 순시트립특성 : B, C, D
• 보호기능 : 과부하 및 단락전류
• 상태 표시창 및 듀얼 터미널 적용
• 다양한 부속장치 :
AX, AL, SHT, UVT, OVT
CONTENTS
BK63H CE(IEC), 선급인증 차단기 특징 4

BK63H CE(IEC), 선급인증 차단기 부속장치 5
BK63H DC 회로용 차단기 6
BK63H DC 회로용 차단기 부속장치 7
BK63HU / BK63HU (Q class) CE(IEC), 안전인증 차단기 8
형명체계 10
BK63H CE(IEC) 차단기/BK63H DC 회로용 차단기 외형치수 11
BK63H CE(IEC), 선급인증 차단기 부속장치 외형치수 12
BK63HU / BK63HU (Q class) CE(IEC), 안전인증 차단기 외형치수 13
특성곡선 14
CE(IEC), 선급인증 차단기 DC 회로용 차단기

Miniature circuit breakers
BK63H
CE(IEC), 선급인증 차단기
• 극수 : 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P

• 정격전류 : 1~63A
• 정격차단용량 : 10kA
• 순시트립특성 : B, C, D
• 보호기능 : 과부하 및 단락전류
• 상태 표시창 및 듀얼 터미널 적용
• 다양한 부속장치 :
AX, AL, SHT, UVT, OVT
형명 BK63H
극수 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
정격전류, In 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63A
정격차단전류 적용규격 전압 1P 2P, 3P, 4P
IEC 60947-2, Icu AC415V 10kA -

ON/OFF AC240V - 10kA
상태표시창
Ics(=%Icu) 75% 75%
IEC 60898 AC240/415V 10kA 10kA
정격전압 AC 240V 240/415V
DC 60V 125V
정격절연전압(Ui) AC 500V
정격임펄스전압(Uimp) AC 6kV
정격주파수 50/60 Hz
순시트립동작특성 B(4In), C(7.5In), D(12In)
보호기능 과부하, 단락전류
내구수명 전기적 10,000회

AX, AL
기계적 20,000회
보호등급 IP20
전선치수 및 토크 18-4 AWG (0.75 … 25mm2) 20 Kgf.cm
설치방식 35mm Din Rail부착
단자구조 Lug/Screw 이중구조
과전류트립방식 열동전자식(Thermal-Magnetic)
주위온도 -25~+55℃(사용)
인증현황 CE, 안전인증(KC), SEMKO CB
선급: ABS, BV, DNV, GL, KR, LR, RINA

SHT, UVT, OVT
4
외형치수
BK63H CE(IEC) 차단기 / BK63H DC 회로용 차단기
●BK63H / BK63H DC
33
21
15
81
36.0
64
81
64
45
44
5.5 18 36
60
68 (1p) (2p)
81
81
64
64
54 72
●BK63HU (3p) (4p)
74
65.5
56.2 18 36 54
105
36
45
64
5.5
11
I n d u s t r i a l C o n t r o l s
EQ5 시리즈
16
EQ5 시리즈
EQ5-03012 (12V 2.5A) EQ5-05012 (12V 4.2A)

EQ5-03024 (24V 1.2A) EQ5-05024 (24V 2.1A)
EQ5-07512 (12V 6.2A) EQ5-10012 (12V 8.4A)

EQ5-07524 (24V 3.1A) EQ5-10024 (24V 4.2A)
EQ5-17512 (12V 14.6A) EQ5-24012 (12V 20A)

EQ5-17524 (24V 7.3A) EQ5-24024 (24V 10A)
※ 상기 표기된 제품외의 전압 및 사양은 주문 생산이므로 납기 및 가격은 각 대리점에 문의바랍니다.
16-4
성능 및 사양 (EQ5 시리즈)
입력조건
전압 단락편 선택방식 110~240VAC (85~264VAC)
주파수 50/60Hz
구분 30W 50W 75W 100W 175W 240W
전류 110VAC 0.4A 0.6A 1.0A 1.2A 2.2A 2.8A
220VAC 0.2A 0.3A 0.5A 0.6A 1.1A 1.4A
110VAC 0.5mA이하
최소전류
220VAC 1mA이하
110VAC 25A 이하
돌입전류
220VAC 50A 이하
노이즈 휠터 있음
※ 제품 출하시 220VAC로 셋팅되어 있습니다.
출력특성
전압가변범위 ±10% 이내
리플노이즈 2%(P-P)이하
입력변동 0.5%이하(입력 85∼264VAC, 100% 부하시)
부하변동 1.5%이하(10∼100%이하)
온도변동 0.05%이하/℃ 이하
기동시간 100ms이하 200ms이하 300ms이하
출력유지시간 20ms이하
출력표시등 녹색
일반특성
사용주위온도 (-)10℃~50℃ 온도특성 그래프참조(결로, 결빙 없을 것)
보존온도 (-)25℃~65℃(결로, 결빙 없을 것)
사용주위습도 25%~85% RH(보존 습도 25~90% RH)
입력단자와출력단자간 3,000VAC 1분간
내전압 입력단자와 GND간 2,000VAC 1분간
출력단자와 GND간 1,000VAC 1분간
검출전류
절연저항
20mA
100MΩ이상 (500VDC)
25mA
16
내진동 10~55Hz 진동폭 0.3mm
내충격 300m/s2 6방향 각 3회 이상 30G
단자나사 체결 Torque 0.8N·m (8.16kgf·cm)
부속기능
과전류보호 정격출력전류 105~160%, 자동복귀
부족전압표시등 적색
부족전압검출출력 없음 접점출력 : 0.1A 24VDC
※ 제품의 사양 및 재질은 품질향상 등의 목적으로 예고없이 변경될 수 있습니다.
16-5 Catalog
EQ5 시리즈
EQ5 - 030
EQ5 - 05024
90 96
35
60
75
4 - Ø4.5
20 80
EQ5 - 07524
EQ5 - 10024
145 96
75
35
60
4 - Ø4.5
20 135
EQ5 - 17524
EQ5 - 24024
280 142
130
115
35
4 - Ø4.5
20 270
16-6
EQ5 시리즈
사용상 주의사항 (EQ5 시리즈)
입력전원 내전압시험
·EQ5-030 , EQ5-05024는 ·전원은 입력단자와 출력단자간 3,000VAC
85V ~ 264VAC(Free Voltage) ·1분간 견딜 수 있도록 설계되어 있습니다.
·EQ5-07524, EQ5-10024, ·시험하실 경우 내전압시험기의 전류는 다음 값으로 설정해
EQ5-17524, EQ5-24024는 주시기 바랍니다.
단 락 편 (Short Bar)에 의 한 EQ5-030 , EQ5-05024, EQ5-07524, EQ5-10024 : 20mA
선택방식 입니다. EQ5-17524, EQ5-24024 : 25mA
110VAC : 85V ~ 132VAC 주의
220VAC : 170V ~ 264VAC 단락편 부착
·인가전압은 0 ~ 3,000V를 천천히 상승시켜 주시기 바랍니다. 시험후에
주의 도 전압을 서서히 내려 주시기 바랍니다.
·출하시의 설정은 개방 (220VAC)으로 되어 있습니다. 3,000V를 갑자기 인가하거나 차단하면 임펄스(Implus)가 발생하여
·EQ5-24024의 경우 220V 입력시의 전압은 170V ~ 253VAC 입니다. 전원부의 전기적 소손의 우려가 있습니다.
·출력단자, 부족전압검출 출력단자는 파손방지 목적상 반드시 모든
출력전압 단자를 단락시켜 주시기 바랍니다.
·2대의 전원으로 (±) 출력을 사용할 수 있습니다.
과전류보호기능
주의
·과전류보호회로(정격전류의 105%이상에서 작동)에 의해 단락, 과전류
·EQ5-030 , EQ5-05024 에
에 대하여 자동적으로 출력전압을 저하시켜 기기를 보호합니다.
있어서는 다이오드( )를 접속
과전류 상태가 해제되면 전원은 자동적으로 정상운전으로 복귀합니다.
하여 주십시오.
또 다이오드의 접속에 관한 상 주의
세한 사항은 당사 앞으로 문의 ·장시간 단락 및 과전류 상태는 내부소자의 열화 및 전기적 소손을 초래
해 주시기 바랍니다. 하므로 반드시 주의해 주시기 바랍니다.
(EQ5-07524, EQ5-10024,
EQ5-17524, EQ5-24024는 과전압보호기능
다이오드 접속을 하지않고 사
(EQ5-24024형에 한함)
용가능 합니다.)
·정격출력의 120%이상의 전압이 출력될 경우 출력전압을 차단,
과전압에 의한 부하의 소손을 방지합니다. 복귀는 입력전원을
직렬운전 Off해서 1분이상 방치한 다음 입력전원을 재투입하여 주시기 바랍니다.
·EQ5-10024, EQ5-17524, 주의
EQ5-24024에 한해서만 직렬
·입력전원의 재투입은 반드시 원인을 제거한 다음에 사용하여 주시기
운전 가능합니다.
바랍니다.
주의
·서로 다른 출력용량하에서 직 부족전압표시기능 및 보호접점 신호출력
렬운전도 가능은 하나 부하로
·출력전압의 저하가 검출되면 LED (DC LOW 적색)가 켜져서
흐르는 전류는 용량이 적은 쪽
출력이상을 알립니다.
의 정격출력 이하로 해주시기
바랍니다.
출력전압의 조정
·검출전압은 정격출력전압의 약 80%(75%~ 90%)로 설정되어 있습니다.
·75W이상급 타입에 있어서는 부족전압 검출출력을 가지고 있어 부족
전압 검출시에는 LED점등과 동시적으로 DC LOW단자 사이가 단락상
16
태로 변합니다.
·출하시에는 정격전압에 세팅되어 있습니다. 주의
전면의 V. ADJ에 의한 정격전압의 10%의 범위에서 조정 가능합니다.
·접점용랑 : 24VDC 0.1A
주의 ·부족전압 표시기능은 전원의 출력단자부의 전압을 감시하고 있습니다.
·10%이하로 세팅하면 부족전압 표시기능이 작동되는 수가 있습니다. 정확한 전압상태를 확인하는 경우는 부하단의 전압을 측정해 주시기
바랍니다.
절연저항시험
·절연저항 시험을 하실 때에는 DC 절연저항계를 500VDC로 사용해
CLASS 2 전원
주시기 바랍니다. ·EQ5-10024에서“Class2”요구를 충족시키는 경우에는 UL Listed,
주의 CSA가 인정하는 외에 최대 4.2A의 Fuse 또는 동등한 Circuit Bracker
를 부하와 직렬되게 삽입해 주시기 바랍니다. 전원출력부는 이것에 의
·기기의 파손을 방지하기 위해 모든 출력단자를 단락시켜 주시기 바랍니다.
해“Class2”에 적합해집니다.
16-7 Catalog
EQ5 시리즈
장착방법 및 효율
● 장착방법
장착에 있어 기기의 장기신뢰성을 높이기 위해 방열에 유의하시기 바랍니다. 자연대류식이므로 전원주위의 대기가
대류 가능토록 세팅해주시기 바랍니다.
① 공기의 대류
② 10mm이상 (2개 이상 장착시 제품간의 최소거리)
● 장착방향에 따른 효율에 대하여
■ 특성그래프 ■ 장착방법
ⓑ
ⓐ
ⓐ표준장착 ⓑ상향장착
● 과부하 발생시 부족전압 검출표시 / 출력

출력단의 전압저하를 검출하여 정격전압이 저하될 경우는 적색LED가 점등됩니다.
또한 릴레이의 외부출력이 이루어 집니다.
표시등의상태 전압상태 릴레이동작

녹색점등 DC ON 출력단 전압이
적색소등 DC LOW 정격전압의 90% 이상일때
녹색 LED가 점등합니다.
녹색점등 DC ON 출력단 전압이
적색점등 DC LOW 정격전압의 75%~90%일때
적색 LED가 점등합니다.
녹색소등 DC ON 출력단 전압이 0V일때
적색소등 DC LOW LED는 소등합니다.
16-8
FINAL DOCUMENT
4. INSPECTING REPORT

Hyundai Powertech Final Document (2017.07.10)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hyundai Powertech Final Document (2017.07.10)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hyundai Powertech Final Document (2017.07.10)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specification & Data Sheet for

Compressed Air Dryer Package

■ TYPE : HEAT OF COMPRESSION

■ CUSTOMER : HYUNDAI POWERTECH

Office & Factory : 경기도 김포시 월곶면 월하로 165

Dedication to every client,s success

WORLD LEADERS IN THE COMPRESSED AIR DRYING SYSTEMS

2. SPECIFICATIONS, DATA SHEET & DRAWING

3. PART LIST & CATALOG

Dedication to every client,s success

WORLD LEADERS IN THE COMPRESSED AIR DRYING SYSTEMS

Dedication to every client,s success

PTK-DS-001 WORLD LEADERS IN THE COMPRESSED AIR DRYING SYSTEMS

Operation & Maintenance

Manual for Air Dryer

Compressed Air Dryer

Office & Factory : WOLHARO 165, WOLGOT-MYUN, GIMPO-CITY, KOREA

Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128

E-mail : [email protected] www.ptkair.com

3. Characteristics of the equipment

10. The cause of the fault and the measures

11. Operation Check Sheet

12. Acceptant trial operation of conformance

do not use more than at the maximum use conditions.

Arbitrary welding on pressure vessels, damage or wear naegeona Do not change.

Also, check the specifications of the equipment nameplate Please,

please supply the power within the allowable voltage range.

current work carefully please.

immediately notify the parties to a complaint.

give proper consideration to the transport process.

-. Do not place the pollutants that generate a lot of heat.

-. You must obtain at least more than 1m of free space in order

to facilitate maintenance and inspection of equipment.

and repair, such as coolers.

if installed incorrectly and can reduce the capacity.

when connected Please.

cause damage of the adsorbent, so please conduct a possible pneumatic test.

-. Please connect equipment internal wiring is completed before shipment,

so only the state supply.

the can affect the dew point.

Desiccant dryers ago, trailing, you must install a filter.

rear of the dryer inside the facility can be prevented.

the ELEMENT and parts..

equipment, as well as adversely affect the human life cycle.

non-heated and heated Dryer widely used conventionally.

1) Operation cost reduction - uses an adsorbent to be reproduced at a low temperature,

are greater energy saving effect Saving.

the dew point.

because when cooling water pipe connection work.

hot air and cooling air the amount of control.

Office & Factory : WOLHARO 165, WOLGOT-MYUN, GIMPO-CITY, KOREA

Telephone : 82-31-998-9126 Fax : 82-31-998-9128

E-mail : [email protected] www.ptkair.com

4.1 Drying Cycle

through the first one of the small tower.

to the exit the problems of the drying cycle that it is.

- Standard type PHCN Type Drying Cycle : 4.0hr

And it is referred to as Regeneration Regeneration is accomplished by two processes.

the lower side of the recovery tower piping temperature is raised.